JP7104334B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a game ball enters a starting port, and temporarily stores this as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each time such a predetermined start condition is satisfied, such an operation holding ball is sequentially digested one by one, and a hit / fail determination of whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. If the result of the winning / failing judgment is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of a plurality of rows is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) to be in a state is established (see, for example, Patent Document 1) .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-150373

Since pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate it from the conventional models.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a start port. A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the game , a symbol display device for displaying a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing determination, and the game area are provided. , A large winning opening that is opened according to the result of the winning / failing determination and allows a game ball to enter, and a special game that accompanies the opening of the large winning opening when the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit. The effect display device is provided with a special game execution means , an effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect, and an effect determination means for determining the effect to be displayed on the effect display device. As the display of the symbol to be shown, the variation display and stop display of the first symbol and the variation display and stop display of the second symbol can be displayed, and the first symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variation display of the special symbol. However, it is configured to continue the variable display of the second symbol even during the temporary stop display of the first symbol, has a plurality of types of staging stages, and can output BGM according to the type of the staging stage. At least in a predetermined production stage, it is possible to continuously output the predetermined BGM from the end of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol without interrupting the predetermined BGM, and the first symbol can be output. When the temporary stop display is performed and then the variable display is performed again, the output of the predetermined BGM that has been continued is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or the BGM different from the predetermined BGM is output. When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed, and the development effect is executed after the re-variation display, the BGM corresponding to the development effect can be output and the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At that time, the display mode of the first symbol can be changed to the predetermined mode, while the display mode of the second symbol does not change to the predetermined mode, and the development effect is not executed during the variable display of the special symbol. By having a certain first effect pattern and a second effect pattern which is an effect pattern for executing a development effect during variable display of a special symbol, the first symbol can be displayed in each of a plurality of symbol rows. It is possible to display a plurality of variable display and stop display of the first symbol, and in the first staging pattern, each of the plurality of first symbols can be changed to a predetermined mode, while in the second staging pattern, a plurality of the first symbols can be displayed. The first symbol of a part of the first symbol of The first symbol, which can be changed but is not changed to a predetermined mode, is configured so that the effect display according to the type of the effect stage can be executed, and the predetermined effect is displayed on the predetermined effect stage. It is possible to display the effect display corresponding to the stage, and when the development effect is executed after the re-variation display of the first symbol in the predetermined effect stage, the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage is executed during the execution of the development effect. Instead, it is possible to display the effect display corresponding to the development effect, and the development effect ends when a special effect is executed during the execution of the development effect after the re-variation display of the first symbol on the predetermined effect stage. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the development effect can be terminated and the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage can be displayed again during the variable display in which the development effect is executed, but the development effect is executed. Even in a predetermined situation where the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage is displayed again during the variable display, the predetermined BGM is not output, while the variable display in which the development effect is executed ends. When the next fluctuation display is started, a predetermined BGM is output from the beginning .

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the staging control board of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol attribute of a decorative symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol combination of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot medium effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the super longevity jackpot production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen during a round game. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the structure of a prize-related production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the over prize production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the big prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the bonus prize-winning production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the general winning opening count-up effect. It is a time chart used to explain the priority of the grand prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram used for the explanation of the emphasis staging. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the error type of a gaming machine. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection state of a touch sensor, an over winning effect, and a general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the volume adjustment screen. This is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect. It is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters a general prize opening. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 35 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the process of displaying a special symbol stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 47 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning effect content determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol jackpot symbol table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a comparison table of the variation time of the special symbol of the 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the ordinary symbol lottery of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the big prize opening of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol jackpot symbol table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big prize opening operation pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the effect when the special big hit result of 3rd Embodiment is stopped display. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round effect pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit start demonstration effect pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the big hit start demonstration production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit end demo production pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the big hit type determination effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the 1st reward acquisition production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the 1st reward acquisition effect of 3rd Embodiment, and the type of reward. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the 2nd reward acquisition production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the type of the reward of the 2nd reward acquisition production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the reward combination pattern table of the 2nd reward acquisition effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the 2nd reward acquisition production (main part production) of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the special button effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button number setting table of the special button effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol jackpot symbol table of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big prize opening operation pattern table of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the special meter effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the execution timing of the special meter effect of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect in hold of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit suggestion effect lottery table in the hold of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the big hit non-lottery process of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol big hit symbol table and the special symbol small hit symbol table of 5th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern selection state table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern selection state transition table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 0 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 4 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 5 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 6 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 7 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 8 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display area of the decorative symbol and the auxiliary symbol of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the effect mode of 5th Embodiment, and the variation display of a decorative symbol and an auxiliary symbol. It is a schematic diagram which provides the explanation of the simultaneous variation processing of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the determination flag used for the simultaneous variation processing of 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart 1 which shows the setting timing of the flag A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart 2 which shows the setting timing of the flag A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart 3 which shows the setting timing of the flag A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart 4 which shows the setting timing of the flag A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart 1 which shows the setting timing of the flag D1 and the flag D2 of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart 2 which shows the setting timing of the flag D1 and the flag D2 of the fifth embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the end timing of the electric support state of 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the state transition when the variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol are performed at the same time when the game state of the 5th embodiment is the probability variation game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the special battle production of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the basic screen of the number-of-person determination effect of 5th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the lottery process of the special battle production of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the turbulent battle scenario table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the character pattern table lottery table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ally character pattern table 1 to 3 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the enemy character pattern table 1 to 3 of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the structure of the character data A to H of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the converted character pattern table of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the conversion of the arrangement of the character data A to H of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the method of determining the entry order of a ally character and an enemy character of the 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the dialogue notice staging of 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the dialogue notice effect of 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect of 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
The front view and the rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to this drawing. The pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions equivalent to those of the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and is the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game. It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko game machines>
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is fitted to the front surface of the opening of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer square frame size. The front frame 2 which is configured in the size of a square frame and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened / closed and detached sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

A square glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable and closable and detachable by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the double glazing of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect of being pressed by a player in the center of the front of the upper ball plate 8 A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for launching a game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball plate 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as "effect button 15", but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch, and outputs according to the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Touch panel, etc., used in concepts that include all types of operation input means.

The game board 20 is constructed based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. Further, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position (of the inner rail 42) near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage is formed. A ball return prevention valve 43 is provided at the tip end portion) to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various types such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. In addition to the winning openings, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, the second special symbol hold lamp 74, the ordinary symbol display device 75, the normal symbol hold lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21.

The game area PA is a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to a left-handed hit) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to a right-handed hit) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is divided into a right side area PA2 which is a board area). A top plate portion 22 facing the outer rail 41 in the substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and is located between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A connecting passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side region PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter any of the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a left-handed game ball) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter the ball. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side region PA2 which is a board surface region corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522, which is generally called an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced in the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity described later (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a front-rear sliding movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) in which the second starting port 52 is closed to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 is opened to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) with the open position (evacuation position) that facilitates. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down toward you and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In this example, the large winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, by hitting the right area PA2, so-called right hit, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. It has become.

The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side region PA1 which is a board surface region corresponding to left-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 include a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like, and the game ball to any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 It is also possible to detect the entry of a ball.

The general winning opening 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2, which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the opportunity to acquire the prize ball like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53). It becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are composed of, for example, two LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. Express (up to 4 each). The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value acquired based on the entry of balls into the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. Yes, the acquired random number value is withheld, that is, the number for which the hit / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value is shown. Similarly, the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is a random number value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This is the number to which the acquired random number value is withheld, that is, the number for which the hit / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. There is.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations (the number of normal symbol fluctuations that have not yet been executed). A round display 77 is provided on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75 to display the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated). ing.

The staging display device 70 mainly includes a fluctuating staging of a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops and displays in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a staging effect that suggests or informs the expectation of a big hit in advance. In addition to displaying the image, the hold display corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure hold lamp 73, and a second special figure hold lamp 74. A holding image display area 710 in which the reserved image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with the above, and a changing image display area 720 in which the changing image corresponding to the fluctuation display is displayed are provided. There is. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 has a three-row display area (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) on a predetermined effective line (not shown), which is a variable display area of the decorative symbol. ) Is provided, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left symbol display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. Each symbol is stopped and displayed. On the hold image display unit 710, a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol are displayed. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of entry) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol, and the maximum of 4 reserved images of the 1st special symbol and the maximum 4 reserved images of the 2nd special symbol are displayed. It can be displayed. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing variable display is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. Further, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “directing lamp LP”.

Subsequently, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, the back set board 30 which has a window communicating with the front and rear in the center and is based on a base frame formed in a rectangular frame shape which is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 is above and below. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be opened and closed and attached / detached sideways. A rectangular box-shaped back set cover 30C with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the staging control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is connected to the storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, the tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and the right end of the tank rail 32 and downward. A prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the ball supply passage unit 33, the prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage part 33, and the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls the overall production, image display according to the game development, and sound effect control. An image control board 300, etc. for performing the above is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, the payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and the power is received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) to enable the pachinko gaming machine PM to operate.

<Control configuration of pachinko machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs, various data, and the like, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform key controls on progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is reset when the clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate the internal system clock and the main CPU 101 malfunctions or goes into a runaway state. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the generation of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and registers held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the left general winning opening switch 611, the right general winning opening switch 641 and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol hold lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to the 76, it is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are transmitted via the I / O port circuit 104. It is transmitted to the display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. Based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100, the external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the game machine PM. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the staging control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the staging control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the main control board 100, and data transmission cannot be requested from the main control board 100.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. It is equipped with a production control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute the main control related to the game production according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, for inputting / outputting serial data Serial communication circuits and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The staging control board 200 is an staging control process based on a staging control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The staging control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and while image control commands related to images and sounds are transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300, as a response, the effect control board 200 is transmitted. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the staging control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Therefore, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP to control the effect lamp LP to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the staging control board 200. Alternatively, the movable accessory 24 is controlled to operate by shutting off. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured to include a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. , The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control related to the image production according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in an image ROM in response to an instruction from a sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by the image processing to an effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM in response to the instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and controls for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured to include a backup power supply circuit for generating a power supply circuit and a power supply power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring a power supply cutoff due to a voltage drop, and is a power supply required for electronic / electrical parts such as each control board and gaming equipment. To supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and on the premise that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power supply switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply disconnection is detected, the power supply disconnection signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact is sent to the main control board 100. , The effect is transmitted to the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device of the game island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 500 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signals that the external information terminal plate 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a continuous villa signal, a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), and a door. It includes a frame opening signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal and the like. Further, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and each game It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the game machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the game machine PM without going through a data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko game machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked before being used for the game. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the launch handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launch mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side region PA2 and flows down the left side region PA1. In the left side region PA1, a left side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side region PA2 and flows down the right side region PA2. In the right side region PA2, a right side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 is formed. The game balls flowing down the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA2 in this way have the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operating gate 53 according to the paths distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , The large winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 61 to 64 can be entered, but if the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, the large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 61 to 63, a prize is given according to the type of the winning opening. The ball is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls (referred to as "unit number of prize balls") to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening, the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second. The starting opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the large winning opening 54 is set to "15". The number of unit prize balls in each winning opening is not limited to the number illustrated in this embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting port 51 may be "1" instead of "4". Further, the second starting port 52 may be "3" instead of "1". Further, the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be "5" instead of "3". Further, the large winning opening may be "10" instead of "15".

When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a condition for starting fluctuation of the special symbol described later) is satisfied, the winning / failing determination, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination of the special symbol are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest operation holding ball. In the mode according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the staging display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time according to the selected variable pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the big winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, an embodiment in which three types of symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the jackpot games.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined final number of times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) will occur relatively early. Become. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of variable display times until the next big hit occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the probability variation function of the special symbol. When the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved (the jackpot per unit time). Ease of acquisition can be increased).

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as "electric support") may be activated in association with or independently of the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The electric chew support function enhances the ease of entering the second starting port 52 by operating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522. It is a state (also referred to as "electric support state" or "easy ball entry state"). When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than that in the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time is more likely to increase than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 is also increased. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, by operating the electric chew support function, the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 during that period increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls of the game ball, becomes high. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and the state in which the electric chew support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

<Main functional configurations of pachinko machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. Note that FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. The special game control means 150, the symbol display control means 155, the electric accessory control means 160, the game state control means 165, the error monitoring control means 170, the main information storage means 180, and the command transmission / reception means 190 are included. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The ball entry determination means 110 is based on the detection signals from the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, and the like, and each winning opening. Judge the entry of the game ball into. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball by the first start port switch 511, the ball entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "first start port winning command") to that effect, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball is detected by the start port switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as "the second start port winning command") indicating that fact is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 of the game ball When the passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") indicating that fact is generated, and when the large winning opening switch 541 detects the entry of a game ball, it indicates that fact. When a production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated and a game ball entry is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, a directing control command indicating that fact ("left general winning opening") (Referred to as "winning command") is generated, and when the right general winning opening switch 611 detects the entry of a game ball, an effect control command (referred to as "right general winning opening winning command") is generated to that effect. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generating means 120 is used for a winning / losing lottery of a special symbol by taking in a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the initial value for performing a new update after the update of one cycle of the special symbol per soft random number added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for the hit random number generation and the special symbol per soft random number is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for new update after one cycle of update is completed, special symbol fluctuation pattern random number for selection of special symbol variation pattern, Random numbers per ordinary symbol to be used for winning / failing lottery of ordinary symbols, initial value random numbers per ordinary symbol to determine the initial value for new updates after one cycle of random numbers per ordinary symbol is completed, Ordinary symbol variation pattern Random numbers for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are updated while the timer interrupt process is not executed (while the timer interrupt process is not executed). (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol holding control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, and is a random value per special symbol or per special symbol. The symbol random value and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A third reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided, respectively. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (first-in, first-out principle). Further, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively, and the reserved ball information is shifted to the lower numbered storage area. Hold 4 Clear the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 has a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol hold ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the special symbol's operation-holding balls is acquired as an update process of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation-holding ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the hold ball number (“symbol memory”). A number command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , So-called priority digestion is adopted, so that while the operation holding ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation holding related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation holding ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. Under this priority digestion, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is digested. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a symbol random value value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 53. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in the form of being combined with the entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the normal symbol's hold balls is acquired as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires the operation-holding ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes a pre-determination for pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and Either when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol that does not have an ordinary electric accessory, and eight are reserved at normal times. For models that can store, the above (1) can be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.) good. Further, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not the result is correct. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of hit / fail), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgment of symbol), and pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers in each of the hit / fail pre-judgment table, the symbol pre-judgment table, and the variation pattern pre-judgment table is divided into a plurality of areas. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also referred to as a "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (result of winning / failing determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). The winning / failing pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determining table, and the like may be the same as the winning / failing lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, in the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table, there is a possibility that the game status at the start of fluctuation (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a time reduction, whether or not it is during a limited frequency period that refers to a special table, the number of reserved balls, etc.) may change. Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Further, as a modification, it is configured to predetermine a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. When the change start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 is set in the earliest storage area (hold 1 storage area) of the special symbol hold storage area in the main information storage means 180. The stored random value per special symbol, random value per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and used as the special symbol hit / fail determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means 180. Store each in the judgment area. Here, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (A3). ) When all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists is satisfied. In addition, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists is satisfied. When the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed under the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this hit / fail judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. FIG. 5 (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 5 (B) is a gaming state (high probability) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. State). In the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the winning / failing determination of the special symbol, in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 319.69" to the high probability "1 / 43.49". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set equally between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 uses the first special symbol jackpot symbol table and the second special symbol jack symbol table and the second, which are referred to when determining the jackpot symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variation jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means the special symbol after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of.

In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probabilistic game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability fluctuation function operating is called the "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (3) all The state in which the function is not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are more advantageous game states for the player than the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as "advantageous gaming states" as the gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, each game state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state can be expressed as "high probability high base state", (2) time saving game state can be expressed as "low probability high base state", and (3) normal game state can be expressed as "low probability low base state". In addition, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state, while the operating state of the electric chew support function is a low base state (a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the "normal gaming state"). One) may be provided, such a gaming state may be referred to as a latent gaming state, and this latent gaming state may be referred to as a “high probability low base state”. This latent game state (“high probability low base state”) is a game state suitable for playing a game mainly with a small hit, and the details will be described later. Regarding these states (combination state of low probability / high probability and low base / high base), unless otherwise specified, the game state (hit / fail judgment and fluctuation display are possible) in a state other than during a big hit or a small hit. (State), but during the big hit, it is a low probability low base state, and during the small hit, it is the same game state as the game state at the time of winning the small hit. At this time, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated, at least the variation time of the first special symbol (normal game state) in the game state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game (normal game state) In the game state (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time saving game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the variation time (average variation time) of at least the second special symbol is shortened. Time) is shortened.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (1) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (2) game at the time of big hit winning. Determined according to the condition. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the special symbol probability variation function is activated (referred to as the "probability variation number") and the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated. It is set according to the number of times the operation is performed (referred to as the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time") and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as the "number of times of electric support"). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start the operation at the same time and end the operation at the same time. Therefore, the "variation time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same number of times. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time" and the "number of times of electric support operation" are described in the same column).

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions (the number of electric support), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and each round. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group A)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10000 times", and the electric support count "10000 times" are set, and the jackpot game The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. In this probabilistic game state, a huge number of times of continuation (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is set as "10000 times", and the jackpot is not won until the continuation number is reached. Is not probabilistic (winning at about 1/44), so it will continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions (the number of electric support), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and each round. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: symbol group C)
When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10000 times", and the electric support count "10000 times" are set, and the jackpot game The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic game state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times" as the number of times of continuation, and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R specific jackpot may be a specification that wins even the first special symbol, and in that case, it is harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols is used, and the first In 1 special symbol, it is preferable that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group D)
When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10000 times", and the electric support count "10000 times" are set, and the jackpot game The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic game state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times" as the number of times of continuation, and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group E)
When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided: 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B and E). Has been done. The expected value of winning a prize ball in a special game (referred to as "expected value of winning a prize ball") is 16R specific jackpot> 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the second special symbol is "4 rounds". Since it is "16 rounds", there is a higher possibility of shifting to a special game with a large number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol than in the case where a big hit occurs in the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player in that he / she can get a ball. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for the special game. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are referred to as "long opening round games"), but a predetermined round during the same jackpot game. Alternatively, in all rounds, a "short open round game" is provided in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is shortened to 2 seconds, so that even if the number of rounds of the big hit game is the same, the balls are substantially released. A configuration having a jackpot with a different number of rounds that can be obtained (a jackpot with a different number of actual rounds) may be adopted. In the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be inserted into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. It is a round game. In the short open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that the specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of the game balls cannot be entered or it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 54. It is a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. In each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are defined. In each figure, "selectivity" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. For various fluctuation patterns, it is assumed that the fluctuation time is associated with each fluctuation pattern as the end condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at the fluctuation time. ..

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a "normal selection state", a "time saving selection state", and a "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a fluctuation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which none of the special symbol probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function is activated. In the time saving selection state, the variation set according to the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated. The pattern is selected. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the gaming state (probability variation game state) in which all of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are operating.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation-holding balls ("hold 0", "hold 1-2", "hold 3") described in each figure is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol. It means the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold-digestion), and in the case of the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (after hold-digestion). It means the number of operation holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold-digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disparity without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach outliers". The non-reach out-of-reach types differ from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time for the shortened variation than for the normal variation and for the ultra-shortened variation than for the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If different decorative symbols stop in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it will be a "big hit".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N Reach, and after the establishment of the reach, it evolved from the N Reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action. Etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as the types of SP reach. The SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the currently executing game state is the normal state. The SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the currently being executed gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. The SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the currently being executed gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state. In the variation pattern type of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of "non-reach" <"N reach" <"SP reach". As a modification, the effect content of the SP reach may be the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time-saving game state, and a different SP reach (SP reach C) may be used in the probabilistic game state. Further, as another modification, a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream may be prepared. Pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variated during the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. (Pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-variation effect, pseudo-continuous variation effect, re-variation effect). That is, the pseudo-ream is an effect of executing the pseudo-variation in which the temporary stop or the fixed stop is executed a plurality of times after all the decorative symbols in the three rows start to change or re-change. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams (the number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortening variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortening fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 One of (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative without depending on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the second special symbol. The variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation) set to be short is selected. As a modification, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main fluctuation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened fluctuation is selected regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation may be configured to be the easiest to select (preferably, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol).

Fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for deviation. .. Here, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is incorrect, the fluctuation pattern PH2- One of 2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is selected regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 One of (SP reach B) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. In this case, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is for the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) to be selected.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation pattern PH3- does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). 2 (normal variation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is selected regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, one of the fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. Will be done. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, the reference destination is according to the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (for details, depending on the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random number values are the same. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) can be selected only when the second special symbol is present, the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is present rather than the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is not present. This tends to make it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time.

The fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) does not depend on the big hit type (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Be selected.

As described above, the variation pattern tables 1 to 3 specify the variation time of the special symbol for each variation pattern, but regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the determination stop time (determination) of the special symbol is specified. The display time) is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3, the same effect content and fluctuation time may be obtained at the time of the big hit and at the time of the loss, but it is preferable that the final effect content is different between the time of the big hit and the time of the loss. In other words, even if the N reach is the same, the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: "7, 7, 7") at the time of big hit, while the decorative pattern will be out of reach (example: "7.8") at the time of off.・ 7 ”), or even if the SP reach A to C is the same, at the time of a big hit, the final production content will be the production content indicating success, and the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: ally character wins over enemy character) , After that, "7, 7, 7" is displayed), but when it is off, the final production content becomes the production content indicating failure and the decorative pattern is out of reach (example: ally character is an enemy character) It is preferable that the player is defeated and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed). In addition, it is preferable that the fluctuation time (production time) is longer than that at the time of big hit, even if the production content is the same (when the same SP reach is developed), as an example. It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of a big hit has a fluctuation time (effect time) that is 10 seconds longer than that of the SP reach A to C at the time of a miss.

Since the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol after selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, is communication with the effect control board 200 performed normally? Effect control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not, effect control command (variation addition information specification command) including variation addition pattern of special symbol (information for adding / subtracting variation time), variation pattern of special symbol Generate production control commands (variable pattern specification commands) that include information, effect control commands (symbol specification commands) that include information on character production numbers (symbols and game states), etc. (Referred to as "variation start command"), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random value per normal symbol and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol" are (1) waiting for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and (2) the existence of the operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation can be started (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol, and the determination result is either "hit" or "miss". Determine if this is the case. The result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a non-illustrated ordinary symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to when determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is activated. If so, it is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and when the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is a hit, the predetermined hit symbol (the trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is incorrect, a predetermined missing symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the hit symbols of the normal symbol, while the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the normal symbol.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to refer to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table. Determine (variation time). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Is set to "0.2 seconds" when is operating. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the control of the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric chew support function is not operating, the hit probability of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to "0", and the normal symbol is controlled. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the fluctuation time is a single one.

Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds an ordinary electric accessory opening pattern table that is referred to when determining an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds open x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ", and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B," 2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5) .8 seconds) ".

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group). Determine the execution time (round time) of the round game. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute the effect control command (referred to as "big hit start demo command") and the jackpot end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as a "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command also serves as an opportunity for determining the content of a series of jackpot start demo productions (big hit start demo production, round production, jackpot end demo production) developed during the jackpot game on the production control board 200 side. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening 54. As will be described later in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is uniformly set to 20 seconds, but the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo are uniformly set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the end demo, not only the jackpot type (symbol group) but also the jackpot start demo and jackpot even if the same jackpot type (symbol group) is used depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The execution time (demo time) of the end demo may be different. For example, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, for the 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demo production). , "Normal jackpot start" is displayed as the effect A-1), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 15 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, the effect B-1 and prepaid that are displayed as "time saving mode rush" are executed. While it is a card (* a storage medium that stores information about the amount of money required to borrow a game ball for games), it is used as an effect C to call attention to forgetting to take it), while it has a high probability of a high base state or a low probability. When a big hit is made in a high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (the production A-1 is executed as the big hit start demo production), and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 10 seconds (as the big hit end demo production). Production B-1 is executed, and production C is not executed). For 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, if a jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (big hit start demo). As a production, the production A-2 that is displayed as "probability change jackpot start" is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds (the production B-2 that is displayed as "probability change mode entry" as the jackpot end demo production). And the effect C is executed), while the big hit in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (the effect A-2 is executed as the big hit start demo effect). Then, the execution time of the jackpot end demo may be 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, the effect B-3 displayed as "probability change mode continuation" is executed, and the effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, if it is a jackpot in the first special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot is 5 seconds, and as a jackpot start demo effect, production A-1 or production A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot and 16R specific jackpot and For the 4R specific jackpot, it takes 30 seconds to execute production B-2 and production C as the jackpot end demo production. However, for the 4R normal jackpot, it takes 15 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo production, production B-1 and production C are performed. On the other hand, if it is a big hit with the second special symbol, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit. 5 seconds, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds (20 seconds for 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, and the jackpot end demo). As the effect, the effect B-3 is executed and the effect C is not executed. However, the 4R normal jackpot may be set to 10 seconds, and the effect B-1 may be executed and the effect C may not be executed as the big hit end demo effect). .. This relationship between time values is an example, and if the magnitude relationship of each demo time in each situation is the same as above, it is not limited to this time value. Further, in any of the above specifications, the effect C does not occur when the jackpot is hit in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, but during the fluctuation related to the jackpot or during the jackpot game (during the special game). When the power is cut off and the power is cut off during the fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect C may be generated exceptionally.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 72 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the fluctuation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). Generates an effect control command (referred to as "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

Further, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that the period during which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed continues for a predetermined time or longer. If the period in which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or longer, or if the period in which the game ball is not entered in all the winning openings continues for a predetermined time or longer, the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It may be a continuous specification.

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after confirming the special symbol, and outputs the control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is set as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation end condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enters the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 when the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol corresponds to a hit, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (No. 1) for a predetermined opening time. 2 Opening and closing control of the starting port 52) is performed. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. Then, in the high base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the second starting port 52, or that the second starting port 52 has a predetermined number of game balls. The opening time has reached the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 is based on the big hit type (type of symbol group) and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state (low probability low base state), a time-saving game state (low probability low base state), and a probability variation game state (high probability high base state) are used. It is set, and one of a plurality of types of gaming states is selectively set. Since each game state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (type of symbol group) when the jackpot game is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game. Switch the variable pattern selection state of. In the present embodiment, a normal selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, and the game state, the jackpot type, the number of variation display times of the special symbol, and the like determined above are set. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is selectively set. Since each fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the game machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to the effect control board 200 in order to indicate the error state effect. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 includes random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game. Information on shortening function, electric chew support function), information on variable pattern selection status, result information of hit / fail judgment of special symbols and ordinary symbols (big hit, miss), stop symbols related to special symbols and ordinary symbols (including symbol group) Information, information on variation patterns (including variation addition patterns) of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on jackpot games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information of effect control command data, and the like, and is a predetermined storage for storing each information. It has an area.

When a command transmission request is made, the command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the staging control board 200 includes a staging lottery random number generation means 210, a staging control means 220, a lamp control means 230, an accessory control means 240, an error staging control means 250, a sub-main information storage means 260, and a command. The transmission / reception means 270 is included. Each of the above-mentioned means on the staging control board 200 is composed of hardware such as a sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the staging control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

The staging lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (staging lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead lottery random number used for the lottery of the look-ahead effect, a decorative symbol random number used for the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a variable effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect. The notice lottery random number used for the lottery, the big hit effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the big hit effect pattern, the stage lottery random number used for the transition lottery of the effect stage, and the like are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main processing on the effect control side (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100), which will be described later. do.

The staging control means 220 includes a staging mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a variable staging control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice staging control means 226, and a special game staging control means 227. include.

The effect mode control means 221 is based on a game state designation command from the main control board 100, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. (Also referred to as "game effect mode") is controlled. In the present embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", and "probability variation effect mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the gaming state (or fluctuation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side is set. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the selected state) and the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal effect mode" is set, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving effect mode" is set, and the game state is the probabilistic game state. In some cases, the "probability change effect mode" is set. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) Is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The hold information display control means 222 provides a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, the value of the corresponding counter is updated (subtracted). Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of hold images of the first special symbol on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol. Further, the hold information display control means 222 digests the operation hold ball (the earliest operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol into the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70. , Controls to display the changing image displayed by switching to the holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as a "pending image" without distinction, and are referred to as a changing image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 executes a look-ahead determination (referred to as "look-ahead lottery") for the operation holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous advance notice effect that announces the possibility of a big hit or a high-expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more variable displays before the operation-holding ball to be read-ahead is digested. It occurs as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the look-ahead advance notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the pre-determination result information of the first special symbol and the pre-determination result information of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entry order of the operation holding balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), in the order of entry into each of the starting ports 51 and 52, A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of success / failure, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation patterns as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 It is digested in the order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is stored in the lower numbered storage area, respectively. At the same time as shifting, the contents of the hold 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The variation effect control means 224 is based on the information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. ) Is determined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and the variation pattern of the special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. A variation effect pattern table corresponding to (variation time) is selected. Here, while the main fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B") is determined on the main control board 100 side, the effect control board 200 side is based on the main fluctuation pattern. Sub-variable patterns of decorative patterns (for example, "SP reach A1, A2 ...", "SP reach A2, A3 ...", etc.) that define the scenario of the staging display process in detail are determined. The decorative pattern variation effect pattern defines a variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing for generating the effect is also defined as the time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation effect pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even if the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect modes during the stay are different, they are produced mutually. Variable staging patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay.

Further, the variation effect control means 224 receives the standby demo command from the main control board 100, and after receiving the standby demo command, until the variation display of the special symbol is started (the next variation start). During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decorative symbol control means 225 is decorated based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the above variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by, for example, identification elements composed of numbers and the like. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as "stop symbol pattern") is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a missed symbol (missing symbol)". The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1.3.8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbol is displaced back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific result called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" or "5 ・ 6 ・ 7" as the order), etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the deviation. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when a temporary stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol (a special symbol as a temporary stop symbol suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) is used. Pseudo-series pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream, at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) of the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There is a case (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.) in which a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is replaced and displayed. The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns, and in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and if it is a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start to change at the same time when the change starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbol in the present embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element composed of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In the present embodiment, all nine types of numbers "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are all nine types of decorative symbols). Each decorative symbol is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, and is in the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") on the staging display device 70. In each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, it is cyclically displayed or scrolled, and after "9", it returns to "1" again (or after "1", it returns to "9" again). .. This specification is the same in other embodiments. The symbol attribute of each decorative symbol is determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors of the decorative pattern are set: "blue", "red", and "gold". In addition, on the drawing, the display mode of three kinds of decorative symbols of "blue", "red", and "gold" is expressed by "white", "diagonal line", and "filled". Specifically, the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified. Is classified into a red symbol attribute (red attribute), and the decorative symbol "7" is classified into a golden symbol attribute (gold attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the ball output and the expectation of the probability change transition are increased by one step in the order of "blue" <"red" <"gold". Hereinafter, for convenience, the decorative symbol having a blue attribute is also referred to as a "blue symbol", the decorative symbol having a red attribute is also referred to as a "red symbol", and the decorative symbol having a golden attribute is also referred to as a "gold symbol".

The advance notice effect control means 226 draws a lottery for the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by. The advance notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the jackpot reliability is high, in which the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the variable display process of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher expectation of a big hit than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect control means 226 holds the advance notice lottery table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and the advance notice according to the type of the advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The lottery table is selected. As specific types of advance notice production, for example, comment advance notice effect, background advance notice effect, SU (step-up) advance notice effect, logo advance notice effect, mini character advance notice effect, group advance notice effect, character advance notice effect, etc. are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is varied and displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content of the big hit medium effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that the big hit game is in progress. The jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production that notifies the start of the jackpot game, a round production that notifies that the round game is in progress, and a jackpot end demo production that notifies the end of the jackpot game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227 is based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, and the jackpot medium effect pattern (big hit start demo effect pattern). , Round production pattern, jackpot end demo production pattern) is decided. In this jackpot production pattern, a jackpot start demo production time, a round production time (a production time according to the opening pattern of the jackpot 54), and a jackpot end demo production time are set, and along the time axis. A series of production contents are set. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the jackpot start demo effect when the jackpot start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives the round effect designation command as a trigger. Each round production is executed, and the jackpot end demo production is executed when the jackpot end demo command is received. In the jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to notify the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the jackpot game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demo effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the jackpot game, and an effect indicating the game state (mode) to be shifted thereafter is displayed.

As described above, the staging control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined staging contents (look-ahead staging pattern, variable staging pattern, notice staging pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot staging pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the staging lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the staging content set by the staging control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read out, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is a predetermined device for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and executes various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 preferentially performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by the serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the staging control board 200, and causes the staging display device 70 to fluctuately display the staging image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the fluctuating staging pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PA having such a configuration is configured so that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. In the following, among various game effects, the contents of the big hit medium effect will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing a part, lowering the priority of display or output, etc. It is used as a concept including. Further, in the following, "duplicate execution (duplicate execution)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing) overlap, and both executions are executed. It is used in the concept including the case where all the periods (or execution timings) overlap and the case where a part of both execution periods (or execution timings) overlap.

[Direction during big hit]
As described above, the jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production, a round production, and a jackpot end demo production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a jackpot type (type of symbol group), a jackpot symbol combination (combination of decorative symbols when a jackpot occurs), and a jackpot medium effect pattern. FIG. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot medium effect pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In the present embodiment, even if the big hit types are the same, the type of the big hit symbol combination and the type of the big hit medium effect pattern can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit.

The jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination of stop modes "* ・ * ・ *" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are arranged (*: decorative symbol of an arbitrary number). The jackpot symbol combination includes "specific jackpots" such as "1.1.1", "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7/7/7", and "9/9/9". The odd number combination (red symbol combination, gold symbol combination) shown and the "specific jackpot" such as "2.2.2", "44.4", "6/6/6", "8/8/8" It is distinguished from the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) indicating "normal jackpot". That is, the odd-numbered symbol combination (gold symbol combination, red symbol combination) is a jackpot symbol combination that confirms that the "specific jackpot" has been won, while the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) is the "specific jackpot" and "specific jackpot". It is a jackpot symbol combination in which it is uncertain which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" is won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. That is, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among the plurality of jackpot types. It is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds for the red symbol combination is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but the player must have won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state. It is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies. It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds of the blue symbol combination is "4 rounds", but whether it has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state, or the "short-time game state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that it is uncertain whether or not the "normal jackpot" that triggers the transition has been won. Here, even if it is a combination of blue symbols, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is a probabilistic jackpot of "16 rounds", the blue symbol may be used. It may be configured so that the combination can be selected), but it is preferable that the red symbol combination is more likely to have a real number of rounds of "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "ki jackpot productions" described later, a "ki jackpot C production" that is a probabilistic promotion and a round promotion may be provided.

In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of big hit medium production patterns, "super long hit big hit production", "long life big hit A production", "long life big hit B production", "ki big hit A production", and "ki big hit B production" are set. Has been done. The super longevity big hit effect is a big hit medium effect pattern type set corresponding to the big hit symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination". The Kotobuki jackpot A effect and the Kotobuki jackpot B effect are big hit medium effect pattern types set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being the "red symbol combination". The Ki jackpot effect A and the Ki jackpot B effect are the jackpot medium effect pattern types set corresponding to the jackpot symbol combination being the “blue symbol combination”. That is, the jackpot medium effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11A, a jackpot symbol combination and a jackpot middle effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state will be described. First, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11B, the jackpot symbol combination and the jackpot middle effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state will be described. When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the gold symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the red symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Shou jackpot B production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium production pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

The super-juvenile jackpot effect is a jackpot effect pattern that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of jackpots.

It has been confirmed that the Kotobuki jackpot A production and the Kotobuki jackpot B production have been won in the "specific jackpot" type, which triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached. Is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses while it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds". Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A production reaches the predetermined number of rounds (4th round), the promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "4 rounds". It is confirmed that there is. On the other hand, in the Kotobuki jackpot B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds for the Ki jackpot A production and the Ki jackpot B production is "4 rounds", but until the end of the jackpot demonstration is reached, the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state. It is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses without being uncertain whether it is won in the "normal big hit" that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state. Here, in the Ki jackpot A production, even if the jackpot end demo is reached, the promotion production (probability variation promotion production) is not performed, and the jackpot type this time is "normal jackpot" (time reduction after the end of this jackpot game). (Transition to the game state) is confirmed. On the other hand, in the Ki jackpot B production, when the jackpot end demo is reached, a promotion production (probability variation promotion production) occurs, and the jackpot type this time is "specific jackpot" (probability variation game state after the end of this jackpot game). To move to) is confirmed. Further, in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot medium production pattern is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, but as shown in FIG. 11B, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It may be a correspondence relationship. Further, a 16R specific jackpot may be provided on the first special symbol, and in that case, a super-jump jackpot effect or a jujutsu jackpot B effect may be executed even at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol. The details of the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each jackpot production pattern will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic views showing the contents of the big hit medium effect pattern. In the figure, the correspondence between the types of individual effects generated during the big hit game and the timing of occurrence is defined for each effect pattern during the big hit. In addition, in the figure, in order to facilitate the understanding of the explanation, the opening mode of the large winning opening 54 is added. However, in the present embodiment, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. Only the set "long opening" is prepared, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is the specified count number (full count) of the game balls. A "short opening" set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter may be prepared.

First, during the execution of the jackpot start demo, a screen suggesting the type of jackpot production (super-jump jackpot production, longevity jackpot production, ki jackpot production) is displayed, and any jackpot production is started for the player. It is suggested that this is the case. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" for all jackpots.

During the execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit medium effect (super long hit big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect). That is, if the big hit medium production pattern is a super long hit big hit production, the super long hit round screen, if the big hit A production A or the long big hit B production, the long life big hit round screen, the good big hit A production or the good big hit B In the case of directing, a big hit round screen is displayed. However, if the round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of this big hit medium effect will be promoted, and the round effect screen of the lower rank type will be switched to the round effect screen of the higher rank type. It has become.

After the end of each round game, the interval is the pause time (the closing time of the big winning opening 54) from the end of each round game to the start of the setting of the next round game or the jackpot end demo. The period is set. Therefore, the special game is "Big hit start demo"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> ...-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Big hit end demo" It is developed in the flow such as. In the present embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" common to all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demo, the content of the effect mode (game state) to be shifted after the end of the currently executing jackpot game is suggested, and it is suggested to the player which effect mode to enter or continue. Will be done. In addition, during this jackpot end demonstration period, a probabilistic promotion effect or a hold consecutive suggestion effect, which will be described later, may be performed. In addition, the hold consecutive suggestion effect performed during this jackpot end demonstration period includes the hold consecutive suggestion effect (over prize effect or bonus prize effect effect) performed when an over prize or bonus prize occurs in the modified example described later. Combined production) is not included. That is, the pending continuous suggestion effect according to the modified example described later is not an effect performed during the jackpot end demo period, but an effect performed during the interval period. The details of the probabilistic promotion effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpots. As for the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, as mentioned above, it is either the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state) or the big hit game in the consecutive villa (that is, the high probability). Each demo time may be configured differently depending on whether it is a high base state or a big hit from a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of the big hit game in the consecutive villas, the processing of the game before and after the big hit proceeds more quickly than in the case of the big hit game at the time of the first hit (the game in the consecutive villas is performed more quickly). (To proceed), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the jackpot game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demo period set for a relatively long time. Yes, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the jackpot game during the consecutive villas, it is necessary to perform it during the round game execution period instead of the jackpot end demo period set in a relatively short time. Suitable. In addition, regarding the hold consecutive suggestion effect, in the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or lower the execution probability even if there is a big hit hold in the hold. Yes, in a jackpot game during a consecutive villa (that is, a jackpot from a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. .. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect is preferably performed during the execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and is executed when the jackpot hold in the hold is the jackpot hold corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot. (That is, the jackpot on which the hold consecutive suggestion effect is displayed and the jackpot hold in the hold that triggers the execution of the hold consecutive suggestion effect are targeted only for the 16R specific jackpot, and the target for the 4R specific / normal jackpot. It is preferable not to become).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (round effect screen) during the round game. Although not shown, various images (animation images, etc.) according to the type of the jackpot effect pattern are displayed in the central region of the screen in order to excite the jackpot game.

In the round display area 730 of the screen, the number of rounds (third round in the illustrated example) indicating the number of round games currently being executed is displayed. For example, if the currently executing round game is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the currently executing round game is the second round game (second round). In the case of (round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and even after that, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", ... Are displayed in the round display area every time a round game is played.

In the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, a right-handed image (also referred to as a firing instruction effect) that urges the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-handed area PA2 (right-handed) is displayed. In addition, despite the situation where the player should hit right (during a big hit), on the contrary, when the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start. When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is fired toward the left side region PA1, an effect (attention notification effect) that calls attention to the player so as not to hit the left side is executed. It may be. In the attention notification effect, a message instructing right-handedness is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP lights up in a special light emitting mode (for example, high brightness and high speed or instantaneous blinking) to make the game ball. The player is notified that he / she should fire toward the right area PA2 (right-handed). As a caution notification effect, for example, a voice "Please hit right" (right-handed instruction voice) may be output from the speaker 11. It is desirable that the attention notification effect is in a conspicuous position (for example, a central display area) and a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly see it. , Even in a situation where the right-handed image, the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display content in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the highlighting effect, and the display content in the round display area 730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information about the appropriate launch position), the right-handed image and the attention notification effect may be displayed in different display areas so as not to be superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, from the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 so as not to impair the visibility of the attention notification effect. It is desirable to configure the display so that the display priority is high (that is, while the display can be superimposed, in that case, the caution notification effect is displayed in the foreground). Regarding this launch instruction effect, the case where the ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 during the big hit or the case where the ball enters the first starting opening 51 is displayed as a display condition, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. Has been done. However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, 10 seconds is set as the display time again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and the attention notification effect not only during the big hit but also in a high-base state such as a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state. If it is continuously displayed over the high base state and the warning effect is displayed in less than 10 seconds until the end of the big hit (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the big hit end demo), it changes from medium to high base state. It is desirable to configure it so that it is continuously displayed over the entire period.

In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize described later) occurs, the number of prize balls given based on the prize in order to notify that the prize has occurred. (Number of unit prize balls) is displayed. In the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the number of prize balls to be acquired by the over-winning when an over-winning occurs (the number of unit prize-balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the large winning opening 54) is displayed. The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls to be acquired by the bonus prize when a bonus prize is generated (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the general prize opening 64) Includes the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B to be displayed. For example, when an over prize occurs, "+15 pt" corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15 pieces) of the large prize opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus prize occurs, the unit prize of the general prize opening 64 is displayed. "+3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (3) is displayed. Further, as a modification, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B may be separated from each other.

In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far based on the fact that the game ball has entered the big prize opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the big hit game in the consecutive villas ( "Cumulative number of prize balls") is displayed. "Renso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (at the time of the first hit). It is a state in which a big hit in a specific game state is continuously generated after the starting point). In addition, the "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol It is a state in which at least one of the shortening function and the electric chew support function is activated (at least one of a high-probability high-base state, a low-probability high-base state, and a high-probability low-base state). In the present embodiment, at least the gaming state (high base state) in which the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the "specific gaming state". The cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the over-winning described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the over-winning. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize. .. The over-winning effect, which will be described later, is executed only because it is a big hit (it is possible because the big winning opening 54 is open and the ball can be entered), but the general winning opening 64 is in the big hit. It is possible to enter the ball with or without it. However, the bonus prize-winning effect, which will be described later, is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. Regarding the bonus prize, if it is a big hit, the bonus prize production will be executed, but if it is in a low probability low base state, a special production different from the bonus prize (for example, "Don't enter here now!" A special effect that displays and sounds is executed, but it may be generated when three balls are inserted within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of one ball), and the probability is high. If it is in the base state or the low probability high base state, neither the bonus winning effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame around the frame of the effect display device 70 May be performed to the extent that is generated for a moment).

In addition to the cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far (referred to as "the number of big hit middle prize balls") may be displayed. Since the number of big hit middle prize balls is the number of prize balls actually acquired by the player during the execution of one big hit game, basically, the number of available prize balls set according to the big hit type ( It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls), but it will not exceed the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, when an over-prize, which will be described later, occurs, the number of big hit middle prize balls may exceed the number of winable prize balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the big hit type.

Further, although not shown, during the consecutive villas, the number of consecutive big hits in the specific game state, or the number of consecutive villas including the first hit (the number of times of adding one) is displayed. May be good. As an example, when a big hit is made three times in a specific game state after the first hit, a display such as "third consecutive villa" or "fourth consecutive villa" may be displayed during the big hit. Further, in each round of the special game, the pseudo decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo decorative symbol") may be displayed in a variable manner and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo-decorative symbol has a symbol mode (a symbol dedicated to the big hit) different from the normal decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of a pattern (character) and numbers, the decorative pattern is only numbers during the special game, and its size is also reduced. Or, if the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of only numbers, the decorative symbol with only the same numbers is reduced in size during the special game. Furthermore, when doublets such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned at the time of a big hit, "7, 7, 7" is displayed during the special game because it is only necessary to recognize which decorative pattern was used for the big hit. Not all of them need to be displayed, only "7" (not a combination of three decorative symbols, but only one decorative symbol). Further, during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), the "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Prize-related production]
Next, the winning-related production of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related production of the present embodiment. The winning-related effect is an effect executed based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific winning opening (large winning opening 54 or general winning opening 64) during the execution of the jackpot game. This winning-related production includes (A) a large winning opening winning production and (B) a general winning opening winning production.

<A. Grand prize opening prize production ＞
The large winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game. The large winning opening winning production includes a large winning opening normal winning production, a large winning opening over winning production, and a large winning opening count-up production. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, (b) the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, and (c) the game ball It is used synonymously with being detected by the grand prize opening switch 541 and (d) receiving a grand prize opening winning command from the main control board 100.

≪A-1. Large prize opening Normal prize production ≫
The large winning opening normal winning effect is an effect of notifying that the game ball has won the large winning opening 54 for the winning of the game ball within the specified count number to the large winning opening 54. That is, the large winning opening normal winning effect is performed every time the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 until the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 54 in one round game reaches the specified count number. It will be a production. In the present embodiment, a specific example of the large winning opening normal winning effect is not specified, but at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. The big winning opening that was there is usually a winning production. As an example, (1) an object corresponding to the specified count number in one unit game is displayed (for example, the treasure box display is displayed for the specified count number in one unit game), and the game is played to the large winning opening 54. Each time a ball enters, the object is deleted by the effect display device 70. (2) A speaker that outputs a "charine" sound each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening 54. Examples include the production at 11 and (3) the production with the production lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice each time the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. As a modification of this embodiment, the large winning opening normal winning effect is not provided, and only the large winning opening count-up effect, which will be described later, is applied to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 54 up to the specified count number. It may be configured to be done.

≪A-2. Grand prize opening over prize production ≫
The large winning opening over winning production (also called "over winning production") targets the winning of a game ball (over winning) that exceeds the specified count number to the large winning opening 54, and the game ball becomes the large winning opening 54. It is a production that suggests or notifies that a prize has been won. "Over winning" means that a game ball exceeding the specified count number (in this embodiment, the eleventh and subsequent game balls) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. Say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the large winning opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round game is completed (in this embodiment, it is the same period as the interval period, but the interval period and detection period. The grace period may be different, and as an example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, and is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the interval period, which is the end demo waiting time, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the final round. It is a period set between the game and the jackpot end demo, and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls (such as the entry of game balls that exceed the specified count number) after the big winning opening 54 starts closing operation. The detection grace period, which is the period for which the game is to be performed, may be set to 1 second after the large winning opening 54 starts closing operation, or may be set to 3 seconds, while at least partially overlapping the interval period. It is set until the elapse of), and over-winning may occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over-winning, when the 10th count game ball enters the large winning opening 54 and is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the large winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) has entered the large winning opening 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (game after the 11th count) An over-winning occurs when the ball) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

Types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic view showing an example of the over-winning effect of the present embodiment. In addition, it is preferable that the production mode of the over-winning effect is different from the production mode of the above-mentioned large winning opening normal winning effect. Further, as a modification, as an effect related to the over-winning, only the over-winning image may be mounted (the over-winning sound is not mounted), or only the over-winning sound may be mounted (the over-winning image is not mounted).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as an "over-winning image") suggesting that an over-winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-prize image having the characters "+15 pt" is displayed as an over-prize image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "15" are displayed based on the occurrence of the over-prize. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“over-winning sound”) suggesting that an over-winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the sound effect (character voice) of "I did it" is output from the speaker 11, which suggests that the over-winning has occurred.

As a modification of this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for over-winning effects may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of over-winning images or a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are prepared and one of the over-winning images and the over-winning sounds is selected by the staging lottery when the over-winning occurs. good. In that case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, the pending consecutive suggestion, the probability change suggestion, the round number suggestion, and the like may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image, "+15pt", while there are other over-winning sounds such as "good", "its tone", and "congratulations" in addition to "done". Above all, when the over-winning sound of "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, and (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a probabilistic jackpot. , (3) It may also serve to suggest that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to the over-winning occurrence, the pending inner villa is generated according to the type of the over-winning sound. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the sound is being played (that is, the over-winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect are used together). Here, the "reserved inner villa" is related to the preceding operation-holding ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is permitted and the end of the special game executed with the big hit as a trigger. It means that the operation holding ball (also referred to as "big hit holding") is included. In this modification, as a plurality of types of over-winning sounds, an over-winning sound A (speech "Yatte") and an over-winning sound B (sound "Congratulations") are prepared. Then, when there is no jackpot hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is not established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a big hit hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the over-winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has been established. The selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. For example, when there is a big hit hold when the over winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the over winning sound A The selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "80%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "20%". Further, in the above modification, the case where the hold continuous suggestion effect is applied to the over winning sound output effect is illustrated and described, but the hold continuous suggestion effect may be applied to the over prize image display effect (for example, over prize). If "+15pt" is displayed in black as an image display effect, it is unlikely that the pending villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold, the pending camp has not been established. The specifications may be such that the villa has been established or is likely to be established). Further, in the above modified example, the over-winning sound B as a pending consecutive suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being hit is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is set, and in the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%". , The selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the over winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be“ 20% ”. Therefore, when the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%". In the case of, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "80%" and the selection of the over winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in the present embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over-winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when the specific hold that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over-winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (the earliest jackpot hold if there are multiple jackpot holds) is a low profit jackpot, hold. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if a hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold will be held with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modified example of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the over-winning effect may have resulted in the over-winning and the possibility of winning the probabilistic jackpot. That is, the over-winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probability change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the transition to the probability change game state is made after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of over winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "70%", and the over winning sound is over. The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A" <"over winning sound B" <"over winning sound C", the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to the probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. As a further modification, the over-winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

≪A-3. Grand prize opening count-up production ≫
The large prize opening count-up effect is the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. , This is an effect of adding and displaying the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 54 to pay out "15" prize balls (the number of unit winning balls of the large winning opening 54 is 15), the game is played. When a ball enters the large winning opening 54, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "15". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (from the main control board 100). (Every time a winning command is received), "15", which is the unit winning number of the winning opening 54, is added to the count value of the cumulative winning number counter, and the cumulative winning number display area 733 is set accordingly. A large winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the displayed cumulative number of winning balls. This large winning opening count-up effect is an effect that is executed regardless of whether the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. Is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a large winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 20, the large winning opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning opening number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the large winning opening 54. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls given based on the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up one by one, such as "7000"-> "7001"-> ...-> "7014"-> "7015". Note that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the large winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the figure, (B) to (B) in the figure ( At E), a big prize opening count-up production is being performed. FIG. 20 shows the large winning opening count-up effect when the over-winning effect is performed, but the large winning opening count-up effect is similarly performed not only at the time of over-winning but also for the winning of game balls within the specified count number. Is done. In addition, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within the specified count number (particularly, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed. If an over-winning occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the large winning opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed is completed. After that (after the count for 15 balls is performed), it is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over winning is started. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning opening count-up production itself corresponding to the over-winning starts in the next round (after the interval period elapses). Although it will overlap with the execution period of the next round), the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning performed during the execution of the next round (the next round starting after the interval period has elapsed) Even if there is a ball in the big prize opening 54 during execution, the ball entry timing is in the middle of performing the big winning opening count-up production corresponding to the over winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet. After all the count-ups for the winning opening count-up effect have been completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed), the next round will be large. It is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

As a modification of this embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect is executed, and the number of prize balls given based on the over-winning is converted into the cumulative number of winning balls. It may be configured not to add and display. That is, for the cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls given based on the number of game balls entered within the specified count number to the large prize opening 54 is added and displayed, and the specified count number to the large winning opening 54 is added. The number of prize balls given based on the excess number of game balls may be configured so as not to be subject to the addition display.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the specified count number is exceeded during the execution of the special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). Even if an over-winning effect occurs, the over-winning effect may not be executed. In addition, as the types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games), and the specified number of counts is exceeded during the execution of high-profit special games. The over-winning effect may be executed when a winning is generated, and the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs during the execution of the low-profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. Even if an over-winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the open round game, an over-winning effect is executed, and an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured so that the over-winning effect is not executed. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect is executed when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs, and a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) During the execution of the special game performed when the player is elected, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if the over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs.

<B. General prize opening prize production ＞
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening 64. The general winning opening winning production includes a general winning opening normal winning production and a general winning opening count-up production.

≪B-1. General winning opening Normal winning production ≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as “bonus winning effect”) is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has won the general winning opening 64. In the following, the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game is also referred to as "bonus prize", but the game ball wins the general prize except during the execution of the special game (non-special game state). You may win a prize in the mouth 64 or you may call it a "bonus prize".

The types of bonus prize-winning effects include a bonus prize-winning image display production and a bonus prize-winning sound output production. FIG. 21 is a schematic view showing an example of the bonus winning effect of the present embodiment. Further, as a modification, as an effect related to the bonus winning prize, only the bonus winning image may be installed (the bonus winning sound is not installed), or only the bonus winning sound may be installed (the bonus winning image is not installed). It should be noted that this bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during the execution of the round game or during the closing of the big winning opening 54 during the big hit (during the interval period), and during the big hit. If the large winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured so that it can be executed at the same time as the over winning effect.

The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as a "bonus winning image") suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus winning image having the characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "3" are displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the bonus prize has been generated.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“bonus winning sound”) suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, it is suggested that the bonus prize has been generated by outputting the sound effect "picon" from the speaker 11.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for the bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of bonus winning images or a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are prepared and one of the bonus winning images and the bonus winning sound is selected by a staging lottery when the bonus winning occurs. good. In that case, depending on the type of bonus winning image or bonus winning sound, hold consecutive suggestion, probability change suggestion, round number suggestion, etc. may be performed. As an example, while there is only one type of bonus winning image of "+3pt", there are other bonus winning sounds such as "Gachan", "Chine", and "Dokhan" in addition to "Picon". When the bonus winning sound is generated, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a probabilistic jackpot, (3). ) It may also serve to suggest that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of this embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the bonus winning sound being generated, a pending villa is generated according to the type of the bonus winning sound. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the sound is present (that is, the bonus winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect are used together). In this modification, as a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds, a bonus winning sound A (sound effect "picon") and a bonus winning sound B (sound effect "Dokhan") are prepared. Then, if there is no jackpot hold at the time of the bonus winning (when the holding villa is not established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a jackpot hold when the bonus winning is generated (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the bonus winning sound A is a normal mode sound suggesting that the bonus winning has occurred and that the pending villa has not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that the pending villa has been established. In addition, if there is a jackpot hold at the time of the bonus winning (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "20%". May be. In the modified example, the case where the hold consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect is illustrated and described, but the hold consecutive suggestion effect may be applied to the bonus winning image display effect (for example, the bonus winning image). If "+3pt" is displayed in black as a display effect, it is unlikely that the pending villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold, the pending villa has not been established. It may be a specification that holds or is likely to hold). Further, in the above modification, the bonus winning sound B as a pending ream suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification having a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being hit is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is set, and in the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%". The selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B may be“ 20% ”. Therefore, when the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". In the case of, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in the present embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when the specific hold that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold (the first big hit hold if there are multiple big hit holds) is a low profit big hit, it is held. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if a hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold will be held with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the bonus winning effect may have been won in addition to the bonus winning effect. That is, the bonus winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probability change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the transition to the probability change game state is made after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "70%", and the bonus winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to the probability variation gaming state) increases by one step in the order of "bonus prize sound A" <"bonus prize sound B" <"bonus prize sound C". As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

≪General winning opening count-up production≫
The general winning opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the general prize opening 64 to pay out "three" prize balls (the number of unit prize balls of the general winning opening 64 is three), the game is played. When a ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "3". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball count counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls described above, and is provided every time a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (mainly). (Every time a general winning opening winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning ball number of the general winning opening 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball count counter, and the cumulative winning ball is correspondingly added. A general winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added and displayed to the value of the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the number display area 733.

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a general winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning opening count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative winning ball number displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the general winning opening 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize opening 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in the count-up format. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up and displayed one by one, such as "8000"-> "8001"-> "8002"-> "8003".

The general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is the general winning opening 64 provided in the right area PA2 of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game. It is performed for the entry of a game ball into. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, the general winning opening winning effect is performed. I can't. However, if the game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning opening winning effect is executed). The prize balls (3 pieces) based on the prizes of the game balls to the general prize openings 61 to 64 will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by the bonus prize is added to the cumulative number of prize balls each time one bonus prize is generated. The number of prize balls based on all bonus prizes generated during the execution of one round game (number of unit prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) is not limited to that of the round game. It may be configured to be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end, or the number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes generated during the execution of one special game (number of unit prize balls x 1 time). The number of bonus prizes during the special game) may be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a board surface configuration is adopted in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting opening 51, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the general winning opening 64 is the second. A board surface configuration may be adopted that is arranged on the downstream side of the starting port 51. In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening 54, or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 54.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as the operating opening (operating gate 53) that triggers the execution of the ordinary symbol lottery. That is, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is performed. The prize ball may be configured to be paid out.

In addition, as described above, in the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning opening count-up effect), a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a special game state. Since the production is performed with this as an opportunity, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a non-special gaming state, the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general) Winning opening count-up production) will not be performed. That is, even if the currently executing game state is a game state (non-electric support state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game, the currently executing game state displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Even in the game state (electric support state), which is the main game, the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general winning opening count-up production) is performed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. I can't. If the currently executing game state is a game state (electric support state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, the screen is assumed to be in the continuous villa state even now. In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the above, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game in the consecutive villa (cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game in the consecutive villas is displayed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the number of prize balls is the cumulative prize. It is not added to the number of balls (general winning opening count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

Further, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game performed by the first hit (the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). , The bonus winning effect may not be executed. In addition, the types of special games include a high-profit special game (for example, 16R special game) and a low-profit special game (for example, 4R special game), and a game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 64 during execution of the high-profit special game. The bonus winning effect may be executed by entering the ball, and the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the low-profit special game. Further, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. Even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the open round game, a bonus winning effect is executed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the short open round game. It may be configured so that the bonus prize-winning effect is not executed. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, a bonus prize-winning effect is executed by the game ball entering the general winning opening 64, and the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) During the execution of the special game performed when the player wins the prize, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning effect may not be executed.

<Other features of prize-related production>
Next, other features of the large winning opening winning effect and the general winning opening winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. Since the large prize opening count-up effect and the general prize opening count-up effect are effects for the same display object (cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733), the large prize opening count-up effect is described below. The up production and the general winning opening count-up production may be collectively referred to as "count-up production".

≪Count-up production time≫
In the present embodiment, the time for counting up for one prize ball (the time required for counting up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds". That is, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit) given by one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 in the time value required for counting up one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the value of (number of prize balls), the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". It becomes. Similarly, in the general winning opening count-up effect, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) given by entering one game ball into the general winning opening 64 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the value of (number), the execution time of the general winning opening count-up effect is "3 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". .. In the following, for convenience, the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning opening count-up effect) is set to "count-up production time A", and the general winning opening count-up is performed. The execution time of the effect (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning opening count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the big prize opening normal prize production, the over prize production, and the bonus prize production are configured not to be executed during the execution of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo even during the execution of the special game. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are not executed even during the execution of the special game, during the execution of the big hit start demo and the execution of the big hit end demo. ing.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 1)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as “interval period”) set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, and is the period during which the closing operation of the winning opening 54 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. The game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demo waiting time. In the present embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds", which is common to all round games. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is set to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball is placed in the large winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even if the large winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the ball, the large winning opening count-up effect will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big prize opening count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo (if the over prize is won, the interval period may be exceeded). (There is a possibility), the division between each round game or the division between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be clarified.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 2)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (the jackpot medium effect). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the last round game in the special game elapses to the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as the target of the winning ball payout, and it is determined that the ball is illegally entered. It is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game that may be detected), but the execution time of the jackpot end demo is such that the game ball enters the jackpot 54 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (effect mode) after the end of a special game separated from the round game, which is unlikely to be effectively detected. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the game ball is just before the end of the final round game. Even if the big winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the big winning opening 54, and further, even if an over-winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the jackpot 54 is closed after the game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the specifications are such that the jackpot count-up effect is performed, the jackpot count will be counted within the jackpot end demo period. The up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified. As a modification, for at least a part of the execution time of the jackpot end demo, the entry of the game ball into the jackpot 54 may be effectively detected within that time.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 3)
In the present embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game (1). The large winning opening count-up production for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (directing during jackpot). In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the final round Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of game balls entering the large winning opening 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, the final round Even after the jackpot 54 is closed after the round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the specifications are such that the jackpot count-up effect is performed, the jackpot ends within the jackpot end demo period. The count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified.

In addition, even when the game ball exceeds the specified count number and enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when an over-winning occurs), the cumulative number of counts in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up production time A (the specified count number + the number of over prizes) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. That is, the time obtained by adding the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over-winnings is after the end of the round game. By setting it shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even after the jackpot end 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot end count-up effect is produced. Even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect is ended within the execution time of the big hit end demo, and the special game ends and the variable display starts. It is preferable to clarify. The number of over prizes is uncertain because it depends on the progress of the game (the launch status of the game balls and the flow status of the game balls), but even if it is assumed that the number is 10 balls, which is the same as the specified count number. It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over prizes are added together. The time is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, which is 20 seconds).

(Relationship of count-up production time A 4)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total count-up production time A for the specified count number in this one round game is totaled. The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above-described embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the big prize 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, even if a plurality of big prize opening count-up effects are continuously performed, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The big prize opening count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big prize opening count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo, and the break between each round game or the final round game and the big hit end demo. The delimiter between can be clarified.

In addition, even when the number of game balls exceeds the specified count number and only one ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when only one over-winning occurs), this one round game is also performed. It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the cumulative number of counts (specified count number + 1 over-winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the count-up production time A for one over prize (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4). By setting .95 seconds) shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect is ended within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 5)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number (full count) enters the large winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the number of full counts generated during the execution of this special game. The total time of the count-up production time A of minutes (specified number of rounds × specified number of counts) may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this modification, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls enter the large winning opening by the specified count number (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 large winning opening count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up effect time A for all the counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". be. On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "120 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (staging during jackpot). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up production time A for all the counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. , Even after the big winning opening 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the big hit end demonstration period), if the specification is to perform the big winning opening count-up effect, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if the execution of the big prize opening count-up effect is congested during the round game or during the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big prize opening count-up effects must be completed at least by the end of the big hit end demo. Is guaranteed, so it is possible to smoothly proceed with the production during the big hit.

≪Priority of the big winning opening count-up production after the end≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart used to explain the priority of the grand prize opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) continuously enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of a certain round game, 2 based on the continuous winning. The big prize opening count-up production of the times will be executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the first game ball entering the large winning opening 54, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the second game ball winning the large winning opening 54, the later large winning opening count-up effect is executed. The execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect, and the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game (large winning opening). It is established when the entry of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 541). At this time, if the execution condition of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect is in progress. After the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started without stopping at. That is, in the present embodiment, the priority of the first large winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the later large winning opening count-up effect among the two previous large winning opening count-up effects. Before the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is not started, and the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed. After that, the execution of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is started. If the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the earlier large winning opening count-up effect and the later large winning opening count-up effect are started. It is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the production and continuously count up the large winning openings for two times. However, as a modification, after a predetermined time (minute time) has elapsed after the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is started, and the previous grand prize opening count-up effect is started. A clear delimiter may be provided between the large winning opening count-up effect and the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect. Here, the large winning opening count-up effect has been explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up effect during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect. When is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is not interrupted in the middle, and after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed, the later general winning opening count-up is performed. It is preferable to configure it to start the execution of the effect. In addition, if the execution condition of the later general winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed without interruption. In addition, if the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed without interruption.

As a modification of this embodiment, if the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect is performed. It may be interrupted and configured to start the execution of the next grand prize opening count-up effect. In other words, the priority of the later grand prize opening count-up production is higher than the priority of the earlier grand prize opening count-up production. In that case, when the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forcibly forced to the final value of the previous large winning opening count-up effect or the initial value of the later large winning opening count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to and start the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect from that point. In this variant, the large winning opening count-up effect was explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the later general winning opening count-up effect When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution conditions of the later general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next general winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect. In addition, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next large winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic view for explaining the emphasis staging of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villa is set to a predetermined specific value when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. When it reaches, the emphasis effect is configured to notify that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, every time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10,000, 20,000, 30,000, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In the present embodiment, the emphasis effect is executed even when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value triggered by the over prize or the bonus prize. In that case, the emphasis effect and the over prize are executed. The production or the bonus prize-winning production is executed in duplicate.

As shown in FIG. 24, the highlighting effect includes a highlighting effect that enlarges and displays a specific value (“20,000 pt” in the illustrated example) that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached in the highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen, and a speaker. There is an emphasized sound output effect that outputs a special sound (sound of "excellent condition" in the illustrated example) from No. 11.

The highlighting of the specific value is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), during which the cumulative prize ball number display is updated (addition display) by the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. ), The highlighting is not updated (additional display). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "cumulative prize ball number display" <"highlight display" <"round display". The “layer” means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the entire image. The higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front side when viewed from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower layer (rear side when viewed from the player). Will be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the cumulative prize ball number display are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed in order to further emphasize the highlighting. In that case, the above priority is given. Therefore, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number display (the highlighting may be displayed so as to cover a part or all of the cumulative prize ball number display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over prize or a bonus prize occurs during execution of the highlight display, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas. , The emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed in parallel at the same time. When displaying the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image at the same time, even if the display priority of the emphasized image is higher than that of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is higher than the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the over-winning image / bonus winning image are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed in order to further emphasize the highlighting. Depending on the priority, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the over winning image / bonus winning image (the highlighting may be displayed covering a part or all of the over winning image / bonus winning image).

Further, when an over-winning occurs during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is output in duplicate during the output of the special sound. When the special sound and the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the special sound having a high priority, and vice versa. Therefore, the sound of the special sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound having a high priority. In that case, the volume with the lower priority (the volume with the lower priority) may be substantially set to "0".

≪Over-winning production when an error occurs / Bonus winning production≫
In the present embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining the error types of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the error types that occur in the game machine are "door / frame opening error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio sensor error", "disconnection short-circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", and "payout error". ] Etc. are set. The above error types are examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.

The door / frame opening error is a door opening switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2 when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1. This is an error that occurs when the frame opening switch or the back set opening switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 is disconnected or malfunctions. This door / frame opening error is cleared when the gaming machine is confirmed to have no abnormality and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves, and when the magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or malfunctions. The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are cleared when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, a short circuit, or a failure occurs in the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is cleared when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The excess winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball is excessively entered into various winning openings. The over-winning error is canceled when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again. Here, the over-winning error includes an over-winning error of the large winning opening 54 (also referred to as a "large winning opening over-winning error") and an over-winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 64 ("general winning opening over-winning error"). ”) Etc. are included. For example, the large winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of one round game. The general winning opening excess winning error occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning opening 61 to 63 per unit time (for example, 30 seconds), or per unit time (for example, 30 seconds). This is an error that occurs when a specific number (for example, 60 balls) of a game ball enters the general winning opening 64. Since the general winning openings 64 are arranged so that the game balls can easily enter the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning openings 64 have an error judgment value (error and error) based on the number of balls entered per unit time. The value of the number of game balls to be determined) is a value with a margin. In the present embodiment, when an over-winning error occurs in the large winning opening, or when a ball enters the large winning opening 54 when the large winning opening 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When an abnormal winning of the large winning opening 54 is detected (when it is determined that the winning is abnormal), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when an excessive winning error occurs in the general winning opening, that is, when an abnormal winning in the general winning openings 61 to 64 is detected (when it is determined to be an abnormal winning), an error occurs from the external information terminal board 600. Does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

The payout error is an error that occurs when the payout of the prize ball is hindered. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball plate 9 is full with a game ball (the full tank switch is on), a ball biting / jam jam error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball is replenished from the game island. Includes ballless errors that cannot be completed and are insufficient. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. The notification level 1 is a level in which the on state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned on. At the notification level 1, only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if there is a ball entering the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout is not stopped). When the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the notification level shifts to 2, and not only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" but also the "image prompting the ball removal of the lower ball plate" is displayed on the effect display device 70. Furthermore, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only image notification is performed at notification level 1 and both image notification and voice notification are performed at notification level 2. Regarding the ball biting / jamming error of the prize ball payout unit 34 and the ballless error in which the game ball cannot be replenished from the game island, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, Prize ball payout is restricted (prize ball payout is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a medium level. The first error includes a "door / frame opening error". The second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excessive winning error". The third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, when the above error occurs in the game machine, image effect, sound effect, etc. are performed as various error notifications, and specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at an error volume. As a modification of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to blink at the brightness for the error.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine becomes the first error (door / frame opening error), even if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, a part of the over prize effect or a part of the bonus prize effect is performed. It is configured so that it will not be damaged. That is, when the first error occurs in the game machine, the over-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning image display effect are allowed to be executed among the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect, but the over-winning sound output effect and the bonus-winning sound output effect and Execution of bonus winning sound output production is restricted. Even if an over-winning or extra winning is generated during the first error, do not overlook that the gaming machine is in the first error state because part of the over-winning production and the bonus winning production is not performed. It has become. In this case, the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is allowed to be executed. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed in order to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the full screen. , Display using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over-winning image and the bonus winning image, but all of them can be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound for notifying that it is the first error is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). In addition, when the game machine is in the first error state and an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, the prize ball is paid out based on the over prize or the bonus prize.

In addition, when the game machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if an over winning or bonus winning occurs, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect It is configured so that not all of the above is done. That is, when a second error occurs in the game machine, the execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect is restricted as the over-winning effect, and the bonus-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning sound output effect are restricted. Both executions of the bonus sound output production are restricted. Even if an over-winning or the like occurs during the second error, the over-winning effect or the like is not performed at all, so that the gaming machine is in the second error state. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when a second error occurs, an error image indicating that the second error has occurred is displayed on the full screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred, so that an over-winning image or a bonus is displayed. The winning image and the count-up effect are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for notifying that the second error is being output is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output. If an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is in the second error state, the prize balls are paid out based on the over-winning or the bonus winning.

In addition, even if the gaming machine becomes a third error (payout error) and it becomes impossible to pay out the prize balls, if an over-prize or bonus prize occurs, an over-prize effect or bonus It is configured so that the winning effect is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular trouble even if the game is continued, and there is no risk of the player suffering any disadvantage. This is because limiting the production may rather reduce the interest of the game. In this case, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also executed. However, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is in the third error state, the prize balls based on the over-winning or bonus winning will not be paid out.

In the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the gaming machine is "specific error" in this way, a part or all of the over-winning production is performed according to the error type in which the over-winning or bonus winning is generated. In addition to being restricted, it is configured so that part or all of the bonus prize-winning production is restricted. That is, when the above-mentioned first error occurs among the specific errors, the execution of one or a part of the over-winning effects (over-winning sound output effects) is restricted, and the above-mentioned second error occurs. When it occurs, the execution of a plurality or all element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. A specific error may be used as an error type in which the progress of the game is prohibited. In addition, a specific error may be used as an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of being fraudulent (goto) is detected. Further, a specific error may be set as an error type that can be resolved by shutting down / turning on the power again.

As a modification of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over-winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is preferentially output over the over-winning sound (for example, the over-winning sound). The sound level of the error notification sound may be set higher than that of the over-winning image), and the error notification image may be displayed with priority over the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image has priority over the over-winning image). The degree may be set high).

≪Over prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. For each round game, a detection valid period (large winning opening valid period) in which the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 541 is valid is set. This detection valid period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered immediately before the large winning opening 54 is closed to reach the large winning opening switch 541. In the present embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening of the large winning opening 54 to the closing) and the end of the round game (the large winning opening 54 is closed). The detection valid period of the grand prize opening switch 541 is set over the entire period including the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection valid period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the round period ends, the large winning opening 54 Winning of the game ball to is treated as valid (subject to payout of the prize ball). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening opening period)" and the above-mentioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as continuous detection valid periods. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In the present embodiment, the period of the interval period is set as an over-winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives. On the other hand, outside the interval period, even if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives, the over-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the number of game balls exceeding the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 (11 in the illustrated example). When the game ball of the eye) is detected and the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within this interval period, the execution of the over-winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the over-winning effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if an over-winning image and an over-winning sound are provided as an over-winning effect, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, as with the over-winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the over-winning within the interval period as an opportunity. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big prize opening count-up effect by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the final round game (the eleventh game in the illustrated example). Even if a ball) is detected, if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of this interval period, the over-winning effect is executed within this jackpot end demo period. Is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the over-winning effect is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this over-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as well as the over-winning effect.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the over-winning effect permissible period during which the over-winning effect is allowed to be executed, and the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the over-winning effect permissible period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the over-winning effect permissible period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, the over-winning effect permissible period and the over-winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds. Seconds may be set as the over-winning effect permissible period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as the over-winning effect prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 and the execution timing of the over winning effect are synchronized, the final round. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, the over winning effect is always executed (at the end timing of the interval period). (Excluding the entry of the ball), as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the effect time of the over-winning effect, the interval period Based on the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period. (Hide or erase from the middle), the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and when the game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demonstration period ( When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541), the over winning effect may not be executed. In that case, the large winning opening count-up effect is also the final round. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is always executed (excluding the ball entered at the end timing of the interval period). In execution, as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the grand prize opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the grand prize opening count-up effect, the interval period ends. Based on this, the big winning opening count-up production is configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and when a game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demonstration period (big winning opening). When the switch 541 detects a game ball that exceeds the specified count number), it may be configured not to be executed.

≪Bonus winning production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as the permissible period of the bonus prize-winning effect in which the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives. On the other hand, during the jackpot end demo period, even if the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the bonus prize-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, within this interval period. When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this interval period is allowed. However, if the production time of the bonus prize-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the bonus prize-winning effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning image and the bonus winning sound are provided as the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, as with the bonus winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the bonus winning within the interval period as an opportunity. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big prize opening count-up effect by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the interval period When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of time, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this jackpot end demo period is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this bonus prize-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as well as the bonus winning effect.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the bonus prize-winning effect permissible period during which the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed, and the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the bonus winning production allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the bonus winning production allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the bonus winning production prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, the bonus prize-winning effect allowable period and the bonus prize-winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning production permissible period, and 0.5 seconds after that may be set as the bonus winning production prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning production prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the final round game is completed. If a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period of, the bonus winning effect is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period). Is longer than the production time of the bonus prize-winning effect from the execution start timing of the bonus prize-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, as described above. While it is configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of (However, if the bonus winning image and the bonus winning sound are provided as the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus is added. The winning sound may be output without interruption), and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (game with the right general winning opening switch 641) If a ball is detected), the bonus winning effect may not be executed. In that case, the general winning opening count-up effect is also the right general winning within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the mouth switch 641, it is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period), and when executing it, as described above, from the production time of the general winning opening count-up effect. However, if it is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the general winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, the general winning opening count-up effect is forced at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641), it is configured not to be executed. You may.

On the other hand, during the big hit start demo period, theoretically, the game ball does not enter the big prize opening 54 (because no over-winning occurs), so during the big hit start demo period, the big prize is won. No oral prize-winning effect (over-winning effect) is executed. It is possible to enter the general winning opening 64 even during the jackpot start demonstration period, but even if the ball enters the general winning opening 64, the general winning opening winning production during the jackpot start demonstration period ( No bonus winning production) will be performed, and if the ball is entered during the big hit start demo period, it will be entered at any time (especially even if it is entered at the end of the big hit start demo period). The general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production) corresponding to the ball is not performed in the first round game after the big hit start demonstration, and the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning ball is It is not a cumulative target in the cumulative prize ball number display.

(Launch handle detection)
The game by the game machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the firing handle 12 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA. The launch handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the launch handle 12. This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance when the player touches the firing handle 12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, it outputs a detection signal that permits the payout control board 300 to energize the firing solenoid. Further, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits the effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200. Thereby, the staging control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. In the staging control means 220, even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the game ball launched before that is a big prize. When a game ball exceeding the specified count number (the eleventh game ball in the illustrated example) is detected by entering the mouth 54 (when an over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect is executed. It has become like. Similarly, in the staging control means 220, even if it is not detected that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the game ball launched before that is a general prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the mouth 64 (when a bonus winning occurs), the bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over winning and the timing of the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the player stops firing the game ball due to the closing of the large winning opening 54 (the round game ends), over-winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period. In some cases, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect will occur, and there will be dissatisfaction that no winning effect will be performed even though the game ball actually entered the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the currently executing game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is triggered by the interruption state of the game continuing for a predetermined time or longer. Is executed. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that, for example, the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the period in which the variation display of the special symbol is not performed is a predetermined time. This means that the period during which the game ball does not enter or pass through the specific winning opening continues for a predetermined time or longer, the period during which the game ball is not launched continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the like. The end condition of this standby demo effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and for example, the player touches the launch handle 12 (the launch handle 12 is operated). That) is detected by the touch sensor, or when there is a ball entering the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, which is a specific winning opening, and the game ball passes through the operating gate 53. And general winning openings 61 to 64 are not applicable (even if the game ball passes through the operating gate 53 or the general winning openings 61 to 64 are entered, the standby demonstration effect does not end). Also, during the standby demo effect, the volume becomes zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than the state where the standby demo effect is not performed (during the game). The volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demo effect does not end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in the situation where the game is interrupted, it is not necessary to perform the production more than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in that state, the standby demo production is maintained (the game is interrupted). (While showing that), the volume related to the production after the standby demo production is completed (the game is in progress, that is, the design is changing) can be adjusted after visualizing it even during the standby demo production.

FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. The staging control means 220 takes the opportunity of detecting the player's contact by the touch sensor during the execution of the standby demo staging (triggered by receiving the handle state staging command from the main control board 100) to perform the standby demo. The execution of the effect is finished, and the execution of the game start preparation effect (launch detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, a production in which the characters "Welcome" are displayed on the screen or the voice "Welcome" is output from the speaker 11 to give the feeling that the game has started or resumed (a production that welcomes the game). ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demo effect is completed, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), as in the standby demo effect.

In the present embodiment, in the game state (non-special game state) in which the game start preparation effect can be performed, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed, and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not performed. That is, the game start preparation effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and of course, they are not executed in duplicate at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is turned off and back)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, when the power is restored from the power interruption, a power restoration notification effect for notifying that the power is restored from the power interruption is executed. This power supply cutoff / recovery notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) and outputting a sound indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker 11 (power restoration notification sound). Is. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the power return effect (output time of the power return notification sound) is longer than "29 seconds", which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game), "30". It is set to "seconds". For example, when the power is cut off in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is turned off and restored from the middle of the predetermined round game (when restarted from the middle of the predetermined round game), at least during the remaining time of the round game. Since the power off / returning sound is output, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the round game is restarted. Here, when the power off / return sound and the big hit medium effect sound compete with each other, the power off / return sound is prioritized over the big hit medium effect sound (for example, the power off / return sound is output at a louder sound level than the big hit medium effect sound). Or stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). Also, when the power off / return sound is output, even if an over-winning occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off / return sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off / return sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound). The return sound may be output at a high audio level, or the output of the over winning sound may be stopped). In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) so that it can be recognized that the jackpot is being hit. It is desirable to make the configuration short. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is 15 seconds, and the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) is 30. It is desirable to set it to seconds. In addition, in the situation where the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is displayed, the effect during the big hit is not displayed, so the cumulative number of prize balls display and highlight display, the over prize image and the bonus prize image are displayed. It will not be displayed. In addition, when the power is turned off and restored, the effect information regarding the cumulative prize ball value held before the power is turned off is deleted, so an image showing that the power is restored when the power is turned off and restored (power restoration). When the display of the notification image) is completed and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the cumulative prize ball number display will start again from zero (“0”), and the highlighting display condition (reaching a specific value) Since it will be reset (as well as the conditions until the power is turned off), the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is turned off reaches a specific value when the ball enters the next large winning opening 54 (for example, 10,000). Even if the number is 9999 in front of the above, the cumulative number of winning balls is zero during the big hit after the power is cut off and the power is turned off, so in this situation, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if there is one ball, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored when the power is turned off and on (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect of a big hit is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image). While the image is displayed, if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or a ball in the general winning opening 64, the winning ball corresponding to the entry is paid out, but the image showing that the power is restored ( While the power return notification image) is being displayed, the over-winning image is not displayed, the bonus winning image is displayed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed, and the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is not performed. At that time, even if (1) the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is finished and the effect is restored during the big hit, the cumulative prize ball number display may be started from zero. Then, (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect is restored during the big hit, the cumulative prize ball number display is an image indicating that the power has been restored (power supply). The cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the numerical values of the prize balls paid out corresponding to the entry into the large winning opening 54 and the entry into the general winning opening 64 while the return notification image) is being displayed. In addition, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not yet been completed, and the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect. If the power is cut off when the payout is being executed and has not been completed yet (for example, when the count-up effect for 300 prize balls and the payout are in progress), the power is turned on after the power is restored. The rest of the count-up effect that was executed before the interruption occurred will not be performed, but the prize balls that have not been paid out will be paid out.

(Right-handed notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 above, the right-handed display area 731 of the screen is used to urge the player to right-handed (launch a game ball aiming at the right side area PA2). The hit notification image is displayed. Further, in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen, an over-winning image is displayed when an over-winning occurs. The right-handed display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Further, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of the bonus winning. The right-handed display area 731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and one of the information does not hide the other information. There is.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic view showing a volume adjustment screen of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the left and right keys of the cross key are simultaneously operated by the player during the execution of the special game, the volume adjustment images indicating the volume levels of a plurality of stages are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. Will be done. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third stage volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of the sound such as the BGM and the sound effect output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, further, the over-winning effect is being executed (the situation where the over-winning sound is being output), or the bonus winning effect is being executed (bonus). Regardless of the situation in which the winning sound is output), the volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys. Therefore, the volume is adjusted by the player during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the bonus winning effect (the situation where the bonus winning sound is output). In that case, the adjusted volume level will change in real time as the volume level of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound currently being output. That is, if the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is changed in the middle by the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is different before and after the volume adjustment operation. It becomes possible to make it. The audio image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and the information of one does not hide the information of the other. .. The highlighting and volume adjustment screens are superimposed when they are executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighting. (Part or all of the highlighting is hidden in the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for excessive winning errors in general winning openings≫
The "error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and the effect is produced. An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200.

Hereinafter, as one of the plurality of types of error occurrence conditions, the excess winning error occurrence conditions of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the conditions for generating the excess winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 64 are set to be different conditions.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entered into the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). Is a condition that is satisfied when the number reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to, for example, "30". That is, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is satisfied.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error of the general winning opening 64 is that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. It is a condition that is satisfied when the value is reached. The second specified number is set to, for example, "60". That is, when 60 game balls enter the general winning opening 64 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is satisfied.

As a modification of the present embodiment, conditions for generating excessive winning errors in the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of gaming state currently being executed. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is the main game state (normal game state), the general winning openings 61 to 63 have a relative ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 64. Therefore, the threshold value for satisfying the condition is set to be higher in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 than in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under the predetermined conditions (predetermined winning frequency), the excessive winning error condition is not satisfied, but the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (a predetermined frequency of winning a ball), an excessive winning error will occur. On the other hand, in the game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main component, the general winning opening 64 has a higher ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 61 to 63. Is supposed to be relatively high, so it is set so that the threshold value for satisfying the condition is higher in the condition for generating the excess winning error in the general winning opening 64 than in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under specific conditions (specific winning frequency), the excessive winning error does not hold, but the game ball is specified as the general winning opening 61 to 64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

Even if the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the condition for canceling the excessive winning error of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error release conditions include, for example, the condition for ending the error notification effect (for example, 30 seconds have passed from the display of the error notification screen / the start of the error notification sound), and the on-output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error. The condition for stopping (the condition for turning off the output, for example, 300 seconds have passed from the start of the output), the power is turned off once, and then the power is restored.

≪Duplicate execution of over-winning production and bonus winning production≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart provided for explaining the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning are generated at substantially the same timing, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in duplicate. Overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect overlap, and the execution period of both effects. There are cases where all of the above overlap and cases where part of the execution period of both effects overlap. In the illustrated example, the case where the execution period of the over-winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap is shown. When the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the over-winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the bonus winning image is displayed are displayed. Is provided as a display area that is independent of each other, so that the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not superimposed and displayed before and after. On the other hand, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one is output, the first prize may be prioritized (that is, the first prize is the prize for the large prize opening 54, and the second prize is the prize for the general prize opening 64). In that case, priority is given to the over winning sound, and if the first winning is the winning of the general winning opening 64 and the later winning is the winning of the large winning opening 54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), later. If the winning is prioritized (that is, if the first winning is the winning of the large winning opening 54 and the later winning is the winning of the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is given priority and the first winning is given. Is a prize in the general prize opening 64, and if the later prize is a prize in the large prize opening 54, priority is given to the over prize sound). When giving priority to the first prize, for example, if there is a later prize during the output of the prize sound related to the first prize, the prize sound related to the later prize is output after the prize sound related to the first prize is completely output. The output may be started, or the winning sound related to the later winning may not be output at all. When giving priority to the later winning, for example, if there is a later winning while outputting the winning sound related to the earlier winning, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted with the later winning as an opportunity, and then later. The winning sound related to the winning of the above may be started to be output.

As a modification of this embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning are generated at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus winning image may not be displayed in duplicate. That is, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the display period (or display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus winning image do not overlap. good. In that case, a case where the entire display period of both images does not overlap and a case where a part of the display periods of both images do not overlap are included.

If the over-winning image and the bonus-winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize first in the bonus-winning image and the over-winning image (the one whose game ball was detected first). The winning image may be configured to be displayed preferentially. In addition, as the opposite configuration, when the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize later in time among the bonus winning image and the over-winning image (later the winning ball of the game ball is won). The winning image of the detected one) may be preferentially displayed.

(Multiple over prizes)
FIG. 32 is a time chart when over-winning and bonus winning occur a plurality of times within a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of over-winnings occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball). However, the over-winning effect is not performed for the second and subsequent over-winning (winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). That is, if multiple over-winning effects occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-winning effect is allowed, and the execution of the second and subsequent over-winning effects is restricted (regulated). ). However, the prize balls will be paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large winning opening count-up production due to the over-winning will also be performed twice (the first large winning opening count-up production will be performed twice without interruption). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus prize-winning effect is performed for each of the bonus prizes each time, and the prize is awarded by the bonus prize. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the general winning opening count-up effect by the bonus winning is also performed twice (the first general winning opening count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). That is, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, the execution of all the bonus prizes is allowed a plurality of times. As a modification, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent over-winnings are performed. It is configured so that the over-winning effect is also performed for the over-winning (the winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls), but if there is a second over-winning during the execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) After the first over-winning effect is completed (after it is completed), the execution of the second over-winning effect is started, or (2) even if the first over-winning effect is in the middle. It may be configured to be interrupted with the second over-winning as an opportunity, and then to start the execution of the second over-winning effect. In that case, in either case (1) or (2), the prize ball is paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large winning opening count-up effect due to the over winning is also performed twice (the first large winning opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption). Furthermore, if multiple bonus prizes occur within a predetermined period, the bonus prize-winning effect will be performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize-winning effect will be performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or subsequent bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize production, (3) after the first bonus prize production is completed (after it is completed), the second time Start the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect, or (4) interrupt the first bonus prize-winning effect even if it is in the middle, and then start the execution of the second bonus-winning effect. It may be configured as follows. In that case, in either case (3) or (4), the prize ball is paid out twice by the bonus prize, and the general prize opening count-up effect by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption).

≪External information signal≫
In the present embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal plate 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a continuous villa signal, and a symbol confirmation signal. , Door frame opening signal, security signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

Here, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and each game It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. This hall computer may be electrically connected to the game machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the game machine PM without going through a data display.

(Prize ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number (“10” in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, every time 10 prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In the present embodiment, the prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and one game ball is provided by the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Each time it is detected, "1" is added to the prize ball number counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal board 600. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, the count value is counted from the initial value "0").

FIG. 33 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the general winning opening 64 is "3". Therefore, when the right general winning opening switch 641 detects the entry of a game ball, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. To. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition does not reach a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal is not output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined number once, the prize ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize ball signal is output even once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (the trigger is that the general winning opening normal winning effect is executed once). There are cases where the prize ball signal is not output and cases where the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the general winning opening 64 has been described as an example, but the same can be said for the general winning openings 61 to 63.

FIG. 34 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 is "15". Therefore, when the entry of the game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. .. At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is predetermined. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is a predetermined number. Is reached twice, the prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize is given when one game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (when the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). The ball signal may be output once, or the prize ball signal may be output twice.

<Relationship with other big hit productions>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related production (large winning opening winning production, general winning opening winning production) and other big hit medium production will be described. In the following, as other jackpot productions, (C) pending ream suggestion production, (D) promotion production, and (E) special production will be illustrated.

≪C. Hold ream suggestion production ≫
The hold consecutive suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the hold inner consecutive villa is established (there is a big hit hold) during the execution of the special game. As described above, the "holding inner villa" is a special case related to the holding ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding holding ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit / fail judgment of the symbol is permitted and the end of the special game executed with the big hit as a trigger. It means that the operation hold ball (also called "big hit hold") is included. In the present embodiment, the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game. In the case of a state (high base state), that is, when the consecutive villa is continuing, if there is a big hit hold in the hold, the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. To put it the other way around, if the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if the big hit hold exists in the hold, it is currently The pending consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the special game being executed. Further, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, and it is also preferable that the jackpot hold in the hold is also the hold related to the second special symbol. ..

In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demo period as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14. Whether or not the hold continuous suggestion effect can be executed is performed at the start of the special game execution, and is determined by lottery when the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modification, even if the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed when the player wins the execution lottery that is triggered by the fact that the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demo. good.

The execution condition of the hold-ream suggestion effect is based on the assumption that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and within the operation-holding ball of one or more special symbols. Is a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot hold that is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is included in. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold is not a high profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot), it is held. The continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple jackpot holds in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, the jackpot type related to the first jackpot hold is a low profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the later jackpot hold is a high profit jackpot. Does not execute the hold ream suggestion effect in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is generated by the variable display within a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it definite that it will occur, but it is also definite that the next special game after the special game in which the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed is not a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In this embodiment, the "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. The target operation holding ball is limited to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol.

The hold-ream suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot end demo period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of this special image include a staging image composed of still images, a staging image composed of moving images, and a staging image composed of both still images and moving images.

In the present embodiment, the pending continuous suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the hold-ream suggestion effect can be executed only in the super-juvenile jackpot effect as the effect pattern during the jackpot. On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over-winning production and the bonus winning production can be executed in any of the super-jumping jackpot production, the longevity jackpot A-directing, the longevity jackpot B-directing, the ki-big-hit A-directing, and the ki-big-hit B-directing as the jackpot-medium-directing production patterns.

In the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the pending continuous suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the hold continuous suggestion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. That is, the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Because. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in duplicate. The production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production are executed independently. As a modification, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed during the round game, and in that case, the hold continuous suggestion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in duplicate, or the hold continuous suggestion effect and the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed. The bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the hold consecutive suggestion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over winning image or the bonus winning image is displayed on the back, or is not. (Display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the hold continuous suggestion production, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over prize sound or bonus prize sound is reduced, or It may be configured so that it does not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect. Since the reserved inner consecutive villa is a reward with a higher degree of profit for the player than the over prize and the bonus prize, the execution time of the reserved inner consecutive villa production is set to be relatively long, and the player may miss it. I try not to.

In the present embodiment, the hold inner villa production is executed only as a "truth production" that deterministically notifies the establishment of the hold inner villa, but as a modification thereof, the hold inner villa is actually used. You may include the "Gase production" that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions for the production of the consecutive villas in the hold, it is a condition that the preceding operation hold ball is a big hit hold of a high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this. Instead, the preceding operation hold ball may be a big hit hold other than a high profit big hit (16R big hit), that is, a big hit hold corresponding to a low profit big hit (4R big hit).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative prize ball number display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that the pending villa is established. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the highlighting effect (highlighting) performed when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reserved inner villa is established by the display mode of the emphasis staging.

<< D. Promotion production ≫
The promotion effect suggests or notifies the profit mode (referred to as "provisional profit mode" for convenience) related to the jackpot before or at the start of the special game when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the special symbol. After that, it is an effect suggesting whether or not the actual profit mode related to the jackpot has a higher profit degree than the provisional profit mode during the execution of the special game. In other words, it suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and through the series of processes, the jackpot It is a production that shows whether or not the profit mode of is promoted (changed).

The types of promotion effects are roughly divided into round promotion effects and probabilistic promotion effects. In the round promotion effect, when the specified number of special games (provisional specified number of rounds) suggested or notified when a big hit occurs is uncertain whether it is the true number of rounds or the false number of rounds, after the provisional number of rounds Is also a production that suggests the possibility that the round game will continue. Some of the round promotion effects simply suggest that the round has been promoted, and some suggest that the round is promoted as well as the true specified number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. The probabilistic promotion effect is a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type (provisional jackpot type) suggested or notified when a jackpot occurs is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (whether or not it is a specific jackpot). ), It is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is definite that the promotion is successful when the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect) occurs during the execution of the special game.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 16, the probabilistic promotion effect is performed when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal game state, or in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the second special symbol ". This is executed when "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the effect pattern during the jackpot when "4R specific jackpot" is won. The execution timing of this probabilistic promotion effect is set during the jackpot end demo period. In this probabilistic promotion effect, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved so as to overlap the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Shoudai Hit" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is a production content that makes it appear as if it has been promoted from "Ki jackpot production" to "Shou jackpot production" (the jackpot type has been promoted from 4R normal jackpot to 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 14, when the second special symbol "16 specific jackpot" is won in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the round promotion effect is the "jutsu jackpot B effect" as the effect pattern during the jackpot. Is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion effect is performed after displaying the characters "final round" (fake display) on the screen to make it appear as if the currently running round game is the final round game. By displaying the cut-in image of the message "That's not the case!" Issued by the main characters of (The jackpot type is promoted from 4R specific jackpot to 16R specific jackpot).

In the present embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is "16R special game (high profit special game)", but the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. The special game is configured to be either "16R special game (high profit special game)" or "4R special game (low profit special game)" and can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the probabilistic promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate. The prize-winning effect or the bonus prize-winning effect is executed independently. As a modification, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed during the round game, in which case the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed. And may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the probabilistic promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image is displayed or hidden on the back). Also, if a special sound effect is generated during the probabilistic promotion production, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound is reduced or not output). It's okay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be duplicated during the execution of the round promotion effect. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round, if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs within the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( The execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image and the bonus winning image is displayed or hidden on the back), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to the start of the jackpot end demo. It is set to "20 seconds" from the time to the end. On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In addition, the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

≪E. Special production ≫
The special effect is a highly rare effect that is executed when a predetermined consecutive villa condition is satisfied. The "predetermined consecutive villa condition" means that the number of consecutive villas for big hits reaches the specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (20th in this embodiment) is the highest type of big hit. It is a condition that is satisfied when it becomes a profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). This special effect appears during the execution of the special game (16R special game) that is performed when the specified number of big hits (20th) occurs. However, this special production ends in the final round game (16th round) and does not include the end demo period after that (however, even if the final interval period is included, the final interval period is included. It may not be included). In addition, this special effect is composed of an effect content (special movie) in which the highly rare premier characters of this model are displayed one by one in order.

In addition to the specified number of consecutive villas, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive villa state reaches the predetermined number of times (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is the specified number of times). It may be added as a condition that the total number of rounds won in the consecutive villa state and the cumulative number of prize balls reach a predetermined number. Here, as described above, the "renso (renso state)" is a gaming state during the non-special gaming state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. It refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state (a state in which the first hit is the starting point and then the big hits in the specific game state are continuously generated). The "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than that of a normal game state. It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific game state means at least a game state in which the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game.

In the present embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game).

In the present embodiment, even if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. The reason is that when the special production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production compete with each other, it is better to give priority to the execution of the highly rare special production (display of the premier character that can be seen only in the special production). This is because the result is satisfactory for the player.

As a modification of the present embodiment, if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be duplicated. When the special effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the display priority of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the display priority of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect (layer priority). It is preferable that the priority) is set higher. However, while the special effect is an effect that is displayed large on the entire screen, the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are effects that are displayed smaller toward the edge of the screen. The display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be set higher than the (layer priority).

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the final round game (16th round). On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

If the power is cut off during the execution of the special game (for example, when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure or the like), if an over prize or a bonus prize is generated after the power is cut off. After the power is turned off, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed. This can be executed because the execution decision of the over-winning effect and the execution decision of the bonus-winning effect are triggered by the over-winning or the bonus-winning, that is, the event after the power is turned off and restored. On the other hand, the staging control command for power-off / recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after the power-off is restored does not include data for restoration of the hold continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect, and also. Since the power supply of the RAM 203 of the staging control board 200 is not backed up, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution trigger comes at the time of the power failure, the special game is special. With regard to the hold continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not the game can be executed at the start of the game, there will be no data regarding whether or not the effect can be executed after the power is turned off. Is not executed in.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 48. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
35 to 36 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is granted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero-cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is stored (S6: YES), the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the staging display device 70, initialize the staging lamp LP, and the like, a staging control command (“staging initial command”) to the staging control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication with the payout control board 400 is initially set in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power-off / recovery command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 54 is opened) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power interruption has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but S21 to S25 utilize the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). When it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not obtained (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset timeout time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out occurs. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, and the magnetic sensor. , Radio sensor, etc. are read, their status is judged, and these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". When the value of the counter goes around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the fluctuation display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. A predetermined fluctuation time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. If a small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the small hit games is being executed. The timekeeping of the variable display of the special symbol of is interrupted.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switch 611, 641 in the input process (S53) is used. Based on this, when the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed and it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch as a result, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing the game ball, a request for transmission of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is performed. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type, and the payout control board 400 is used, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize ball monitoring process. The data received from is monitored and the communication inspection with the payout control board 400 is performed.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of pending balls is updated up to a maximum of 4, and the random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration of termination of operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the processing during the change of the normal symbol, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable display or a definite display.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are processed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 542 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 542, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a judgment as to whether the special symbol is correct or not. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the game machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command (“error”) including the error information is set. In addition to requesting the effect designation command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65), in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, display an error, and the like. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game status display process (S71), etc. is displayed on each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the launch control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the game ball to be launched. do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) were acquired in order to operate each electric accessory 542. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the staging control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. Examples of the external information signal include a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, a jackpot signal, and a continuous villa signal. There is a symbol confirmation signal and so on.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the power-off processing (S26 to S32) described above is executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, the first start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a second start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate is won. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the large winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the large winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input, the large winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , A large winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input, the left general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is used as the winning data of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

Subsequently, the right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Is applicable.

(Starting port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random number values related to the first special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, and a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). Then, as an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the lottery random number values related to the second special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, and a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-holding balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). In the case of the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start opening, a special symbol hit disorder is generated from the hit random number buffer (hold n storage area or register, etc.). A numerical value is read out and a pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a fluctuation pattern pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol variation start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the variation start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for fluctuation)". It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special It is considered that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and addresses of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , The process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol has priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, when the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter). After setting (addresses of various tables used in the process and addresses of the RAM storage area) (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

If the fluctuation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the change start of this time is started by referring to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the processing method on the first special symbol side It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing or the processing on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of operation-holding balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, access the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation start, and the random value per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area), per special symbol. The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423), which will be described later. The information is transferred to the special symbol hit / fail determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, the special symbol hit / miss determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the game state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", loss data "00H") are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) of the special symbol are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) and the character effect number of the special symbol determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol / probability change on of the normal symbol). / Determined based on the combination with (4 patterns of probabilistic change off of ordinary symbols). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the character effect number “0” is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is incorrect (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game is completed, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game is the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed ( S347). The determination result (number of probability fluctuations, number of times of shortening of fluctuation time, number of times of electric support) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the electric support number storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state (S349). Subsequently, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of the various tables used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used, and the special that is the target of the current fluctuation is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, the special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H") is executed. do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). The details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect on the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in order, and these are used as the main information storage means. Stored in 180 command storage areas.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to perform variable display of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated at each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a definite display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for definitively stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail judgment data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set in the probability change flag, and "00H" is set in the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time shortening count counter, and the ball entry easy state count counter to clear zero.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the fluctuation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the pass / fail determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction count counter is zero (step S457). When the variation time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is considered that the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the fluctuation time reduction count counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of times the end of the ball entry easy state has been reached. If the number of times of electric support after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the fluctuation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current fluctuation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is set to the number of ends. If it has reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control process)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored as a command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 side executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processes S506 to S510 are executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is also determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511 and the end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction count information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction counter (S512). Further, the electric support count information set in S347 is stored in the electric support counter (S513).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability fluctuation number counter (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability fluctuation function of (S515) is started. On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S519), the start of the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S520), and the start of the operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for hit)" (S524).

<Processing on the staging control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the staging control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 to 55. The processing on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. The lamp is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variation effect pattern are reached. It is configured to include the effect interrupt process and the transmission interrupt process of the image control command that is activated at regular intervals.

For each interrupt processing (exception processing), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processing occurs is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception interrupt processing of production control command: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are ranked in the order of "reset start processing: level 3" → "image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2" → "effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1". The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, or when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the main process on the staging control side, basically, the process proceeds after being set to either all interrupts disabled or interrupts disabled other than the staging control command reception interrupt. Then, when the main process on the staging control side is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the main process on the staging control side with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the staging control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the staging control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the staging control board 200. In this reset start process, the reset is started by any of reset when the power is turned on, reset due to various abnormalities, and reset due to WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting related to hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the staging control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a request to turn off the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made to turn off all the lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). Details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When shifting to the main processing on the staging control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing, but in the unlikely event that the processing returns to this processing due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like. Transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the main process (S609) on the staging control side.

First, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is accurately expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired in the main process on the staging control side (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and the operation of the movable accessory 24 is controlled by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information required for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset timeout time. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal).

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within the predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. To hold.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern is generated according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the advance notice effect pattern number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the character advance notice effect pattern is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, a character request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable character 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery within one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make the notice effect occur, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, regarding the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative symbol, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the change of the decorative symbol (the image control command is transmitted immediately), so the lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 are stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, character advance notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the staging lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the staging display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. Executes the effect control process corresponding to the type of. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the staging control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S621). Immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the staging lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the time of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the advance determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, the look-ahead determination is executed based on the information of the advance determination result, and the hold image of the effect display device 70 is displayed. A process for updating the number of reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 and the display mode (display color, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command stops variation. If it is a command, the process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. When the jackpot effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), processing for executing the start demo effect, the round effect, and the end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related command includes a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In this small hit effect content determination process (S640), processing for executing the small hit start demo effect and the small hit end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning opening winning-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the commands related to the winning opening are the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning opening winning command, the left general winning opening winning command, and the right general winning opening winning command. Etc. are included. When this winning opening winning-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). The details of the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). When this error effect designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S644). In this error effect content determination process (S644), the error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by the image display of the liquid crystal display device 70, the lighting of the effect lamp LP, the sound of the speaker 11, and the like. Determine the error effect pattern for.

When the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO). Ends the command analysis process without doing anything.

(Prize-winning production content determination process)
Next, the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning effect content determination process (S642).

First, the first start opening winning effect control process is executed (S701). In this first start opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the first start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 51 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the second start opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second start opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the second start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 52 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this operation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not the operation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the operation gate winning command is stored, it is determined. On condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the operation gate winning effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is executed.

Subsequently, the large winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In this large winning opening winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the large winning opening winning command is stored. Then, on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the large prize opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is executed.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S705). In this left general winning opening winning effect control process (S705), it is determined whether or not the left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning opening winning command is executed. If it is stored, the left general winning opening winning effect is executed to notify that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63, provided that the predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied. ..

Subsequently, the right general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not the right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is executed. If it is stored, the right general winning opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

<< Reception interrupt processing of staging control command >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command. As described above, the reception interrupt process of this effect control command is started by generating an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It has become like. The staging control command has a configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the staging control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will be referred to as a “first command” and the EVENT data will be referred to as a “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the staging control command is fixed (S901). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in a row. This is because the reading of the staging control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the staging lottery random number is acquired from the staging lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the staging lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). It should be noted that the time when the effect lottery random number is acquired is the time when the effect control command is received, because the effect control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent the periodicity from appearing at the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the staging lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same staging being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various staging lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Timer interrupt processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the staging control side will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. Within this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter values (“0” to “15”) are updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values ("0" to "15") is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after enabling all interrupts and restoring the saved register contents, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control command >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command occurs at preset fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the present embodiment, the over-winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in excess of the specified count number during the execution of the special game, so that the over-winning is achieved. By clearly notifying the player of what has occurred, it is possible to increase the satisfaction and excitement of the player for being able to enjoy special benefits that would not otherwise be possible, and as a result, the interest of the game. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) is performed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game, and the game ball is the general winning opening 64. By performing a general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production) with the opportunity to enter the ball, a reduction is added between the large winning opening winning production and the general winning opening winning production performed during the execution of the special game. As a result, the monotonousness of the big hit production can be eliminated, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening 54 is formed by performing the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect) when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. It is possible to prevent the player from being the only concern of the player by aiming and advancing the game, and to allow the player to enjoy the fun of aiming at the general winning opening 64, and the player actively plays the game. It can be expected to increase the chances of the ball entering the general winning opening 64, which will enhance the gambling spirit of the player and make the game even more entertaining, and as a result, the interest of the game. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning opening count-up effect in relation to the big hit end demo period and the interval period, the timing at which the big winning opening count-up effect is performed and the large winning opening count-up effect can be obtained. Regardless of the number of consecutive winning opening count-up effects, this large winning opening count-up effect can be completed appropriately without delaying it more than necessary. By clearly separating the display from the variable display after the end of the special game, it becomes possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes. In particular, by configuring the total time of the execution time of the big prize opening count-up production for the specified number of counts to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo, a plurality of games are set just before the end of the final round game. Even if multiple large winning opening count-up effects are performed continuously based on the game balls entering the large winning openings in succession, the large winning opening count-up effect will be performed within the big hit end demo period. It will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. It is possible to clarify the delimiter.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect is performed. By starting the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the counting effect from becoming complicated, and the two large winning opening count-up effects will be separated from each other. By clarifying, the count-up display of the cumulative number of prize balls will not be unsightly for the player, and the player will be satisfied with how the cumulative number of prize balls increases one after another at a good tempo on the screen. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value and the emphasis effect is performed due to the occurrence of the over prize, or when the over prize occurs in the situation where the emphasis effect is performed. By executing this emphasis effect and the over-winning effect in duplicate, there are irregular timings when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific number, and irregular timings when over-winning occurs. By the appearance of both effects, it is possible to clearly notify the player that it is a special situation that is rarely matched with each other, so that the player's sense of exhilaration and achievement can be further enhanced, and as a result, the game It is possible to improve the interest of the.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus winning-winning occurs in a situation where a specific error having a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs. By restricting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus-winning effect, it is possible not to overlook that a serious error has occurred in the gaming machine. On the other hand, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, an over-winning effect And even if the bonus winning effect is allowed to be executed, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the over-winning effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be diminished. I'm going to do. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error that has occurred in the gaming machine, the player's willingness to play the game without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over-winning effect. It is possible to improve the fun of the game because it is possible to sustain the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the consecutive villas are continued, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the electric support state after the end of the special game. It is expected that the players will proceed with the game while expecting to further increase the cumulative number of prize balls in the villa, which will further increase the motivation of the players for the occurrence of big hits and improve the operating rate of the gaming machines. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 arranged in the right side area PA2, while the left side area PA1 By configuring so that the bonus winning effect is not executed even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged in, the bonus winning effect occurs in the dark, and the bonus winning effect is rather monotonous. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming a rut (become a rut), and as a result of launching a game ball aiming at winning the grand prize opening 54, the joy of winning the general winning opening 64 that occurs incidentally is further enhanced. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus-winning occur at substantially the same time during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect are duplicated to enter the large winning opening 54. As a result of playing the game aiming at the entry of the game ball, both the over-winning and the bonus winning that occur incidentally can be clearly notified to the player, so that the fun of the special game can be further enhanced. It becomes possible to prevent the production during the big hit from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while restricting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round game is executed. By allowing, one of the winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) occurs intermittently even though it is notified that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot end demo. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being produced without a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus winnings occur within a predetermined period during the special game, the execution of the multiple bonus winning effects is permitted, while the predetermined during the special game. If multiple over-winnings occur within the period, only the over-winning effect corresponding to the first over-winning of the multiple over-winnings is executed.
It is possible to prevent the over-winning effect from becoming monotonous (becoming a rut) due to the over-winning effect occurring in the dark, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the prize ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64, but one game ball enters the large winning opening 54. By configuring the prize ball signal to be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. It is possible to notify the player and use it as a judgment material for selecting a gaming machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000 pt"), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the cumulative number of prize balls is used as image information such as an icon or a meter. It may be configured to notify by.

Further, in the above embodiment, the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villas has been illustrated and described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even if the above feature configuration is applied to the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (the number of big hit middle prize balls) during the execution of one big hit game. Similar effects can be achieved.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which "small hits" frequently occur as a result of a hit / fail determination of a special symbol when the gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

The validity determination of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. ). In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and if it is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, it is a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 818". It becomes. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of the big hit is designed to be equal between the winning / failing judgment of the first special symbol and the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / failing determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.1". The winning probability of a small hit is designed to have the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. For example, a small hit is also set for the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is performed. Also, the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol may be configured to win a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable display of the jackpot), the other is being displayed. When the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol of is executed, it is prohibited to derive the big hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, and only the small hit or the miss is derived. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit / miss judgment is forcibly replaced with the hit. That is, in the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated (low probability state), the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In this case, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order) and the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value corresponds to the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicability determination is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order). As a modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a table for jackpot non-lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the variable display of the big hit of the special symbol, the small hit lottery is performed in which the result of the winning / failing judgment is only a small hit or a miss by referring to the table dedicated to the big hit no lottery process instead of the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table. The method may be adopted. In this modified example, if the specifications are such that a small hit is not set as a result of the hit / fail judgment, a method of immediately determining the loss may be adopted without performing the hit / fail judgment.

Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) of the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the jackpot type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are displayed. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (design group A), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have 4 rounds specified for the jackpot game, and a big prize in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 57B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 of each round are displayed for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot. It is sorted into (symbol group I). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific jackpot (design group F), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game of 4, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game. ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various jackpot types, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot triggers a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot refers to a jackpot that triggers a short-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the long-opening round game is a round in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered in the large winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a game. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54.

Although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the first small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected. 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. The opening / closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol.

Subsequently, the gaming state of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, "normal game state", "time saving game state", "latent probability game state", and "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability variation state" or a "probability variation game state", and ( 2) The game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "incubation probability game state (incubation probability change game state)" or "incubation probability change state". Then, (3) the gaming state in which the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability variation function being activated is called the "time saving state" or the "time saving gaming state", and (4) ) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game. , In the game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic view showing a game state setting table according to the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) game at the time of big hit winning. It is set according to the state. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability variation operations) and the number of fluctuation times during which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operates. It is set based on the number of shortening times (number of times of shortened operation time) and the number of times of electric support (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated. In addition, "ST" is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the jackpot probability is set to a high probability up to the specified fluctuation display number. In other words, the probability variation state (probability variation game state) is maintained up to the specified variation display number, but if a big hit does not occur within the specified variation display number, the number-separated probability variation machine shifts to the normal state (normal game state). It is called "ST machine". In that sense, the specified fluctuation display number of times is also referred to as "specified ST number of times" or "ST number of times" below.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" and "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" are won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game The latent game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. This latent game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "70 times", and the number of electric support times "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

If "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" is won in the second special symbol, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot The game state set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a state or a latent game state, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set, and the latent probabilistic game is played after the jackpot game ends. When shifting to the state, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the normal game state is entered from the next variation display of the special symbol. Similarly, the latent game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "70 times", and the number of electric support times "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can trigger the transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit does not trigger the transition of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round, which is the end condition of the game state (for example, the variation display of the 100th rotation of the probability variation game state and the latent probability game state, the time saving game). Except for the change display of the 70th rotation of the state), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed with the winning of the small hit as an opportunity. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. The game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the time-saving game state, and if the game state before the small hit occurs is the probability change game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the probability change game state. If the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the latent gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the latent gaming state.

Subsequently, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, depending on the game state (or variable pattern selection state) and the like. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent gaming state. When, the "latent mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the "probability mode" is set. However, when the game state shifts to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state), the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the game state shifts to the normal game state. In, a special effect mode is set, and a normal effect mode is set when the predetermined number of variable displays is completed. The predetermined number of times is "4 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the cumulative number of fluctuations displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, it means that the total number of times of the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol have reached "4 times". As a modification of the modification, only the variation display number of the first special symbol reaches the predetermined number (4 times), or only the variation display number of the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number (4 times). As an opportunity, the special mode may be terminated (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when any of the effect modes is set, the background image (decorative pattern is displayed on the back side) dedicated to the effect mode on the screen as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode. The background image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the second embodiment. In this second embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

In (A) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is indicated. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (1000 seconds) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, and the latent probabilistic gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and is set to "0.5 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support When the function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is set. When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time of the normal symbol (fixed display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "opening for 1 second → closing for 2 seconds → closing for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open → close for 2 seconds → open for 1 second", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated. That is, as an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 is executed. The specification (a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long period of time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit fluctuation display". The fluctuation display of is called "off-the-fly fluctuation display".

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of one special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display, the small hit fluctuation display, or the missed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variation display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of the above reaches a preset predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuating forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Previously, when the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol was completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol was set in advance, and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). At the end of the jackpot variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated even before reaching. When the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced with a symbol that is out of the small hit symbol. .. That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol compete with each other. When the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as the jackpot variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the jackpot variation display. Change display (that is, loss change display or small hit variation display, and if the hit / fail random number corresponds to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with a miss and the hit / miss variation display is used). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is out of order fluctuation display (whether or not it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit in the hit / fail judgment process). If it is a random number, the hit / fail judgment result may be forcibly replaced with a wrong number, and the wrong result may be displayed.

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of the small hit RUSH (latent mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the small hit is frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball being inserted into the second starting port 52, and the small hit is made until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate hit games continuously and intensively.

When the gaming state is the latent gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent game state (low base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. Further, in this latent game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the first when the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol is used. The fluctuation display of is finished in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 has the ordinary electric accessory 522 (movable) during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the large winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol, and until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player can play. Can advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small hit RUSH to only the latent game state and suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game for the game states other than the latent game state, the following measures are taken. Has been done.

Specifically, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. To. In this gaming state (high base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. high.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from that time to the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 located downstream of the object 522. Therefore, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by small hit games.

Further, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, but the second special symbol Since the fluctuation time of is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digesting the symbols is very low, and small hit games cannot be played frequently. In the variation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be relatively high (second special). The fluctuation time of the symbol does not become extremely long). That is, in the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state (variation display within 4 rotations), the fluctuation display after the completion of the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of rotations (variation display after the fifth rotation) is more than. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average value of the fluctuation time) is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, and the player can be notified of the cumulative number of prize balls. It is configured in. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is configured to be performed. In addition, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game performed by the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol being a small hit during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode). It is preferable that the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed (a large winning opening count-up effect). As a modification, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed (general winning opening). It may be configured so that the count-up effect) is not performed.

In addition, also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned first embodiment can be obtained, and as a result, the interest of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

As a modification of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a winning opening that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (starting ports that are always open), and are not normally equipped with electric accessories. FIG. 63 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the large winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally downward to the left. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 52 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) that mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter the ball. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general winning opening 64 in which the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 can always enter, regardless of whether it is in the special gaming state or the non-special gaming state. It is configured so that you can always enter the ball. In this modified example, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect and the cumulative number of winning balls are added and displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is performed. When a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, only the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning opening count-up effect), which is a bonus. The prize-winning effect may be configured so as not to be performed. In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed. (General winning opening count-up effect) may be configured so as not to be performed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described in order. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the game ball is arranged in the big winning opening during the execution of the special game (big hit game). It is configured as a V-probability gaming machine (ball-probability gaming machine) that determines the presence or absence of a probabilistic transition depending on whether or not it passes through (details will be described later).

<Board composition>
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment described above), the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 is mainly a first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21. , It is possible to enter any of the general winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. The large winning opening 54 of the third embodiment is configured as a so-called V attacker (details will be described later) provided with a specific region (probability variation operating region) in which the entry of the game ball triggers the activation of the probability variation function of the special symbol. Has been done. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has flowed down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Of the game area PAs provided with various winning openings, a method of launching a game ball so as to cause the game ball to flow down to the left side area PA1 is called "left-handed", and the game ball flows down to the right side area PA2. The method of firing a game ball so as to cause it is called "right-handed".

<Number of prize balls>
In the third embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening is "4" for the first starting port 51 and "4" for the second starting port 52. "1", general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and large winning openings 54 are set to "15". The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the third embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied.

<Great prize opening>
FIG. 64 is a schematic view showing the configuration of the large winning opening 54 of the third embodiment. Inside the big winning opening 54, a distribution device 544 is provided located on the downstream side of the above-mentioned big winning opening switch 541 to determine the game state after the end of the special game (big hit game). .. The distribution device 544 is formed with a specific area 548 and a non-specific area 549 into which the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 54 are distributed. Further, the sorting device 544 is provided with a movable member 545 that selectively distributes the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 54 to the specific area 548 or the non-specific area 549, and also for opening and closing the movable member 545. A specific region solenoid 546 is provided. When the movable member 545 is in the closed position, the specific area 548 is closed by the movable member 545, and the game ball is distributed to the non-specific area 549. On the other hand, when the movable member 545 is in the open position, the specific area 548 is opened and the game ball is distributed to the specific area 548. Within the specific area 548, a specific area switch 547 for detecting the passage of the game ball to the specific area 548 is provided. The specific area switch 547 functions as a probability variation function operation switch for setting the game state after the end of the special game to a high probability state (a state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated).

<Big hit lottery>
Next, the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. FIG. 65 (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 65 (B) is a gaming state (high probability) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. State). In the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 65, in the winning / failing determination of the special symbol, in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 297". In the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 698". That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 219.92" to the high probability "1 / 93.76". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set equally between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

<Big hit type>
Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the third embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the jackpot type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to this special symbol jackpot symbol table. As described above, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" is special after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the symbol.

The jackpot types of the third embodiment are roughly classified into "conditional specific jackpot" and "conditional normal jackpot". The "conditional specific jackpot" is a jackpot set so that the game ball can easily or easily enter (pass) into the specific area 548. Basically, the game ball enters the specific area 548. It is confirmed that the condition shifts to a high probability state. The reason for making it "conditional" is that even if the jackpot is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, when the game ball does not actually enter the specific area 548, the result is a normal jackpot. This is because it becomes a (non-probability change jackpot). The "conditional normal jackpot" is a jackpot set to make it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter (pass) the specific area 548, and basically the game ball does not enter the specific area 548. On the condition that, it is confirmed that the state does not shift to the high probability state (shifts to the low probability state). The reason for making it "conditional" is that even if it is a big hit that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, when the game ball actually enters the specific area 548, the result is a specific big hit (probability change). This is because it becomes a big hit).

FIG. 66 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot symbol table, 4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group). Specifically, the 4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A) is distributed with a selection rate of 1%, and the 4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B) is distributed with a selection rate of 99%.

FIG. 66 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot symbol table, there are five types of jackpots (symbol group), 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D), and 10R conditional. A specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E), a 7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F), and a 3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G) are set. Specifically, 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C) has a selection rate of 32%, 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D) has a selection rate of 10%, and 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group). E) is distributed with a selection rate of 8%, 7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F) is distributed with a selection rate of 25%, and 3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G) is distributed with a selection rate of 25%.

Here, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "1%", and the selection rate of the conditional normal jackpot is set to "99%". It is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), in the lottery of the second special symbol, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "100%". That is, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, it is definite that the conditional specific big hit is always won as the big hit type. Therefore, there is a higher possibility of winning a conditional specific jackpot (equivalent to a probability variation jackpot) when a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs than when a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it is easy to shift to a gaming state (high probability state) that is advantageous for the player. In the following, the 4R conditional specific jackpot, which is the most profitable jackpot type among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, is also referred to as "special figure 1 maximum profit jackpot", and the jackpot type of the second special symbol. Among them, 10R conditional specific jackpots 1 to 3, which are the most profitable jackpot types, are also referred to as "special figure 2 highest profit jackpot".

Subsequently, the large winning opening operation pattern of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing a large winning opening operation pattern table of the third embodiment. In the big winning opening operation pattern table, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round is defined for each big hit type. The opening modes of the large winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 are a long opening (long opening) in which the opening time is set to a relatively long time and a relatively long opening time according to the length of the opening time. It is distinguished from short opening (short opening) set in a short time. In the figure, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round, "L" means a long opening and "S" means a short opening. The long opening time of the large winning opening 54 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that a predetermined count number (full count) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. In the third embodiment, as the opening mode of the large winning opening 54, the short opening is not set in any round, and the long opening is set in all rounds. However, even if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same by providing a short opening that shortens the opening time of the jackpot 54 to, for example, 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same jackpot game. , A configuration having a jackpot with a substantially different number of rounds in which a ball can be obtained (a jackpot with a substantially different number of rounds) may be adopted. On the other hand, the long opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 54 can pass through or easily pass through the specific area 548. Further, the short opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 0.05 seconds) in which the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 54 is set to be unable or difficult to pass through the specific area 548. The opening of the specific area 548 is synchronized with the opening of the large winning opening 54 (start of the first round) in either the long opening or the short opening. That is, the specific area 548 is opened at the same timing as the opening start timing of the large winning opening 54 in the first round, or at a timing one second after the opening start timing of the large winning opening 54 in the first round. .. Further, not limited to this, the specific area 548 may be opened when the ball is detected in the large winning opening 54, and the count number (for example, the specified number) smaller than the specified count number (maximum winning number) in one round may be opened. If the number of counts is 10, the specific area 548 may be opened by detecting the first count). In this configuration, if it is a conditional specific jackpot, the specific area 548 is opened long by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, and if it is a conditional normal jackpot, it is in the first round. It is preferable to short-open the specific area 548 by detecting the first count of the large winning opening 54.

In the third embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is applicable, the game state after the end of the special game is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the specific round of the special game. Whether or not to shift to the high probability state (probability change game state) is sorted. In the specific round, the movable member 545 in the large winning opening 54 opens and closes, and the specific area switch 547 becomes effective (the ball entry detection of the game ball into the specific area 548 becomes effective, that is, the game ball. Refers to a round in which the probability variation transition is determined by entering the specific area 548. This specific round is set to the first round (first round), which is common to all jackpot types. Hereinafter, for convenience, the fact that the game ball enters the specific area 548 during the execution of the specific round is also referred to as "V winning". As a modified example, when a spec (so-called normal probability variation gaming machine) that does not have a specific area 548 is adopted in the large winning opening 54, "conditional specific big hit" is "specific big hit" as the big hit type of this embodiment. Alternatively, it corresponds to a "probability change jackpot", and a "conditional normal jackpot" corresponds to a "normal jackpot" or a "non-probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds. , The opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all rounds. In the case of "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", since the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. Is possible or easy. On the other hand, in the case of "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", since the specific area 548 is short-opened in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. Is virtually impossible or difficult.

When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)" The specified number of rounds of the big hit game is 10 rounds, and the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all rounds. In addition, any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", and "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)" can be used. Since the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific area (first round), it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

When the jackpot type is "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 rounds, and the opening mode of the jackpot 54 is long opening in all rounds. In the case of "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", since the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. Is possible or easy.

When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 3 rounds, and the opening mode of the jackpot 54 is long opening in all rounds. In the case of the "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific round (first round), so that the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. Is possible or easy.

<Game state>
Subsequently, the gaming state of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, "normal game state", "time saving game state", and "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability fluctuation function operating is called the "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (3) all The state in which the function is not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are both advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state can be expressed as "high probability high base state", (2) time saving game state can be expressed as "low probability high base state", and (3) normal game state can be expressed as "low probability low base state". Here, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol means a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main player of the game in the game state. .. In other words, it can be said that the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating in the gaming state in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game (in the third embodiment, the "low probability low base state"". In), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main game state (in the third embodiment, the "low probability high base state" and the "high probability high base". In the "state"), it suffices if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened.

FIG. 69 is a schematic view showing the game state setting table of the third embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the third embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) when the big hit is won. Is selectively set according to the game state of (C) whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 548 (whether or not the V prize has been won) during the execution of the jackpot game. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability variation operations) and the number of fluctuation times during which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operates. It is set based on the number of shortening times (number of times of shortened operation time) and the number of times of electric support (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated. In addition, "ST" means a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the jackpot probability is set to a high probability up to the specified fluctuation display number. In other words, while maintaining the probabilistic game state (high probability and high base state) until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified number of variable display times, if a big hit does not occur within the specified number of variable display times, it is normal. The number-separated probability change machine that shifts to the gaming state (low probability low base state) is called an "ST machine". In that sense, the specified fluctuation display number of times is also referred to as "specified ST number of times" or "ST number of times" below.

When the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific region 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. .. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "135 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "135 times", and the electric support number "135 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (135 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (135 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (135 times), the transition to the normal game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. If the game ball cannot actually be entered into the specific area 548 even though it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548, a big hit is won. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at that time. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the specified time-saving number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified time-saving number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times of time reduction (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the first special symbol "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, it is practically impossible or difficult to allow the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Since it is in a state, basically, the game after the end of the big hit game is performed on the condition that the game ball cannot be entered into the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The time saving game state is set as the state. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified time-saving number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified time-saving number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times of time reduction (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when it is practically impossible or difficult to put the game ball into the specific area 548, but the game ball can actually be put into the specific area 548. , The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "135 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "135 times", and the electric support number "135 times" are set. This probabilistic game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (135 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (135 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (135 times), the transition to the normal gaming state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol.

The second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)", "7R condition" If you win the "Specific jackpot with (symbol group F)" or "Specific jackpot with 3R conditions (symbol group G)", it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, it is a probabilistic game as a game state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The state is set. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "135 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "135 times", and the electric support number "135 times" are set. This probabilistic game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (135 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (135 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (135 times), the transition to the normal gaming state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. If the game ball cannot actually be entered into the specific area 548 even though it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548, a big hit is won. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at the time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified time-saving number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified time-saving number of times (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times of time reduction (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern selection state of the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, "selection state 1", "selection state 2", and "selection state 3" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a normal game state (low probability low base state). Further, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the "normal mode". The selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a time-saving game state (low probability high base state). Further, this selection state 2 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the “chance mode”. The selection state 3 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a probability change game state (high probability high base state). Further, this selection state 3 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the "rush mode". In this embodiment, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is selectively set according to the game state, the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed, and the like, and the set variation pattern selection states are set. The variation pattern table is selected.

<Direction mode>
Next, the effect mode of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, such as a gaming state (or a variable pattern selection state). One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "chance mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. Is set to "rush mode". When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) Is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, the "normal mode" is equipped with four stages, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", and the passage of 20 fluctuations or more or the SP reach is lost. In addition, the transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", the transition from "Stage B" to "Stage C", the transition from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and the pre-reading notice production judgment of the "pre-reading stage" If you win the execution (transition), you will move from the stage you are currently staying to the "look-ahead stage" (when you move to the "look-ahead stage", the execution of SP reach will be confirmed, and if you hit the jackpot, the "look-ahead stage" If the Zoro eyes are displayed, other than the Zoro eyes will be displayed in the "Look-ahead stage", and the next change will return to the stage before the transition to the "Look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (different from stage BGM in "chance mode" and stage BGM in "rush mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation stop (fixed stop), and the stage BGM is started from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts. In "Stage C" and "Look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is out of reach, and the stage BGM is output following the next fluctuation. (The "chance mode" and "rush mode" are also configured to continuously output). Here, the pseudo-continuous production can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", but in any stage, at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production. The stage BGM is not output at (when a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol having the character "NEXT") is displayed in a variable manner in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped. (Interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-variation display as a trigger, or the stage BGM is switched to a specific BGM different from that before the re-variation display. After that, when developing to SP reach in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage where you were staying) is changed to the background image of SP reach production. Switching (at the same time, switching to the BGM dedicated to SP reach), the stage BGM is not output during SP reach execution, and the effect indicating the loss is displayed in SP reach, so that the variation display in which SP reach is executed Switches to the background image of each stage again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of SP reach), but in that situation, the background image of the stage is displayed until the next variable display starts. However, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to SP reach is not output (there is no sound, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the SP reach dedicated BGM is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is out of reach, and the stage BGM is output continuously after the next fluctuation. "Stage B" and "Stage" Even if it is "C" or "look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "stage A"), if it is missed via SP reach, the stage BGM is prior to the fluctuation stop (fixed stop). Will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts. In the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (for example, "Continue!", Which is a continuation dialogue notice and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed, and the subsequent execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous production (re-variation display) will be performed after the unconfirmed production (such as "may continue?") Is executed, but this special production is "Stage A" and "Stage A". It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Look-ahead stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of pseudo-continuous production can be detected and a stage where it cannot be detected and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a production that does not make the player bored is realized. is doing. In "Stage A", a special effect with the character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage C", a special effect with the character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect is determined to be executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only when it occurs (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Is always displayed. A staging that is displayed) is also provided, and it is a staging that is different from the special staging and the pseudo-continuous staging. For example, when the character D appears, the line "development confirmed!" Is always displayed). The pseudo-continuous confirmation effect and the development confirmation effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect can be determined by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development confirmed effect. It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for SP reach. In addition, all of the special effect, the pseudo continuous confirmation effect, and the development confirmation effect may be executed during one variation display, and in that case, during a certain re-variation display (for example, pseudo 2 variation display or pseudo 3 described later). The variable display) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmed effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special effect is executed in the pseudo 2 variation display or the pseudo 3 variation display), the pseudo continuous confirmation effect is further executed during the certain revariation display after the special effect is executed during the certain revariation display. You may.

<Variation pattern>
Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. 70 to 72 are schematic views showing a variation pattern table of the special symbol of the third embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. The number of operation hold balls (“hold 0”, “hold 1-2”, “hold 3”) shown in each figure is the first special if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol. It means the number of operation-holding balls of the symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold-digestion). (Number of). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold-digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In addition, during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and in particular, a period in which a fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation display in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state is selected) A common variation pattern table may be used regardless of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in that case, in particular, the common variation pattern table may be used when selecting the outlier variation pattern. It is desirable, that is, when selecting the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern, the first Since the types of special games that can be executed may differ depending on the special symbol and the second special symbol, it is desirable not to use a common variation pattern table in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game. When selecting the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This configuration is performed during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and in particular, a period in which a fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation display in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state is selected). In the case of, regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold digestion) in the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, and in the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol. Regardless of the number of operation-holding balls (the number of operation-holding balls after hold digestion) of the second special symbol, it is desirable to use a common fluctuation pattern table, that is, when selecting an out-of-order fluctuation pattern. It is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the number of reservations, and when the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is selected, the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol. And the second special symbol do not use a common variation pattern table, but the selection tendency of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is common regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Further, "using a common variation pattern table" here may mean that one variation pattern table is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. Although the fluctuation pattern table is divided between the second special symbol and the second special symbol, it may mean that the contents of each fluctuation pattern table (selected fluctuation pattern candidates, their selection rate, etc.) are the same.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 70 to 72 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disparity without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach outliers". In this non-reach outlier, the variation modes are different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time for the shortened variation than the normal variation and the ultra-shortened variation than the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If different decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the remaining one row (generally the middle row), it will be "missing". It is a reach production that becomes a "big hit".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N Reach, and has evolved from N Reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action are displayed. It is a reach production. In this third embodiment, "SP reach A", "SP reach B", and "SP reach C" are prepared as a plurality of types of SP reach. The SP reach A is an SP reach that can be executed when the currently executing effect mode is the normal mode. On the other hand, SP reach B and SP reach C are SP reach that can be executed regardless of which effect mode is currently being executed. In this third embodiment, it is shown that the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "SP reach A" <"SP reach B" <"SP reach C". That is, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the development in the order of "SP reach A"-> "SP reach B"-> "SP reach C". Here, when the staging mode is the normal mode, the SP reach A is basically the first-stage SP reach that develops from the normal reach, and the SP reach B is the second-stage SP reach that develops from the SP reach A. Yes, SP reach C is the third stage of SP reach that develops from SP reach B. On the other hand, when the staging mode is the chance mode or the rush mode, the SP reach B is basically the SP reach that develops from the normal reach, and the SP reach C is the SP reach that develops from the N reach or develops from the SP reach B. .. In addition, SP reach C is a reach effect in which a specific character (specific element) called "END" appears, and in the following description, this SP reach C may be referred to as "END reach" after its name. be. This specific element (specific character) is a production element with a high expectation of a big hit that may appear in other productions such as a preview production and a look-ahead production performed by this gaming machine.

In the "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variated during the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. It is a staging that makes it look like (pseudo continuous staging, pseudo fluctuating staging, pseudo continuous fluctuating staging). The pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect) in which the pseudo-variation in which all three rows of decorative symbols start to change or re-change and then temporarily stop or definitely stop is executed a plurality of times. Hereinafter, the number of pseudo-variations is also referred to as "pseudo-continuous number". In the variation display in which the number of pseudo-reams is 2, the period from the start of the variation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation"), and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is The second pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-two variation") is from the start of the re-variation to the final stop. In the variation display in which the number of pseudo-reams is 3, the period from the start of the variation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation"), and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is The period from the start of the re-variation to the temporary stop is the second pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-two variation"), and the period from the start of the re-variation to the fixed stop of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol. This is the third pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-three variation"). Even in the variation display that does not develop into a pseudo-ream, for convenience of explanation, the period from the start of the variation to the final stop may be referred to as the "pseudo-1 variation" by fictitious as the first pseudo-variation. .. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits. Further, of the three columns of decorative symbols, when the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempai), the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. Expectations for big hits are higher than in the case. Further, when the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state or the reach state, the jackpot expectation is high depending on the type of the decorative symbols in the left column. As an example, the decorative symbols of "1" and "5" have higher expectation of big hits than the decorative symbols of "2", "4" and "6", and the decorative symbols of "1" and "5" are higher than the decorative symbols of "1" and "5". However, the decorative symbol of "3" has a higher expectation of a big hit, and the decorative symbol of "7" has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the decorative symbol of "3". It should be noted that increasing the number of pseudo-reams from the first to the second and from the second to the third is also referred to as "pseudo-ream continues".

"Pseudo 1 fanning" is an effect of fanning whether or not to progress to the next pseudo variation (second pseudo variation) during execution of the pseudo 1 variation (first pseudo variation). "Pseudo 2 fanning" is an effect of fanning whether or not to progress to the next pseudo variation (third pseudo variation) during execution of the pseudo 2 variation (second pseudo variation). In the following, "pseudo 1 fanning" and "pseudo 2 fanning" may be collectively referred to as "pseudo continuous fanning (pseudo continuous fanning effect)". The pseudo-continuous fanning effect is a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the character "NEXT") as a middle symbol (final symbol) in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed among the three rows of decorative symbols. Is an effect that encourages whether or not the temporary stop is displayed after the variable display is performed in the vicinity of the predetermined temporary stop position. It should be noted that this predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol is not displayed at the time of fixed stop, but is displayed only at the time of temporary stop. When the next pseudo-variation is performed (when the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is successful), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined temporary stop position, and when the next pseudo-variation is not performed (pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed). (If it fails), the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position, and other decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position. Only the symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner (for example, if it is in the tempai state, it develops into SP reach).

"Full rotation reach" is an effect in which all three rows of decorative symbols are aligned (decorative symbol combination mode for notifying a big hit) and displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, the three rows of decorative patterns are "1.1.1"-> "3.3.3"-> "7/7/7"-> "1.1.1"-> "3.3.3". → Change the display in the order of "7, 7, 7" → ..., and any of the decorative patterns of "1 ・ 1 ・ 1", "3 ・ 3 ・ 3", and "7, 7, 7" It is an effect that encourages whether the stop display (temporary stop or fixed stop) is displayed in combination. It should be noted that this full rotation reach is a jackpot effect that is executed only when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The variable display at full rotation is non-transparent when the decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed (temporary stop or fixed stop) when the decorative symbol is transparent and then changed and finally stopped (temporarily stopped or fixed stop). It is preferable to display in the state of. In addition, as a modification, the three rows of decorative patterns are "1.1.1"-> "2.2.2"-> "3.3.3"-> "4.4"-> "5.5." Change the display in the order of "5" → "6 ・ 6 ・ 6" → "7 ・ 7 ・ 7" → "1 ・ 1 ・ 1" → ... It may be configured to display a stop (temporary stop or fixed stop).

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 1. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

In the deviation pattern table 1, 14 types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14 are set. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", one of 14 types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14 is selected according to the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different types of fluctuation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH1-1 (shortening variation) is selected. As a modification, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", it is shortened from the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14, regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. The variation pattern PH1-1 of the variation may be configured to be most easily selected (preferably, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol).

Ten types of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-10 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", if the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot", 10 kinds of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. If any of 1 to PA1-10 is selected and the jackpot type is "4R conditional normal jackpot", 9 types of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 are selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. One of them is selected. That is, among the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-10, the fluctuation pattern PA1-10 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot". On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type ("10R conditional specific big hit 1-3", "7R conditional specific big hit", "3R conditional specific big hit") Or, only the fixed variation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random value. It should be noted that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not depend on the number of pending operations, that is, the tendency of selecting the fluctuation pattern for big hits is the same regardless of the number of pending operations. In addition, even if the contents of the production are the same, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a big hit in order to execute an effect for notifying that the jackpot is a big hit or an effect for congratulating the big hit. It may be the time (for example, when the SP reach A is a big hit, the fluctuation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than the 70 seconds when the SP reach A is off).

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 2. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Six types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-6 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without, only the fixed variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the six types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-6 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the contents of the reference table are according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). Is set to be different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random value is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is one or more, the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and PH2- 2 (shortening variation) is easy to select, and when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. Is easy to select.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is used regardless of the jackpot type ("4R conditional specific jackpot", "4R conditional normal jackpot"). Depending on the situation, one of the three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", the big hit types are "10R conditional specific big hit 1", "10R conditional specific big hit 3", "7R conditional specific big hit", and "7R conditional specific big hit". If it is "3R conditional specific jackpot", one of three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value, and the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot". If it is "2", one of four types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 is selected according to the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern. That is, among the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4, the fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". It should be noted that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not depend on the number of pending operations, that is, the tendency of selecting the fluctuation pattern for big hits is the same regardless of the number of pending operations. In addition, even if the contents of the production are the same, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a big hit in order to execute an effect for notifying that the jackpot is a big hit or an effect for congratulating the big hit. It may be the time (for example, when the SP reach B is a big hit, the fluctuation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than the 70 seconds when the SP reach B is off).

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 3. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for disconnection. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without, only the fixed variation pattern PH3-2 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", one of four types of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-4 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the contents of the reference table are according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). Is set to be different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random value is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is one or more, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected. It is easy to select the fluctuation pattern PH3-2 (normal fluctuation) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is 0.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is used regardless of the jackpot type ("4R conditional specific jackpot", "4R conditional normal jackpot"). Depending on the situation, one of two types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-2 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", the big hit types are "10R conditional specific big hit 1", "10R conditional specific big hit 3", "7R conditional specific big hit", and "7R conditional specific big hit". If it is "3R conditional specific jackpot", one of two types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-2 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value, and the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot". If it is "2", one of three types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. That is, among the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". It should be noted that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not depend on the number of pending operations, that is, the tendency of selecting the fluctuation pattern for big hits is the same regardless of the number of pending operations. In addition, even if the contents of the production are the same, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a big hit in order to execute an effect for notifying that the jackpot is a big hit or an effect for congratulating the big hit. It may be the time (for example, when the SP reach B is a big hit, the fluctuation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than the 70 seconds when the SP reach B is off).

<Decorative design>
Next, the decorative design of the third embodiment will be described. 73 to 74 are schematic views showing a decorative symbol jackpot roll table according to the third embodiment. The decorative pattern of this embodiment is composed of a combination of an identification element composed of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. Seven types of numbers "1" to "7" are set as the identification element of the decorative pattern (that is, there are a total of seven types of decorative patterns). Each decorative symbol is arranged in the order of "1" to "7" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, and each display is in the order of "1" to "7" (or the order of "7" to "1") on the screen. It is cyclically displayed or scrolled in the areas Z1, Z2, and Z3, and after "7", it returns to "1" again (or after "1", it returns to "7" again). Hereinafter, the combination of the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped) on the screen of the effect display device 70 is also referred to as a “roll” or a “stop roll”. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the term "stop display" is simply used, it means at least one of temporary stop and fixed stop.

As shown in FIGS. 73 to 74, the decorative symbol jackpot roll table is associated with a combination of fixed stop symbols of the decorative symbol at the time of jackpot (big hit roll) for each jackpot type. The jackpot roll is composed of a combination "* ・ * ・ *" of a stop mode in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative symbol of an arbitrary number). That is, the jackpot roll is a combination in which all the symbol rows are composed of the same number of decorative symbols (doublets). In this embodiment, among the jackpot rolls, the doublets of "7" are also referred to as "special jackpot rolls", and doublets other than "7" (that is, "1", "2", "3", “4”, “5”, “6” doublets) are also referred to as “non-special jackpots”. The jackpots shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 are a combination of fixed stop symbols of decorative symbols at the time of jackpot displayed at the end of the variation display when the jackpot type determination effect described later is not performed, or a jackpot. Combination of fixed stop symbols displayed in the jackpot type determination effect when the type determination effect is performed (displayed in a different manner from the combination of the confirmed stop symbols displayed at the end of the variation display due to the jackpot type determination effect. Alternatively, it is a combination of fixed stop symbols that are displayed without change, and represents a true jackpot, which will be described later). Here, when the jackpot type determination effect is performed, a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols different from the combination of the fixed stop symbols (true jackpot roll) at the end of the variation display (temporary jackpot output described later). Eye) is displayed as a fixed stop.

FIG. 73 is a decorative symbol jackpot outcome table 1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-electric support state). First, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, only the doublet of "7" is selected as the jackpot. In addition, if the first special symbol "4R conditional normal jackpot" is won, the jackpots are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7". One of the doublets of "" is selected. Therefore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the normal game state, even if the jackpot is "7" (special jackpot), the special figure 1 maximum profit jackpot (4R) It is uncertain whether or not the player has won the conditional specific jackpot). On the other hand, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" is won, only the doublet of "7" is selected as the jackpot. In addition, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won, the jackpots are "1", "2", "3", "4", "4". One of "5" and "6" doublets is selected. In addition, if the second special symbol "3R conditional specific jackpot" is won, any of "1", "2", "4", "5", and "6" is doublet as a jackpot. Is selected. Therefore, it is rare to draw a big hit of the second special symbol in the normal game state, but if the big hit is a doublet of "7" (special big hit), the special figure 2 highest profit. It is definite that the jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot) has been won. As a modified example, when the game state is the normal game state (non-electric support state) and the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, the jackpot roll is "7" regardless of the type of jackpot. It may be doublet (special jackpot).

Here, FIG. 75 shows a case where the special jackpot (doublet of "7") is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main body of the game in the normal game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the production of. In this embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the normal game state, as shown in (A) in the figure, the special jackpot roll is stopped and displayed via the full rotation reach in the fluctuation display. In some cases, as shown in (B) in the figure, in the variable display, the special jackpot roll may be stopped and displayed via the SP reach. Here, as shown in the variation pattern table 1 (see FIG. 70) of the special symbol for the normal gaming state, when the 4R conditional specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the variation pattern of the first special symbol While there is a possibility that PA1-10 (full rotation reach) is selected, if the 4R conditional normal jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the variation pattern PA1-10 (full rotation reach) of the first special symbol is selected. ) Is unlikely to be selected. Therefore, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the special jackpot roll is stopped and displayed after the full rotation reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed that the 4R conditional specific jackpot (Special Figure 1 highest profit jackpot) has been won. On the other hand, as shown in the variation pattern table 1 (see FIG. 70) of the special symbol for the normal gaming state, even if the "4R conditional specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "4R" of the first special symbol is won. Even if the "conditional normal jackpot" is won, one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 (SP reach) of the first special symbol may be selected. Therefore, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the special jackpot roll is stopped and displayed after the SP reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. It is uncertain whether the 4R conditional specific jackpot (Special Figure 1 highest profit jackpot) was won or the 4R conditional normal jackpot was won. As a modification, if the special jackpot is stopped and displayed after the SP reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the 4R conditional specific jackpot (4R conditional specific jackpot) The specification may be such that the winning of the special figure 1 highest profit jackpot) is denied, that is, it is confirmed that the winning is won in the 4R conditional normal jackpot. Further, as a further modification, when the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, "1", "2", "3", "4", "4", "4", "4" via SP reach. One of the doublets of "5" and "6" may be configured to stop and display (that is, a non-special jackpot is selected), and when configured in this way, SP reach in the variable display. Special jackpot ("7" doublet) or non-special jackpot ("1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" doublet) Is stopped and displayed, when the special game to be executed after that is started (big hit start demo), it is not notified that it is "4R conditional specific big hit", but the special game is being executed (round game or big hit end demo). It may be configured to notify that it is a "4R conditional specific jackpot" (if the special jackpot is stopped and displayed via the full rotation reach in the fluctuation display, it is executed after that. From the start of the special game (big hit start demo), it will be notified that it is a "4R conditional specific big hit").

FIG. 74 is a decorative symbol jackpot outcome table 2 that is referred to when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state (electric support state). First, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state, if the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, the jackpots are "3" and "5". Is selected. If the first special symbol "4R conditional normal jackpot" is won, one of "1", "2", "4", and "6" is selected as the jackpot. To get doublet. Therefore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the time-saving game state or the probability variation game state, the special jackpot roll (doublet of "7") is not selected as the jackpot roll. On the other hand, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" is won, only the doublet of "7" is selected as the jackpot. Further, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot" is won, doublet of "3" or "5" is selected as the jackpot. In addition, when the second special symbol "3R conditional specific jackpot" is won, one of "1", "2", "4", and "6" is selected as the jackpot. To be doublet. Therefore, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state and the jackpot is a special jackpot (doublet of "7"), the special figure 2 maximum profit jackpot (10R) It is definite that you have won the conditional specific jackpot). The big hit result of the second special symbol described here is a true big hit result described later, that is, a combination of fixed stop symbols displayed in the big hit type determination effect when the big hit type determination effect is performed ( This is a true jackpot roll), which is different from the combination of the fixed stop symbols displayed at the end of the variation display (temporary jackpot roll described later) when the jackpot type determination effect is performed.

If the decorative symbols in the left and right columns of the three rows of decorative symbols stop at the reach, a big hit will be made according to the type of reach (the type of decorative symbols in the left and right columns). Expectations are different. As an example, the big hit expectation is higher in the reach eyes of "1" and "5" than in the reach eyes of "2", "4" and "6", and it is higher than the reach eyes of "1" and "5". However, the reach of "3" has a higher expectation of big hit, and the reach of "7" (called "7 Tempai") has a higher expectation of big hit than the reach of "3". .. In other words, if two of the three rows of decorative symbols are aligned and one is aligned, a special jackpot (doublet of "7") will be obtained. The reach (7 tempai) is two of the three rows of decorative symbols. The expectation of big hits is set relatively higher than the reach hits, which are non-special big hits (doubles other than "7") if one is prepared. In addition, as a modification, a specific condition (when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (electric support state), a specific variable display, a case via a specific effect, etc.) is satisfied. In the situation, the specification may be such that the big hit is confirmed (after that, the game always shifts to the special game) when the 7 tempai is established during the execution of the fluctuation display. Further, when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state (electric support state) and a predetermined effect (for example, a special zone effect or parts charge MAX described later) is executed before the reach state is reached, After that, when the decorative symbols in the left column are temporarily stopped at "7", even if the decorative symbols in the right and middle columns are changing (in a state where they are not temporarily stopped and the tempai is not established). (Even if there is), it may be a specification that the big hit is confirmed (after that, it always shifts to the special game).

<Direction during big hit>
Next, the jackpot production of the third embodiment will be described. As described above, this big hit start demonstration is performed during the big hit start demo (during the opening game), the round effect is performed during the round game, and the big hit start is performed during the big hit start demo (during the ending game). Includes a big hit end demo production.

≪Round production≫
First, the round effect pattern will be described. FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing a round effect pattern table. The round effect pattern table shows the correspondence between the jackpot type (type of symbol group) and the round effect pattern. In this embodiment, with reference to the round effect pattern table, one round effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (type of symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process is selected from a plurality of types of round effect patterns. It is determined.

In the round production pattern table, there are 6 types of round production patterns, "Daiki Bonus", "Ki Bonus", "Super Life Bonus", "Shou Bonus (10R)", "Shou Bonus (7R)", and "Celebration Bonus". Is set. When the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", "Daiki bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", "joy bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "super longevity bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)", "Shou Bonus (10R)" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "Shou Bonus (7R)" is selected as the round effect pattern. The longevity bonus (10R) is a longevity bonus corresponding to the 10R special game, and the longevity bonus (7R) is a longevity bonus corresponding to the 7R special game. Each life bonus is configured as a round effect with the same effect tendency, but the effect result of the round promotion effect performed in a predetermined round (for example, the 7th round) is different (details will be described later). When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", "celebration bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. Each round effect pattern is an effect content corresponding to the content stored in the above-mentioned large winning opening operation pattern (specified number of rounds, large winning opening, opening mode of specific area 548, etc.).

≪Big hit start demo production≫
Next, the jackpot start demo production pattern will be described. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot start demo effect pattern table. In the jackpot start demo effect pattern table, the correspondence between the jackpot type (type of symbol group) and the jackpot start demo effect pattern is set. In this embodiment, one jackpot start demo effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (type of symbol group) is determined from among a plurality of types of jackpot start demo effect patterns with reference to the jackpot start demo effect pattern table. ..

The jackpot start demo production pattern table has five types of jackpot start demo production patterns: "Daiki bonus start", "Ki bonus start", "Super longevity bonus start", "Shouju bonus start", and "Celebration bonus start". It has been set. Further, the jackpot start demo effect pattern table stores the execution time of the jackpot start demo effect corresponding to each jackpot start demo effect pattern.

When the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", "Daiki bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demo effect pattern. This "Daiki bonus start" is a jackpot start demo production pattern that suggests that a round game based on the "Daiki bonus" is started, and "15 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", "joy bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demo effect pattern. This "Ki Bonus Start" is a jackpot start demo effect pattern that suggests that a round game based on the "Ki Bonus" is started, and "12 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "super longevity bonus" is selected as the jackpot start demo effect pattern. "Super longevity bonus start" is a jackpot start demo production pattern that suggests that a round game based on the "super longevity bonus" is started, and "64.5 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)" or "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "longevity bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demo effect pattern. "Shou Bonus Start" is a jackpot start demo production pattern that suggests that a round game based on the "Shou Bonus" is started, and "52.5 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", "celebration bonus" is selected as the jackpot start demo production pattern. "Celebration bonus start" is a jackpot start demo effect pattern that suggests that a round game based on the "celebration bonus" is started, and "40 seconds" is set as the execution time.

Next, the flow of each jackpot start demo production will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of each jackpot start demonstration effect. The "appearance of an accessory" in the figure is an effect in which a predetermined movable accessory appears at the same time as a big hit occurs. The "bonus display" is an effect of displaying the name (bonus name) of the round effect pattern to be started from now on and notifying that the round game based on the round effect pattern is performed. The "bonus type determination effect" is an effect of re-drawing the jackpot type in the jackpot start demo, which will be described in detail later. The "V winning instruction" is an effect of instructing the game ball to enter the specific area 548. The "right-handed instruction" is an effect of displaying a right-handed image instructing the player that the game ball should be fired toward the right side region PA2. The "music selection effect" is an effect of selecting a player's favorite music from a plurality of music (music played in a round game) by operating a button. "Round start" means that the first round of the jackpot game is started.

When the Daiki bonus starts, the production progresses in the order of appearance of the character → Daiki bonus display → V winning instruction → round start. When the joy bonus starts, the production progresses in the order of joy bonus display → right-handed instruction → round start. The start of the super longevity bonus progresses in the order of jackpot type determination production → super longevity bonus display → music selection display → V winning instruction → round start. As for the start of the longevity bonus, the production progresses in the order of jackpot type determination production → longevity bonus display → V winning instruction → round start. As for the start of the celebration bonus, the production progresses in the order of jackpot type determination production → celebration bonus display → V winning instruction → round start.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type re-lottery effect (big hit type determination effect) is performed in the jackpot start demo effect of the second special symbol, but the jackpot type re-lottery is performed in the jackpot start demo effect of the first special symbol. No production (big hit type determination production) is performed. That is, only when the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, the jackpot type determination effect (details will be described later) for re-drawing the jackpot type is performed. As a modification, even if it is a big hit of the second special symbol, if the big hit is drawn via a specific effect (for example, full rotation reach), the big hit type determination effect is not performed and the super longevity bonus is displayed → The production may be advanced in the order of music selection display → V winning instruction → round start, and in particular, when the game state is a time-saving game state (when it is in the “chance mode”) or the game state is a probability change game state. When (when in the "rush mode"), the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, it is preferable to configure it as such.

≪Big hit end demo production≫
Next, the jackpot end demo production pattern will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a big hit end demo effect pattern table. In the jackpot end demo production pattern table, the jackpot type (type of symbol group), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game (presence or absence of V prize) ) And the big hit end demo production pattern are set. In this embodiment, referring to the jackpot end demo production pattern table, the jackpot type (type of symbol group), the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and the execution of the jackpot game are selected from a plurality of types of jackpot start demo production patterns. One jackpot end demo production pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 548 in the inside is determined.

In the jackpot end demo production pattern table, "chance rush A", "chance rush B", "rush rush A", "rush rush B", and "rush continuation" are set as five types of jackpot end demo production patterns. ing. Further, the jackpot end demo effect pattern table stores the execution time of the jackpot end demo effect corresponding to each jackpot end demo effect pattern. The execution time of the jackpot end demo effect (big hit end demo time) is a time set between the end of execution of the final round game and the end of execution of the special game. Here, the end of the execution of the final round game is after the end of the final round game (after the closing operation of the grand prize opening 54 is started), and after the final round game. This is when the set interval time (end demo waiting time) has elapsed. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demo effect (big hit end demo time) is the execution time measured from the time when the interval time after the end of the final round game elapses. As described above, the interval time is a waiting time (large winning opening closing time) set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo. In the present embodiment, for example, 2 seconds is set as the interval time (round game waiting time, jackpot end demo waiting time). The interval time set between each round game (round game waiting time) and the interval time set between the final round game and the jackpot end demo (big hit end demo waiting time) are different times. May be set to.

(At the time of V prize)
First, if a game ball can be entered into a specific area 548 during a jackpot game, the jackpot ends according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type (type of symbol group). A demo production pattern is set. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal game state, "rush rush A" is set, and if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the time-saving game state, "rush rush B" is set and the big hit. If the game state at the time of winning is a probabilistic game state, "rush continuation" is set. "Rush rush A" is an effect suggesting that the rush mode is entered after the end of the big hit game triggered by the big hit in the normal mode (normal game state), and "8 seconds" is set as the execution time. "Rush rush B" is an effect suggesting that the rush mode is entered after the end of the big hit game triggered by the big hit in the chance mode (short-time game state), and "9 seconds" is set as the execution time. "Rush continuation" is an effect suggesting that the game shifts to the rush mode again after the end of the big hit game triggered by the big hit in the rush mode (probability change game state), and "10 seconds" is set as the execution time. In addition, "Rush Rush A" and "Rush Rush B" are common in that a rush rush screen suggesting that you are entering rush mode is displayed, but "Rush Rush A" is forgotten to remove the prepaid card. The difference is that in order to prevent theft, a prepaid card warning display for calling attention is displayed superimposed on the rush mode entry screen. Therefore, the execution time of "rush rush A" is set to be relatively longer than the execution time of "rush rush B". In addition, the prepaid card warning display is not displayed even in "Rush continuation". As a modification, the prepaid card warning display may be displayed not only in "Rush rush A" but also in "Rush rush B", but even in that case, the prepaid card warning display is not displayed in "Rush continuation". It is preferable to configure it.

(At the time of non-V winning)
On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be entered into the specific area 548 during the big hit game, the big hit depends on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, regardless of the big hit type (type of symbol group). The end demo production pattern is set. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal game state, "chance rush A" is set, and if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, "chance rush B" is set. Set. "Chance rush A" is a jackpot end demo production pattern that suggests that the jackpot in the normal mode (normal game state) is triggered to shift to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends, and "11 seconds" is set as the execution time. Has been done. "Chance rush B" is a jackpot end demo production pattern that suggests that the jackpot mode (time saving game state) or rush mode (probability variable game state) will trigger a shift to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends. "12 seconds" is set as the time.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko gaming machine PM of the third embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. It is configured in. In the following, among various game effects, "big hit type determination effect", "first reward acquisition effect", "second reward acquisition effect", and "special button effect" will be described.

<Big hit type determination production>
First, the jackpot type determination effect will be described. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the jackpot type determination effect. The jackpot type determination effect is once notified by a stop roll (big hit roll) of the decorative symbol when the variation display is stopped when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state. The result (big hit type) is re-lottered in the big hit start demo, and the re-lottery result is notified.

The jackpot types of the second special symbol that are subject to re-lottery in the jackpot type determination effect are 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot 1-3), 7R jackpot (7R conditional specific jackpot), and 3R jackpot (3R). It is roughly divided into conditional specific jackpots). This jackpot type corresponds to the above-mentioned round production pattern, and the 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot 1, 2) corresponds to the super longevity bonus, and the 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot 3) and 7R jackpot correspond. (7R conditional specific jackpot) corresponds to the longevity bonus, and 3R jackpot (3R conditional specific jackpot) corresponds to the celebration bonus. Therefore, in the jackpot type determination effect, as a result of the re-lottery of the jackpot type, the name of the bonus indicating the jackpot type of the second special symbol (super longevity bonus, longevity bonus, celebration bonus) is displayed to "10R jackpot". , "10R jackpot or 7R jackpot", "3R jackpot", which of the jackpot types is suggested or notified. However, even if the jackpot type is re-lottered, in reality, since the jackpot type is determined in advance by the lottery process of the second special symbol, the effect development (re-lottery result) is performed accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 80, the jackpot type determination effect includes a re-lottery effect, a button effect, a character effect, and a bonus display effect.

For the re-lottery effect, the names of the round effect patterns (super life bonus, life bonus, celebration bonus) are displayed in order on the screen, and among "10R jackpot", "10R jackpot or 7R jackpot", and "3R jackpot". It is a production that inspires which of the big hit types is won. Types of this re-lottery effect include a premier re-lottery effect and a normal re-lottery effect. The normal re-lottery effect is a re-lottery effect in which any one of "10R jackpot", "10R jackpot or 7R jackpot", and "3R jackpot" is derived as a result of the re-lottery. On the other hand, the premier re-lottery effect is a definite effect in which only "10R jackpot" is uniquely derived as a result of the re-lottery. That is, when the premiere re-lottery production is performed, it is confirmed that the "10R jackpot" has been won at that time. In the third embodiment, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", the premier re-lottery effect is performed on the production route (effect route 1 described later). When the jackpot type of the second special symbol is one of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", "7R conditional specific jackpot", and "3R conditional specific jackpot". Follows the production route (production routes 2 to 4 described later) in which the re-lottery production is normally performed.

The button effect is configured as an operation request effect in which a predetermined effect progresses by the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 15 is operated by the player according to the instruction on the screen, the result of the re-lottery is notified by the bonus display effect immediately after the character effect is performed. The button effects include a button blow effect (first button effect) that is performed in response to the premier re-lottery effect and a button repeated hit effect (second button effect) that is performed in response to the normal re-lottery effect. ..

The character effect is an effect in which any one of a plurality of movable characters provided on the board is operated at the timing when the effect button 15 is operated. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of movable characters, there are a character character that imitates the main character and a logo that imitates a logo that indicates the model name of the gaming machine. Here, when the above-mentioned premier re-lottery effect (button blow effect) is performed, the character character effect effect is always executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned normal re-lottery effect (button repeated hitting effect) is performed, the character character effect effect is executed and the logo character character is used according to the result of the re-lottery (mode of the bonus display effect). It is divided into the case where the effect is executed and the case where neither of the character effects is executed.

The bonus display effect is an effect of notifying which jackpot type has been won as a result of the above-mentioned re-lottery effect by the name of the round effect pattern (bonus) to be performed in the future.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of production routes 1 to 4 are set as production routes for the jackpot type determination production, and the result of the re-lottery is derived via different production processes for each production route. become. First, if "10R Conditional Specific Jackpot 2" is won, the production progresses in the order of premier re-lottery production → button blow production → character character production → super longevity bonus display (production route 1). In the super longevity bonus display, the bonus name "super longevity bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the 10R jackpot has been won. If you win the "10R Conditional Specified Big Hit 1", the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → button repeated hitting production → character character production → super longevity bonus display (production route 2). In this way, "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" also display the bonus name "super longevity bonus", but the types of re-lottery effects are different, that is, The type of re-lottery effect is different depending on the type of "10R conditional specific jackpot". In addition, when "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won, the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → button repeated hitting production → logo character production → longevity bonus display (production). Route 3). In this way, the "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" has the same type of re-lottery effect as the "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" which is the same "10R conditional specific jackpot", but the type of bonus name. Is different, and both the type of re-lottery effect and the type of bonus name are different as compared with "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" which is the same "10R conditional specific jackpot". In addition, in the longevity bonus display, the bonus name "longevity bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the player has won the 10R jackpot or the 7R jackpot. If the "3R conditional specific jackpot" is won, the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → button repeated hitting production → celebration bonus display (production route 4). In the celebration bonus display, the bonus name "celebration bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the 3R jackpot has been won.

Here, the distribution of the production route when viewed for each big hit will be described. In the present embodiment, after the temporary jackpot roll is displayed as a fixed stop display at the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the true jackpot roll is changed and displayed (fixed stop display) after the re-lottery effect (re-lottery). Since the production is the production performed in the big hit start demo, that is, the production is in the situation where the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the true big hit result displayed in this re-lottery production is also confirmed and stopped. You will be doing). The jackpot rolls shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 correspond to true jackpot rolls. First, if the provisional jackpot is a doublet of "7", the case of shifting to the production route 1 (super longevity bonus) (however, the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) can be selected. "10R conditional specific jackpot 2") and transition to production route 2 (super longevity bonus) (however, fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) is not selected "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" If) and. On the other hand, if the provisional jackpot is matched with any of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the production route 2 ( Shift to one of the super longevity bonus), the directing route 3 (longevity bonus), and the directing route 4 (celebration bonus). Here, if the true jackpot after the re-lottery is a doublet of "7", it is determined that the production route 1 (super life bonus) or the production route 2 (super life bonus). In addition, if the true jackpot after the re-lottery is a doublet of "3" or "5", it is determined that the production route is 3 (longevity bonus). In addition, if the true jackpot after the re-lottery matches with any of "1", "2", "4", and "6", the production route 4 (celebration bonus) is used. It is confirmed that there is. In the present embodiment, the true jackpot is not lower than the provisional jackpot, and the provisional jackpot does not change and is displayed as a true jackpot as it is, and the provisional jackpot is displayed as a temporary stop. It is limited to the case where the jackpot roll changes and the fixed stop is displayed in the form of a true jackpot roll. Therefore, when the production route 1 has a provisional jackpot of "7", the production route 2 has a provisional jackpot of "1", "2", "3", "4", In the case of any of "5", "6", and "7", the production route 3 has provisional jackpots of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". , "6", the staging route 4 has a provisional jackpot of "1", "2", "4", or "6". It will be a production route that can be transferred to. That is, in the production route 1, the doublet of "7" is displayed as a temporary jackpot, and after the re-lottery, the doublet of "7" is displayed as a true jackpot. (Big hits do not change). Further, in the production route 2, the doublet of "7" is displayed as a temporary big hit, and after the re-lottery, the doublet of "7" is displayed as a true big hit (big hit). If the result does not change) or if one of the doublets of "1" to "6" is confirmed and stopped as a temporary big hit, and after the re-lottery, the true doublet is "7". The doublet may be displayed as a fixed stop (the big hit roll changes). Further, in the production route 3, doublets of "3" or "5" are displayed as temporary jackpots, and after the re-lottery, doublets of "3" or "5" are displayed as true jackpots. Is displayed as a fixed stop (the jackpot roll does not change), or any of the doublets of "1", "2", "4", and "6" is displayed as a temporary jackpot. After the re-lottery, doublets of "3" or "5" may be displayed as a true jackpot (the jackpot changes). In addition, in the production route 4, any of "1", "2", "4", and "6" doublets is displayed as a temporary jackpot, and after the re-lottery, the true jackpot is displayed. As a result, any of the doublets of "1", "2", "4", and "6" is displayed as a fixed stop (the jackpot roll does not change). Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the provisional jackpot is a doublet of "7", the 10R jackpot is confirmed, and if the doublet is "3" or "5", the 7R jackpot or more is confirmed, "1", If the numbers are "2", "4", and "6", the 3R jackpot or higher is confirmed. In this way, even if any of the doublets of "1" to "7" is displayed as a temporary jackpot, the re-lottery by the jackpot type determination effect will result in the production routes 1 to 4. It is distributed to any route, and it is notified whether this jackpot is a super longevity bonus (10R jackpot), a longevity bonus (10R jackpot or 7R jackpot), or a celebration bonus (3R jackpot). Here, when shifting to the production route 1 (super longevity bonus), the “7 However, it may be transferred through other effects or, very rarely (with a lower probability than when not passing through a predetermined high expectation effect). In other words, if getting doublet of "7" without going through the predetermined high expectation effect, it shifts to the effect route 2 (super longevity bonus), or if it goes through the predetermined high expectation effect. Compared to, there is a high probability that you will move to production route 2 (super longevity bonus). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type of the second special symbol is 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D), 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E), 7R. In the case of a conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F), as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the fluctuation display time (variation time) can be the same time value according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. It is configured as follows. As a modification, a specification in which a fixed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected without depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, or a specification in which the same fluctuation time is selected although the fluctuation pattern is different may be used. Further, as a further modification, the premier re-lottery (directing route 1) is executed when the jackpots are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". You may.

Then, when the bonus type determination effect (big hit start demo) is completed and the round game is started, the round game corresponding to the round effect pattern (bonus name) notified by the bonus type determination effect is executed. If the "Shou Bonus" is derived as a result of the re-lottery by the jackpot type determination effect (when the Shou Bonus is displayed), the promotion effect (Round promotion effect) is performed during the round game. In the promotion production, the true jackpot type (10R jackpot or 7R jackpot) is notified. That is, if the "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won in the special symbol lottery, it is confirmed that the promotion effect is successful and the "10R jackpot" is obtained, and the "7R conditional specific jackpot" is confirmed in the special symbol lottery. If you win, the promotion production fails and it is confirmed that you are a "7R jackpot". As a modification, if the "7R conditional specific jackpot" is won in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured not to execute the promotion effect in the first place, and if it is configured in that way, the promotion effect is executed. It is desirable to confirm that it is a "10R jackpot" at that time (in other words, the promotion effect is executed only when the "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won).

<First reward acquisition production>
Next, the first reward acquisition effect will be described. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first reward acquisition effect. The first reward acquisition effect presents to the player in advance that a specific high-expectation effect may occur as a reward given to the player during the execution of the variable display. This is a production of whether or not the presented reward (specific high-expectation production) can be obtained by operating the button of the player. This first reward acquisition effect can be executed in the variable display when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state). In the following, a specific high-expectation effect that is the target of the reward in the first reward acquisition effect will also be referred to as a “specific high-expectation effect”.

FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect and the type of reward (specific high expectation effect). In FIG. 82, the horizontal column shows the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect, and the vertical column shows the type of reward (specific high expectation effect).

The execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect includes the execution of the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the execution of the latter half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the execution of the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the execution of the latter half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the execution of the first half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation. , The execution of the latter half of the pseudo 3 variation and the execution of SP reach A are included. Each pseudo-variation is divided into the first half of the pseudo-variation and the second half of the pseudo-variation, and each pseudo-variation (pseudo-variation, pseudo-two-variation, pseudo-three-variation) in the section from the start to the end of each pseudo-variation (pseudo-variation, pseudo-variation, pseudo-variation). The first half section closer to the start of pseudo 1 fluctuation, pseudo 2 fluctuation, pseudo 3 fluctuation) is called the pseudo fluctuation first half (pseudo 1 fluctuation first half, pseudo 2 fluctuation first half, pseudo 3 fluctuation first half), and at the end of each pseudo fluctuation. The closer latter half section is called the pseudo-variation second half (pseudo 1 fluctuation second half, pseudo 2 fluctuation second half, pseudo 3 fluctuation second half).

Here, the variation effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) defines the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect, and the first reward acquisition effect can be executed at one or a plurality of execution timings in the variation display. ing. At this time, as shown in FIG. 82, the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is divided into the execution section A, the execution section B, and the execution section C in chronological order. The execution section A is a section including the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the second half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the second half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation. The execution section B is a section including the first half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation and the second half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation. The execution section C is a section including the character reach (SP reach A). In the present embodiment, the first reward acquisition effect is not executed a plurality of times within the execution sections A, B, and C of 1 (since there is only one type of reward for the selection candidate in the effect section C, the first reward acquisition effect is executed a plurality of times. If the execution sections A, B, and C are different, it is possible to execute the first reward acquisition effect once in each of the execution sections A, B, and C (the variation). It is possible to execute the first reward acquisition effect multiple times during the display). That is, the first reward acquisition effect is not executed in combination within one execution section A, B, C, but if the execution sections A, B, and C are different, it is compounded during one fluctuation display. May be executed. However, if the first reward acquisition effect is performed once in each of the effect sections A and C, the "special zone effect" is not a reward in the effect section A (in the effect section C, the "special zone" is not used. Only "directing" is a candidate for reward, and this is to prevent the same reward from appearing twice in a plurality of directing sections A and C).

Types of specific high expectation effects include red hold change effect, gold hold change effect, special zone effect, 7 tempai effect, parts charge MAX, END reach (SP reach C), and next notice effect. Each specific high-expectation effect is basically a high-expectation effect that is scheduled to be performed during the execution of the variation display. That is, one or a plurality of high-expectation effects defined in the scenario of the variation effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) are candidates for the reward. In other words, by presenting the high expectation effect specified in the scenario of the variable effect pattern in advance as a reward, there is a discrepancy between the effect result of the first reward acquisition effect and the actual game result (high expectation acquired as a reward). It is adjusted so that there is no contradiction that the production was not actually performed. However, when the specific high-expectation effect is presented as the information of Gase (when the failure notification effect described later is performed), the high-expectation effect not specified in the scenario of the variation effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is used as a reward. It may be presented (there is no discrepancy between the game result and the production result).

Here, the contents of the specific high-expectation production that is the target of the reward will be described in order. The red hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image (the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720) changes to red. The gold-holding change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to gold. The display mode of the changing image is set so that the gold display mode has a relatively higher expectation (big hit expectation) to be a big hit in the variable display than the red display mode. The special zone effect is an effect of shifting the current stay stage to a different special stage (special zone) such as a background image. The 7-tempai production is a production in which the decorative design reaches a specific design (“7” design). By collecting all the predetermined number (7 pieces) of parts that make up a character that imitates a robot, it is confirmed that the robot will be completed and will develop into a high-expectation reach in which the robot will appear. It is a production. END reach is a reach effect in which a character called END (a specific element described later) appears. The next notice effect is an effect that displays the next notice message on the screen and then announces that it will develop into SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 82, one or a plurality of specific high-expectation effects are associated with each execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect as a reward candidate. Here, in the third embodiment, the type (number of types) of the specific high-expectation effect that is a candidate for the reward can be different depending on the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect. Specifically, the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation are associated with the red hold change effect, the gold hold change effect, the parts charge MAX, and the END reach as reward candidates. In the latter half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the latter half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, red hold change effect, gold hold change effect, special zone effect, parts charge MAX, and END reach are associated as reward candidates. In the first half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation, 7 tempai productions are associated as reward candidates. In the latter half of the pseudo-3 fluctuation, the next notice effect is associated as a reward candidate. SP reach A is associated with a special zone effect as a reward candidate. Then, at each execution timing, one or a plurality of high-expectation effects that are candidates for the reward is selected by lottery and presented to the player as a specific high-expectation effect to be notified in advance. Will be done. That is, the reward (specific high expectation effect) presented at the execution timing of 1 is always one.

Here, the features of the present embodiment are the tendency of the type of specific high expectation effect presented as a reward when the execution timing is during the execution of the pseudo-variation display, and the execution timing during the execution of SP reach A. In this case, the tendency of the type of specific high-expectation effect presented as a reward is different. In addition, the number of types (5 types) of specific high-expectation effects that are candidates for reward when the execution timing is during execution of the pseudo-variation display, and candidates for reward when the execution timing is during execution of SP Reach A. The number of types (1 type) of the specific high-expectation effect is different. That is, the variation of the reward is larger when the pseudo-variation display is being executed than when the SP reach A is being executed. The reason is that it is necessary to raise the reward rank (big hit expectation) as the fluctuation display progresses, but it is a high rank in order to produce a rising effect as the pseudo fluctuation display develops to SP reach. This is because if the reward is increased indiscriminately, the balance of the production may be lost and the value of the reward may decrease.

Further, when the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the pseudo-variation display, the first reward is acquired when the pseudo-three-variation display is being executed than when the pseudo-one-variation display or the pseudo-two-variation display is being executed. The production is easier to execute. At this time, when the execution timing is during the execution of the pseudo 1 variation display or the pseudo 2 variation display, the tendency of the type of the specific high expectation effect presented as a reward and the execution timing are the execution of the pseudo 3 variation display. The tendency of the type of specific high-expectation effect presented as a reward in some cases is different. In addition, the number of types (5 types) of specific high-expectation effects that are candidates for reward when the execution timing is executing the pseudo 1 variation display or the pseudo 2 variation display, and the execution timing is executing the pseudo 3 variation display. In this case, the number of types (2 types) of specific high-expectation effects that are candidates for rewards is different. That is, the variation of the reward is larger in the execution of the pseudo 1 variation display or the pseudo 2 variation display than in the execution of the pseudo 3 variation display. The reason is that it is necessary to raise the reward rank (big hit expectation) as the number of pseudo-variable displays increases, in order to produce an upstart effect as the number of pseudo-variable displays increases. This is because if the reward is increased indiscriminately, the balance of the production may be lost and the value of the reward may decrease.

Further, if the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the variation display, the first reward acquisition effect is performed between the start of the variation display and the first reward acquisition effect. It is configured so that other high-expectation effects with a higher jackpot expectation than the reward presented in advance (specific high-expectation effects) are not executed. The reason is that before the first reward acquisition effect is executed, if another high expectation effect with a higher expectation of big hit than the reward (specific high expectation effect) occurs, it is presented to the player. This is because the reward (specific high expectation production) will be a downturned production, which may betray the player's expectation. In particular, when the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the variation display, the first reward acquisition effect is performed between the start of the variation display and the first reward acquisition effect. It is desirable that the reward (specific high-expectation effect) presented in advance is configured so that other high-expectation effects with the same effect tendency (effect type) having a higher jackpot expectation are not executed. For example, when the reward presented in advance in the first reward acquisition effect is the red hold change effect, it is desirable that the gold hold change effect is not executed until the first reward acquisition effect is performed.

In addition, the first reward acquisition effect may occur as an effect that overturns the weak development up to that point into a strong development, or the strong development up to that point, depending on the scenario of the selected sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern). It may occur as a production that develops into a stronger development. For example, consider a case where a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns P1 and P2 are provided as a sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern) in which the first reward acquisition effect is executed during the pseudo-two variation display. At this time, for any of the sub-variation patterns P1 and P2, the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the pseudo-2 variation display, and the same specific high expectation effect (for example, gold hold change effect) is acquired as the reward. It shall be possible. For example, in the sub-variation pattern P1, the early stage of the variation display is one of the weak developments (for example, the same production tendency (effect type) as the specific high-expectation production), which is a development in which the jackpot expectation is likely to be low. Low expectations among the development in which the blue hold change effect with a lower expectation than the red hold change effect and the gold hold change effect is performed, and the comment notice effect that is a production tendency (effect type) different from the specific high expectation effect effect. The blue comment notice production will be performed), but by executing the first reward acquisition production and acquiring a specific high expectation production (for example, gold hold change production) with high big hit expectation, big hit expectation at once It will be a scenario that reverses to a strong development that seems to be a high degree. On the other hand, in the sub-variation pattern P2, it is one of the effects with a strong development (for example, the same effect tendency (effect type) as the specific high expectation effect) from the beginning of the variation display, and the red with a higher expectation than the blue hold change effect. The first reward is the development in which the pending change effect is performed, and the red comment advance effect with high expectation is performed even in the comment advance effect, which is the effect of the effect tendency (production type) different from the specific high expectation effect. By executing the acquisition effect and acquiring a specific high expectation effect (for example, a gold hold change effect) with a high jackpot expectation, it becomes a scenario that develops into a stronger development. Here, the first reward acquisition effect is originally designed to be an unexpected effect that overturns the weak development up to that point into a strong development. On the other hand, if you stick to the royal production too much, you will not be able to perform the first reward acquisition production with a strong development, or if you perform the first reward acquisition production with a strong development, you have to make all the productions of Gase. Therefore, there is a problem that the subsequent development may be preempted by the player. Therefore, a royal staging pattern that overturns a weak development (for example, as described above, a pattern that creates a staging with the same staging tendency (directing type) such as a hold change staging, or a staging tendency different from a specific high expectation staging. In addition to the low-expectation effect of (effect type), the pattern that executes the specific high-expectation effect first, the effect pattern that develops from a strong development to a stronger development (for example, as described above). , A pattern that creates an effect with the same effect tendency (effect type) such as a hold change effect, or a low expectation effect with a different effect tendency (effect type) that is different from the specific high expectation effect. A pattern for executing high-expectation production) is also prepared, and the specifications are such that the player can win the reward that he / she feels hot at that time regardless of the production development up to that point. That is, by providing not only the sub-variation pattern P1 but also the sub-variation pattern P2, the tendency of the staging when developing into a strong development is different depending on which of the sub-variation patterns P1 and P2 is selected. (For example, when the main fluctuation pattern PH1-14 is selected and it is determined to execute the first reward acquisition effect, the ratio of the sub fluctuation pattern P1 and the sub fluctuation pattern P2 being selected is set to 3: 1. If you do so, 75% of the patterns will execute the production of SP Reach A to C and the pseudo-ream 3 times with the royal production pattern that overturns the weak development, and the pseudo-ream with the production pattern that develops from the strong development to the stronger development. The pattern of executing the effects of 3 times and SP reach A to C can be set to 25%, and 1 in 4 times of the pseudo-ream 3 times and the effect pattern in which SP reach A to C and the 1st reward acquisition effect are executed. The times can be a staging pattern that develops from a strong development to a stronger development).

Subsequently, the flow of the first reward acquisition effect will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The first reward acquisition effect is composed of an introduction effect, a reward display effect, a button effect, and a result notification effect. In the figure (A), the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the first half of the pseudo-variation, and in the figure (B), the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the second half of the pseudo-variation. In the figure (C), the case where the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is SP reach A (character reach) is shown.

The introduction effect is an effect of the introduction part performed at the start of the first reward acquisition effect. In this introduction effect, the characters "win the reward" are displayed on the screen to notify the player that the first reward acquisition effect is about to begin. The types of introduction effects include a first introduction effect in which the characters "win the reward" are displayed in white and a second introduction effect in which the characters "win the reward" are displayed in red. The second introduction effect is a chance-up effect with a higher expectation of reward acquisition than the first introduction effect.

The reward display effect is an effect of displaying the reward information (type of specific high expectation effect) to be acquired in the first reward acquisition effect on the screen and presenting the reward to the player in advance. .. Whether or not the presented reward can be obtained (whether or not the presented specific high expectation effect is executed) will be clarified by the result notification effect after the next button effect.

The button effect is an effect that instructs the player to operate the effect button 15 and encourages whether or not the reward can be obtained by the button operation. The types of button effects include a button blow effect in which the effect progresses only by operating the effect button 15 once (one operation), and a button repeated hit effect in which the effect does not progress unless the effect button 15 is operated multiple times. .. The button repeated hitting effect is executed in response to the first introduction effect, and the button blow effect is executed in response to the second introduction effect (chance up effect). Therefore, as the button effect, the expectation of obtaining a reward is higher when the button blow effect is executed than when the button repeated hit effect is executed.

The result notification effect is an effect of notifying the effect result (success / failure) of the first reward acquisition effect. As a result, there are two types of notification effects: a success notification effect that notifies that the reward has been successfully acquired, and a failure notification effect that notifies that the reward acquisition has failed.

When the result notification effect is a success notification effect, a specific high expectation effect corresponding to the reward is generated until the reward presented in advance is successfully acquired and the variation display is completed. Becomes deterministic. The timing at which the specific high-expectation effect appears may differ depending on the type of the specific high-expectation effect. For example, when the specific high expectation effect is a red hold change effect and a gold hold change effect, this specific high expectation effect occurs immediately after the result is notified by the success notification effect. In addition, if the specific high expectation production is 7 tempai production, parts charge MAX, END reach, and next notice production, this specific high will be waited for a predetermined time after the result is notified by the success notification production. Expectation production occurs. At this time, when the specific high-expectation effect is END reach, the waiting time from the notification of the result in the success notification effect to the occurrence of END reach becomes long. An icon indicating that a specific high expectation effect (END reach) is scheduled to occur is displayed on the screen, that is, it is stocked as advance notice information indicating that an END reach will occur later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, the game development after the success notification effect is performed differs depending on the execution timing when the first reward acquisition effect is performed. First, when the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the first half of the pseudo-variation, the decorative symbol is tempted (the decorative symbol is in the reach state) or the pseudo-continuous continuous effect is performed after the success notification effect is completed. It will be executed. The pseudo-continuous continuous effect is, for example, an effect in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed to suggest that the pseudo-variation continues (the next pseudo-variation is performed). In addition, if the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is in the latter half of the pseudo-variation, the effect at the start of the pseudo-variation when the next pseudo-variation is started after the end of the success notification effect, or the character reach development effect. Will be executed. The character reach development effect is an effect of notifying that the character reach (SP reach A) is developed after the normal reach. Further, when the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is SP reach A, the character reach continuation effect is executed after the success notification effect ends. The character reach continuation effect is an effect that notifies that the character reach (SP reach A) will continue.

On the other hand, when the result notification effect is a failure notification effect, the variation display is immediately terminated and becomes "missing" after the failure notification effect is completed, without depending on the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect. As a modification, even if the result notification effect becomes a failure notification effect, only the specific high expectation effect is not executed, and then a new pseudo-variation is performed, or any of SP reach A to C is performed. It may develop into a big hit in the end. As another modification, even if the result notification effect becomes a failure notification effect, the first reward acquisition effect is performed again after that, or the specific high expectation level is obtained without going through the first reward acquisition effect. The production may be executed, and then a new pseudo-variation may be performed, or the player may develop into any of SP reach A to C, and finally become a big hit.

In the third embodiment, the first reward acquisition effect is configured as an effect performed during the execution of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the first reward acquisition effect is a jackpot game. It may be configured as an effect performed during the execution of. As an application example of this modification, for example, the above-mentioned premier re-lottery effect (big hit type determination effect) performed during the big hit start demonstration is applied as the first reward acquisition effect, and information suggesting the big hit type as a reward for the player. It is preferable to present (super longevity bonus) in advance and to win this reward (super longevity bonus) by operating a button by the player. When applied to the above-mentioned premier re-lottery effect, it is preferable to derive only the success notification effect that confirms that the reward (super longevity bonus) has been obtained as the result notification effect of the first reward acquisition effect. Is.

<Second reward acquisition production>
Next, the second reward acquisition effect will be described. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second reward acquisition effect. The second reward acquisition effect is an effect of notifying in advance that a specific advance notice effect will occur as a reward given to the player during the execution of the variable display. This second reward acquisition effect can be executed in the variable display when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), and suddenly enters from the start of the variable display. Hereinafter, the specific advance notice effect that is the target of the reward in the second reward acquisition effect is also referred to as "specific advance notice effect".

The second reward acquisition effect is executed in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream three times among the plurality of types of variation patterns described above. That is, in the present embodiment, whether or not the second reward acquisition effect can be executed is determined by the advance notice lottery process only when the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream three times is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. At this time, the second reward acquisition effect is executed by using the time scale from the start of the pseudo 1 variation display to the end of the pseudo 2 variation display among the three pseudo variation displays. That is, the second reward acquisition effect is started at the start of the pseudo 1 variation display, and the second reward acquisition effect ends at the end of the pseudo 2 variation display. However, the second reward acquisition effect only uses the time scale from pseudo 1 variation to pseudo 2 variation, and during that period, the pseudo variation of the decorative pattern (pseudo 1 variation to pseudo 2 variation) is actually used. Is not performed, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner as a small symbol toward the edge of the screen. Then, after the second reward acquisition effect is completed (after the time scale from the pseudo 1 variation to the pseudo 2 variation has elapsed), the pseudo 3 variation (residual pseudo continuous effect) is started. That is, even if the fluctuation pattern of three pseudo-reams is selected, when this second reward acquisition effect is performed, only the pseudo-three fluctuations are actually performed as the pseudo-ream effect, and the pseudo-series changes are ~. The period up to the pseudo 2 fluctuation is used only as a time scale for the second reward acquisition effect. When the pseudo-three variation display is started after the second reward acquisition effect is completed, an image (for example, "x3") for notifying the number of pseudo-reams (number of executions of the pseudo-ream) in this pseudo-three variation display. ”) Is displayed, and a pseudo-continuous number notification effect is executed. Here, when the pseudo-three variation display is performed without executing the second reward acquisition effect, the pseudo-ream number notification effect that displays an image for notifying the pseudo-ream number (the number of executions of the pseudo-ream) is performed in the pseudo-one variation display. In the pseudo-2 variation display, the pseudo-ream number notification effect that displays an image (for example, "x2") that notifies the pseudo-ream number (the number of executions of the pseudo-ream) is executed, and the pseudo-ream number notification effect is also executed. A pseudo-ream number notification effect that displays an image (for example, "x3") that notifies the pseudo-ream number (number of executions of the pseudo-ream) is executed.

FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram showing a reward pattern table. In this reward pattern table, the type of the specific advance notice effect and the effect type of the specific advance notice effect are defined. The types of specific advance notice effects include blue hold change effect, green hold change effect, red hold change effect, gold hold change effect, rainbow hold change effect, green frame advance notice effect, red frame advance notice effect, gold frame advance notice effect, timer advance notice. Production, roulette notice production, parts charge x 2, parts charge x 4, parts charge MAX, green logo notice production, red logo notice production, gold logo notice production, special zone production, hit confirmation notice production (what is rainbow hold change production? It is a different production, for example, a giraffe production in which a lot of animal giraffes are displayed). Each specific notice effect is basically a notice effect scheduled to be performed during the execution of the variable display. That is, the specific notice effect defined in the scenario of the variable effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) is the target or candidate for the reward.

Here, the contents of the specific advance notice effect that is the target of the reward will be described in order. It should be noted that a part of the specific advance notice effect overlaps with a part of the above-mentioned specific high expectation effect, but it will be described again for ease of understanding. The blue hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image (the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720) changes to blue. The green hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to green. The red hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to red. The gold-holding change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to gold. The rainbow hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to a rainbow color. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is increased by one step in the order of blue hold change effect <green hold change effect <red hold change effect <gold hold change effect <rainbow hold change effect. The rainbow hold change production is a premier production with a big hit confirmed. The green frame notice effect is an effect that cuts in the image surrounded by the green frame (green frame). The red frame notice effect is an effect that cuts in the image surrounded by the red frame (red frame). The gold frame notice effect is an effect of cutting in an image surrounded by a gold frame (golden frame). In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is increased by one step in the order of green frame notice effect <red frame notice effect <gold frame advance notice effect. The timer advance notice effect is an effect of counting down the remaining time until a predetermined advance notice effect (high expectation effect, for example, SP reach C, next notice effect, etc.) is started in the variable display. In the roulette notice effect, an image imitating a roulette is rotated and displayed, and one of a plurality of options is derived as an effect result according to the stop position of the roulette (suggesting or notifying the subsequent development of the game). ) It is a production (for example, it is a production that displays the options of "SP reach C", "next notice production", and "Kirin production", selects one of them, and then configures the selected production to be executed. ). As described above, each part charge effect is an effect in which it is confirmed that the player will develop into a high-expectation reach by acquiring all seven parts. The parts charge x 2 is an effect of acquiring two parts out of all the parts. Parts charge x 4 is an effect of acquiring 4 parts out of all parts. Parts charge MAX is a production to acquire all parts (7 parts). Therefore, when the parts charge MAX is executed, all the parts are gathered at once, so it is confirmed that it will develop into a high expectation reach, but even if the parts charge × 2 and the parts charge × 4 are executed, other parts If you do not acquire the remaining parts in the parts charge production, it is not certain that it will develop into a high expectation reach. The green logo notice production is a production in which the logo character emits green light. The red logo notice production is a production in which the logo character emits red light. The gold logo notice production is a production in which the logo character emits gold. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is increased by one step in the order of green logo notice effect <red logo notice effect <gold logo notice effect. The hit confirmation notice production is a premier production that makes a so-called one-shot notification that notifies the jackpot confirmation in advance. As described above, the second reward acquisition effect is an effect performed by using the time scale from the pseudo 1 variation display to the pseudo 2 variation display in the variation display of the pseudo sequence 3 times. The advance notice effect that suggests that it will occur (pseudo-variation display is performed) cannot be the target of the reward.

As shown in FIG. 83, the second reward acquisition effect is composed of an introduction fanning effect, an introduction effect, and a main part effect. In the present embodiment, the second reward acquisition effect is suddenly entered from the start of the variable display, and the introduction fanning effect is started.

The introductory fanning effect is an introductory effect that incites whether or not the introductory effect is started. If this introductory staging is successful, the introductory staging will be performed and the main story will be directed. On the other hand, if the introductory fanning effect fails, the second reward acquisition effect ends without the introductory effect and the main part effect. In other words, if the introduction fanning effect is successful, the main fluctuation pattern that can execute the pseudo 3 variation display is selected, and if the introduction fanning effect fails, the normal variation or pseudo 1 fanning (failure) is performed. This means that a feasible main variation pattern has been selected.

The introduction effect is an effect that is an introduction part of the transition to the main part effect, for example, displaying a message "What is the reward this time?" To notify that the second reward acquisition effect has started.

The main story production includes an operation instruction production, a treasure box appearance production, and a treasure box opening production, and the production progresses in the order of operation instruction production → treasure box appearance production → treasure box opening production. This main story production is a production content in which a reward is obtained by opening a treasure box that appears by a button operation by a player.

The operation instruction effect is an effect of instructing the player to operate the effect button 15. During the execution of this operation instruction effect, an operation valid period during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid is set. During the operation valid period, an image imitating the effect button 15 is displayed on the screen, and a notification is given to prompt the operation input of the effect button 15 or that the operation of the effect button 15 is effective.

The treasure box appearance effect is an effect in which a plurality of (5) treasure boxes appear on the screen when the effect button 15 is operated by the player during the operation valid period. There are two types of treasure chests: normal treasure chests with normal decoration and special treasure chests with special decoration. In the present embodiment, the special treasure chest is set to have a higher possibility of the appearance of the specific advance notice effect (reward having a high advantage for the player) with a high expectation of big hit than the normal treasure chest.

The treasure chest opening effect is an effect of opening five treasure boxes in order to reveal the contents of each treasure box. When the treasure box is opened by this treasure box opening effect, an icon image (referred to as a "reward icon") indicating the type of reward (specific notice effect) appears from the treasure box. In this embodiment, one reward (reward icon) appears from one treasure chest, and finally, five rewards (specific notice effect) corresponding to a total of five treasure chests can be obtained. There is.

FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram showing a reward combination pattern table. In the reward combination pattern table, a total of 42 types of reward combination patterns are defined. The reward combination pattern is an effect pattern that defines a combination mode of five rewards (first to fifth rewards) selected from a total of 18 rewards. That is, this reward combination pattern defines the first reward, the second reward, the third reward, the fourth reward, and the fifth reward. The vertical column in the figure shows the reward combination pattern number, and the horizontal column in the figure shows the first reward (specific notice effect) and the second reward (specific notice effect) in order from the left. ), The third reward (specific notice effect), the fourth reward (specific notice effect), and the fifth reward (specific notice effect). For example, in the reward combination pattern 1, the first reward is "blue hold change effect", the second reward is "parts charge MAX", the third reward is "red frame notice effect", and the fourth reward. As a reward for, "green hold change production" and as a fifth reward, "red logo notice production" are set.

For the first to fifth rewards in the reward combination pattern, five specific advance notice effects having different display modes (display contents) are defined. That is, each reward combination pattern is composed of at least a combination of five specific advance notice effects having different display modes. However, the first to fifth rewards may include a plurality of specific advance notice effects belonging to the same effect type (effect category). That is, two or more rewards out of a total of five rewards may be a specific advance notice production of the same system belonging to the same production type. Here, the same effect type refers to one in which the basic components or main components of the effect are common or similar, but some of the components or their display modes are different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the blue hold change effect, the green hold change effect, the red hold change effect, the gold hold change effect, and the rainbow hold change effect belong to the same effect type (hold change effect), and the green frame. The advance notice effect, the red frame advance notice effect, and the gold frame advance notice effect belong to the same effect type (frame advance notice effect), and the parts charge x 2, parts charge x 4, and parts charge MAX belong to the same effect type (parts charge effect), and are green. The logo notice production, the red logo notice production, and the gold logo notice production belong to the same production type (logo notice production).

Here, when a plurality of specific advance notice effects of the same effect type are included in one reward combination pattern, the faster the specific advance notice effect of a relatively low rank (specific advance notice effect with a relatively low expectation of big hit). While the reward is opened at the timing, the higher the rank of the specific advance notice effect (the specific rehearsal effect with a relatively high expectation of big hit), the later the reward is opened. That is, when five rewards in one reward combination pattern are opened one after another, and the reward includes a plurality of specific advance notice effects belonging to the same effect type, the plurality of specific advance notice effects are the rewards. It does not go down (rank down) in the order of opening, but always goes up (rank up) in the order of opening the reward. For example, if the 4th reward and the 5th reward are the same type of specific rehearsal effect (for example, a hold change effect), and the 4th reward is a red hold change effect, 5 The individual reward will be a gold hold change effect or a rainbow hold change effect.

In addition, the specific advance notice effect (rainbow hold change effect, hit confirmation advance notice effect) of one notification that the big hit is confirmed is always set as the fifth reward (the reward that is opened last). The reason is that when a specific notice effect of one announcement appears as the first to fourth rewards, it is certain that a big hit will be made at that point, so the remaining rewards will be practically wasted (remaining). There is no point in opening the treasure chest), which can be a factor in boosting the effect of the production.

Also, in the figure, in order to distinguish between the above-mentioned normal treasure chest and special treasure chest, the reward that appears from the special treasure chest is marked with a star "☆", and the reward that appears from the normal treasure chest is marked with a star. "☆" is not attached. Of the five treasure chests assigned to each reward combination pattern, at least one treasure chest is a special treasure chest, and the remaining treasure chests are normal treasure chests. As a modification of the present embodiment, when the number of special treasure chests appearing exceeds a predetermined number, the specification may be such that the appearance of the specific advance notice effect of the predetermined expected degree or more is confirmed. For example, when there are two or more special treasure chests, it is confirmed that one specific notice effect which is a golden display mode appears, and when there are three or more special treasure chests, there are three specific notice effects which are a gold display mode. When it is confirmed that more than one will appear and the number of special treasure chests reaches 5, the jackpot will be confirmed regardless of the content of the reward, and the expectation of jackpot will be indirectly suggested or notified according to the number of special treasure chests appearing. It may be configured to do so.

FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the second reward acquisition effect (main part effect). In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the reward (reward icon) appearing from the treasure box moves to the upper area on the screen and stays in the upper area until the specific notice effect corresponding to the reward icon is executed. Be stocked. In this embodiment, the case where the reward combination pattern 30 (see FIG. 85) is selected is illustrated. In this reward combination pattern 30, as five rewards (specific notice effect), a blue hold change effect, a parts charge MAX, a red frame notice effect, a gold hold change effect, and a gold logo notice effect are set.

As shown in (A) in the figure, when the main story production is started (when the production button is operated within the operation valid period), five treasure chests are displayed on the screen. A total of five treasure chests will be opened one by one from left to right. In the figure, the 1st to 3rd and 5th treasure chests show normal treasure chests, and the 4th treasure chest shows special treasure chests.

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the first treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the characters "blue hold" appears, and the blue hold change effect is acquired as the first reward. You will be notified that you have done so.

As shown in (C) in the figure, when the second treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the characters "Parts MAX" appears, and the parts charge MAX is acquired as the second reward. Is notified.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the third treasure chest (normal treasure chest) is opened, a reward icon with the letters "red frame" appears and a red frame appears as the third reward. It is notified that the notice production has been acquired.

As shown in (E) in the figure, when the fourth treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the characters "gold hold" appears, and the gold hold change effect is acquired as the fourth reward. You will be notified that you have done so. By overlapping the fourth "gold hold" reward icon with the first "blue hold" reward icon, the "blue hold" reward icon is updated (overwritten) with the "gold hold" reward icon. ) It looks as if it was done. In other words, when a specific notice effect (gold hold change effect) that belongs to the same effect type as the specific notice effect (blue hold change effect) that has already appeared appears, the specific notice effect that has already appeared (blue hold change effect) By overlapping the reward icon (low rank icon) corresponding to the reward icon (high rank icon) corresponding to the specific notice effect (gold hold change effect) that appeared this time, the reward icon is overwritten and displayed.

As shown in (F) in the figure, when the fifth treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the letters "gold logo" appears, and the gold logo notice effect is obtained as the fifth reward. You will be notified that you have done so. The plurality of reward icons on the screen are displayed in a stocked state until the specific advance notice effect corresponding to each reward icon is generated. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of the specific advance notice effect to be executed from now on. Then, each time the specific advance notice effect is executed, the reward icon corresponding to the specific notice effect is deleted one by one (all the reward icons are deleted at the end of the variation display). When executing the second reward acquisition effect, as described above, the decorative symbol is displayed as a small symbol (that is, the display size is changed and displayed), but the decorative symbol is hidden. In that case, a resident symbol that is always displayed (variable display and stop display) may be provided. This resident symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen, and is displayed in a variable manner while the special symbol is fluctuating, and is displayed as a stop while the special symbol is stopped. Similarly, the three symbols are variable display and stop display. By providing this resident symbol, a situation where you want to make the decorative symbol smaller or hide it (for example, when executing the second reward acquisition effect, when executing the SP reach, the effect by the character character character is performed on the screen. Even if the center of the box is hidden, it is possible to notify that the game is changing (in other words, the result of winning or failing is not confirmed). That is, it can be said that this resident symbol is a symbol for display collateral (to compensate for the display state of the decorative symbol). When this resident symbol is variablely displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop display, that is, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle (for example, pseudo). When executing a continuous effect, it is preferable to configure the resident symbol so that it will not be temporarily stopped even if it is a special decorative symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT"). Yes (Therefore, for the resident symbol, there is no special symbol that displays characters such as "NEXT"), and if it is a missed fluctuation, it is a jackpot fluctuation so as to prevent misunderstanding that it is a jackpot. Is displayed in a variable manner while maintaining a combination of symbols indicating a miss to the player regardless of whether the fluctuation is a missed fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation so that it is not detected in advance as a big hit (for example, "1.2".・ 3 ”→“ 2 ・ 3 ・ 4 ”→“ 3 ・ 4 ・ 5 ”→“ 4 ・ 5 ・ 6 ”→“ 5 ・ 6 ・ 7 ”→“ 6 ・ 7 ・ 1 ”→“ 7 ・ 1 ・ 2 "→" 1 ・ 2 ・ 3 "→ ...) is preferable. In addition to this, the resident symbol can be clearly differentiated from the decorative symbol by having the following characteristics.
(1) The display area of the decorative symbol that is easy for the player to recognize is larger than the display area of the resident symbol (to compensate the display state of the decorative symbol) for display security. This is a situation where the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are fixed and stopped, the decorative symbol is immediately after forming the reach state (the reach state when it has not developed to SP reach), and the resident symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Not limited to this, it is preferable to configure in this way even in a situation where the decorative symbol is a small symbol during SP reach or the like and the resident symbol is in a variable display.
(2) Whether the display position of the decorative symbol is in the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or in the second effect mode (for example, stage B in the rush mode or the normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the display position, it is possible to realize a variety of productions with decorative patterns according to the production mode. On the other hand, since the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, an extra development design is required as the same display position regardless of whether it is in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable not to do so.
(3) Whether the display mode of the decorative symbol is the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or the second effect mode (for example, the rush mode or the stage B in the normal mode). By setting different display modes according to the display mode, it is possible to realize a variety of productions with decorative patterns according to the production mode. For example, in the first staging mode, a decorative symbol is composed only of numerical decorative symbols (decorative symbols such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second staging mode, numerical decorative symbols and allies. A decorative symbol is constructed by combining the decorative symbol of the character (decorative symbol such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, only the same display mode, for example, the decoration of numbers, regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable to configure the resident symbol only with the symbol and to avoid unnecessary development design.
(4) The display area of the decorative symbol can be changed (moved, made into a small symbol) according to the fluctuation status (for example, whether or not it is in normal reach, whether or not it is in SP reach, etc.). It is possible to add variety to the production of decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the display area of the resident symbol is not variable (does not move or is not a small symbol), and no extra development design is performed. It is preferable to finish.
(5) The fluctuating speed of the decorative design can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc. according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether it is at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, or just before the end of fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to give variety to the production of decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation speed of the resident symbol does not change, or the variable step is reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). It is preferable not to carry out extra development design. Also, regarding the direction of fluctuation, the decorative symbol allows not only the fluctuation from top to bottom but also the fluctuation from bottom to top (it enables fluctuation in multiple directions), while the resident symbol allows fluctuation from top to bottom. It is preferable to make only the fluctuation to.
(6) The decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped during the change of the special symbol) before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the special symbol is stopped), and is a temporary stop accompanied by a slight shaking fluctuation. ), And at that time, by temporarily stopping a specific symbol that is a decorative symbol other than numbers (for example, a decorative symbol with the letters "super" that announces the development to SP reach), the effect of the decorative symbol is produced. And other productions can be related. On the other hand, since the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, the resident symbol is neither temporarily stopped nor the specific symbol is temporarily stopped, and no extra development design is performed. It is preferable to finish with.
(7) The decorative design overlaps with the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effect, SU (step-up) notice effect, etc.), that is, superimposed display is performed. In order to create a powerful effect by using the area on the screen as much as possible, such superimposed display is allowed, but for the resident symbol, the resident symbol is displayed because it plays a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol. It is desirable to design the area so that it does not overlap with the display area of the other notice effect (does not overlap and display). However, regarding the relationship with the special notice effect that is inevitably duplicated (for example, the group notice effect displayed on the entire screen, the background notice effect, etc.), the display priority of the resident symbol is set to the special notice effect. It is preferable to set it higher than the display priority (set the resident symbol to be displayed in front of the special notice effect). Further, the right-handed notification image (unlike the image displayed during the special game, the right-handed notification image dedicated to the high-base state displayed during the high-base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game. ), Since it is desirable that the player can always see it, it is desirable to design so that the display area of the resident symbol and the display area of the right-handed notification image do not overlap (do not overlap and display). However, when the display area of the decorative symbol is moved or enlarged, the display area of the decorative symbol and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimpose display). In that case, It is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative symbol to be lower than the display priority of the right-handed notification image (set the decorative symbol to be displayed on the rear surface of the right-handed notification image).
(8) During the special game, the decorative symbols may be displayed as only one, not as a combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "7, 7, 7" has been confirmed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and "2, 2, 2" has been confirmed and stopped, and then special. When the game is executed, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which decorative pattern was used to make a big hit during the special game. As a modification, a decorative pattern corresponding to a jackpot with a high degree of advantage (for example, "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7.7" indicating that the jackpot is 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R.・ 7 ”etc.) may be displayed during the special game. The display area for displaying one decorative symbol displayed during the special game is the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative number of prize balls, which are other display areas during the special game. It is desirable that the display area does not overlap, that is, the display area is not superimposed (however, the highlighting may be superimposed, and in that case, the highlighting has a higher display priority). Further, the resident symbol is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game, and is configured as such. In this case, it is desirable that the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball number display area, which are other display areas during the special game, do not overlap, that is, they are not superimposed. It is desirable not to overlay the highlighting.
(9) In the decorative design, in addition to the fluctuation (for example, movement from top to bottom), a predetermined operation is accompanied at the start of the fluctuation, immediately after the temporary stop, after the reach is established, during the temporary stop, and the like. Display may be performed (operations in each situation may be referred to as fluctuation start operation, temporary stop operation, reach establishment operation, and shaking operation). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are displayed as "6, 2, 4" at the time of confirmation stop), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the decorative symbol After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "6" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and after "4" temporarily stops, it continues the shaking motion, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it bounces. After performing the above movements, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking movement, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated. In this case, the resident symbol does not perform any operation. In addition, in the case of normal reach (when the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are displayed as "2.1.2" at the time of confirmation stop), at the start of fluctuation, all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the decorative symbol. Starts to fluctuate after performing an operation that expands, and then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "2" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, the swinging motion is continued after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left symbol is used to notify that it is reach. The right symbol rotates and then continues the swaying motion again. After that, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then "1" temporarily stops and sways a little. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are ended (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the resident symbol does not perform any operation. In addition, in the case of SP reach (when the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are displayed as "2.3.2" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the decorative symbol After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then continues the shaking operation after "2" temporarily stops. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then continues the swinging motion after the "2" temporarily stops, and then the left symbol to notify that it is reach. After the right symbol rotates, the swaying motion is continued again, and then the middle symbol fluctuates while the left and right symbols are swaying (at this time, the middle symbol is enlarged). It fluctuates from top to bottom in the state, and the overlapping or overlapping ratio is high for the left and right symbols that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio until then), and then SP reach It shifts from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the effect, and when it is notified by the SP reach effect that it is the result of the deviation, it shifts from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, the left symbol and the middle symbol , The right symbol continues to sway for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the resident symbol does not perform any operation. With this configuration, it is possible to give variety to the production of decorative symbols, while the resident symbol only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol, so the resident symbol is particularly effective. It is preferable to configure the system so that the above is not performed and to avoid unnecessary development and design. Further, even between the time when the fluctuation is stopped and the time when the standby demo effect is displayed, the decorative symbol may be shaken after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the resident symbol does not operate at all. With this configuration, even when the game is waiting (the symbol is stopped), the motivation for the game can be stimulated, and the resident symbol does not swing, so that it is notified that the resident symbol is waiting for the game. Can be secured. In addition, when the standby demo effect is displayed, the decorative symbol is hidden, but it is preferable that the resident symbol continues to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the display of what kind of symbol is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo effect screen. However, if the standby demo is being produced, the resident symbol may be hidden because the game is not being performed. Further, among the decorative symbols, a specific symbol (for example, "7" of the middle symbol) may be configured so that the predetermined operation is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined operation is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined operation may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop operation (bounce-like operation) (particularly, regarding “7” of the middle symbol after the reach is established). With this configuration, the rarity of the movement in a specific symbol can be increased.

<Special button production>
Next, the special button effect will be described. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special button effect. In the special button effect, the effect button 15 is operated until the number of operations of the player operating the effect button 15 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (operable number of times) within a predetermined operation valid period. It is a production with the content of whether or not a predetermined premium production can be made to appear as an opportunity. This special button effect is executed when the game state is a probability change game state (high probability high base state) and the change display is a predetermined change display. The predetermined fluctuation display refers to a high expectation fluctuation display (referred to as “chance fluctuation display”) in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equal to or longer than the predetermined time or the jackpot expectation is equal to or higher than the predetermined expectation. In the present embodiment, the variation display of the SP reach performed in the probability variation game state corresponds to the chance variation display. Specifically, the variation display performed by selecting the SP reach variation pattern PH3-3, PH3-4, PA3-1, PA3-2 as the variation pattern of the probabilistic gaming state corresponds to the chance variation display. ..

As shown in FIG. 87, the special button effect includes a button appearance fanning effect, a button appearance effect, and an operation result notification effect.

The button appearance fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the button appearance fanning effect is started. In this button appearance fanning effect, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 15 is displayed in advance on the screen, and then a button image imitating the effect button 15 appears (that is, the button appearance effect is started). It will be a production that makes you expect. In this button appearance fanning effect, when the silhouette image of the effect button 15 gradually changes to the button image, the fanning success effect is achieved. On the other hand, in this button appearance fanning effect, if the silhouette image of the effect button 15 fades out from the screen, the fanning failure effect occurs.

The button appearance effect is an effect of causing a button image imitating the effect button 15 to appear on the screen and instructing the player to operate the effect button 15. Further, in this button appearance effect, the number of operations that can be performed, which is the upper limit of the number of times that the operation of the effect button 15 can be effectively accepted within the operation valid period, is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the effect button 15 can be effectively operated within the operation valid period up to the number of operations that can be performed displayed on the screen. The number of times the effect button 15 can be operated is determined based on the button number setting table described later. The number of operations that can be performed displayed on the screen is updated (subtracted) each time the effect button 15 is operated by the player.

The operation result notification effect is an effect performed each time the effect button 15 is operated once (single operation), and basically, it can be executed as many times as the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. For example, when the effect button 15 can be operated 10 times, the operation result notification effect is performed only 10 times on condition that the effect button 15 is operated 10 times by the player within the operation valid period. It is said. That is, with the number of operations that can be performed as the upper limit, each time the effect button 15 is operated, one operation result notification effect is performed in cooperation with the effect button 15. However, as an exception to this, the special button effect may end before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations that can be performed, which will be described later.

The types of operation result notification effects include a success notification effect (also referred to as a "hit confirmation effect") as a premier effect that deterministically notifies that a big hit has been won in the variation display, and a big hit in the variation display. There is a failure notification effect that notifies that it is uncertain whether or not the player has won (that is, just because the failure notification effect is performed does not mean that the big hit is denied). The success notification effect (hit confirmation effect) is a one-shot notification effect that displays an image (big hit confirmation image) for notifying the jackpot confirmation and outputs a voice (big hit confirmation sound) when the effect button 15 is operated. Is. The failure notification effect is an effect that does not display an image (big hit confirmation image) for notifying the jackpot confirmation or output a voice (big hit confirmation sound) even if the effect button 15 is operated.

Here, FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing a button count setting table. In this button number setting table, the correspondence relationship between the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated, the execution rate of the winning confirmation effect, and the selection rate of the number of operations is defined. In the button count setting table, the columns to be referred to differ depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol. In the figure, the "selection rate" is shown for convenience, but in reality, the number of judgments for determining the number of operations that can be performed according to the acquired lottery random number value (range of lottery random number values). ) Is set, and the number of operations that can be performed is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to.

As shown in FIG. 88, the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated is set in the range of 5 to 100 times, and any one of them is determined by lottery. In this embodiment, the larger the number of operations that can be performed, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. The appearance rate of the hit confirmation effect is the probability that the operation result notification effect is selected as the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect). The appearance rate of the hit confirmation effect can vary depending on the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated and the result (win) of the hit / fail determination. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the effect button 15 is defined on the condition that the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect) does not occur until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches at least the number of operations. The maximum number of times that the player can actually operate the effect button 15 (the maximum number of times that the player can effectively accept the operation of the effect button 15). The above upper limit number (false upper limit number) may be set, and internally, the number of times smaller than the operationable number displayed on the screen may be set as the actual upper limit number number (true upper limit number). In this modification, when a big hit is announced in the special button effect, the number of operations of the effect button 15 is before the number of operations (the false upper limit) displayed on the screen is reached (the number of operations). (Before the remaining number display becomes "0"), the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect) appears, and after that, the operation of the effect button 15 becomes invalid.

(Execution rate at the time of big hit)
First, when the result of the hit / fail judgment corresponds to "big hit", whether or not the hit confirmation effect can be executed is determined based on the execution rate (execution rate in the figure) set according to the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. Will be done. Specifically, when the number of operations is 5 to 9, the execution rate of "1 / number of operations" is, and when the number of operations is 10 to 15, "1 / (number of operations-2)". Execution rate, when the number of operations is 16 to 19, "1 / (number of operations-4)", when the number of operations is 20 to 25, "1 / (number of operations-6)" The hit confirmation effect is executed at the execution rate of. When the number of operations is 100, the execution rate of "number of operations / number of operations" (execution rate of 100/100), that is, the winning confirmation effect is executed with a probability of 100%. The execution rate of this hit confirmation effect is set to the same probability for each operation for the number of operations that can be performed. For example, when the number of operations that can be performed is 5, the winning confirmation effect can be executed at an execution rate of "1/5 (= 1 / the number of operations that can be performed)" for each of the five operations. Further, when the number of operations that can be performed is 100 (also referred to as "special number"), the winning confirmation effect is executed with a probability of "100%" for each of the 100 operations (that is,). The hit confirmation effect is always executed in the first operation).

(Execution rate at the time of disconnection)
On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination corresponds to "missing", the execution rate of the winning confirmation effect is set to "0" regardless of the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. That is, when the variation display is out of alignment, the hit confirmation effect is not executed as the operation result notification effect, and only the failure notification effect is executed. The reason is that if the hit confirmation effect occurs when the variation display is off, there will be a discrepancy between the result of the hit / fail determination and the effect result of the special button effect. Therefore, when the variation display corresponds to the deviation, the operable number (special number) of "100 times" at which the execution rate of the winning confirmation effect is 100% is not selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination is "missing", "7 times" is not selected as the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. That is, the operable number of "7 times" can be selected only when the fluctuation display becomes a big hit. That is, the number of operations that can be performed as "7 times" is the number of operations for confirming the big hit, and can be selected only when the result of the winning / failing determination is "big hit". As described above, in the present embodiment, when "7 times" is displayed as the number of operations that can be performed on the screen due to the number (character indicating high expectation) having a special meaning of "7", the effect is produced. Regardless of whether or not the winning confirmation effect appears triggered by the operation of the button 15, the big hit winning is confirmed when the number of operations that can be performed "7 times" is displayed.

If the hit confirmation effect appears before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations that can be performed, the operation of the effect button 15 for the remaining number of times is canceled and the special button effect ends. The reason is that there is little need to continue the production even though the player has already notified the desired production result (big hit winning), and the operation is troublesome for the player who knows the result. Because it becomes. However, when the number of operations that can be performed is a special number (100 times), as described above, in order to enjoy the hit confirmation effect (premier effect) for each operation for 100 times, the hit confirmation effect is performed in the first operation. Even if it is executed, the operation for the remaining number of times is not canceled, and basically all 100 operations are possible (that is, the hit confirmation effect can be executed up to 100 times in a row). ..

Further, when the final operation is performed when the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the operable number (upper limit number), if the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect) is not executed, the variation display is displayed. It may be configured to execute the final production that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. As an example of the final production, one of "subtle", "opportunity", and "extreme heat" is displayed when the final operation of the production button 15 is performed, and the fluctuation is performed. Is the expectation of a big hit on the display subtle (for example, the expectation of a big hit of about 10%), is it an opportunity (for example, is the expectation of a big hit of about 50%), or is it intense heat (for example, is it a big hit expectation of about 50%)? For example, it may be configured to suggest a jackpot expectation of about 80%). In the case of a big hit, a character suggesting that the big hit is confirmed (suggesting that the expectation is 100% big hit) is displayed, triggered by the final operation of the effect button 15. Alternatively, the final operation of the effect button 15 may be configured so that the execution rate of the hit confirmation effect is always "1/2".

Further, in the present embodiment, if the left and right keys (left and right key switches) of the cross key are operated at the same time during the execution of the special button effect, the lottery for the number of operations that can be performed is performed without triggering the operation of the effect button 15. (Multiple lottery) is performed one after another (for example, when the number of operations is 5 times, by operating the left and right keys at the same time, the lottery of "1/5" is performed 5 times at a time. Can receive). That is, when the left and right keys are pressed at the same time, the lottery for a plurality of times (the number of operations that can be performed) is digested at a time without going through the operation of the effect button 15, and the result is notified. ing. This is an effective trick for players who want to know the result immediately without requiring many operations.

Next, the characteristic action of the special button effect will be described. In the following, "the operation of the effect button 15 is possible" or "the operation of the effect button 15 is effective" means that when the effect button 15 is operated, the operation of the effect button 15 is effectively accepted by the effect control board 200. , Means that a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. The predetermined process corresponds to a process of operating result notification effect (processing such as performing a success notification effect or a failure notification effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 15).

First, when the variation display is an out-of-order variation display, the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (upper limit number of times). As described above, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the winning confirmation effect is not selected, and the operation of the effect button 15 may be canceled before the number of operations (upper limit number) is reached. Because there isn't.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display is a jackpot fluctuation display, (A) the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the operable number (upper limit number), and ( B) The operation of the effect button 15 may become impossible before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (upper limit number of times). Here, (A) until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (upper limit), the case where the operation becomes possible is before the number of operations reaches (up to one time before the upper limit). This is when the final production is never selected. Therefore, when the winning confirmation effect is executed (when the winning confirmation effect is selected in the final time) according to the selection result of the final round when the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the operable number, the winning confirmation effect Is never executed (when the winning confirmation effect is not selected even in the final round). On the other hand, (B) the case where the operation becomes impossible before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (upper limit) is before the number of operations reaches (up to one time before the upper limit). It is time for the final production to be elected. When the number of operations is the special number (100 times), the hit confirmation effect is executed like each time before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (special number). The operation of the effect button 15 is not interrupted (it is not canceled). However, when the left and right keys are pressed at the same time, it is possible to digest the operations of the effect button 15 for 100 times (or the remaining number of times) at one time.

In the above-mentioned special button effect, when the variation display is a big hit variation display, whether or not the hit confirmation effect can be executed for each operation of the effect button 15 is randomly determined by a predetermined lottery. The configuration is not limited to this, and one or a plurality of types of effect patterns may be provided for each operationable number of times of the effect button 15, and whether or not the final effect can be executed may be predetermined in the scenario of the effect pattern. .. For example, as an effect pattern in which the number of operations of the effect button 15 is a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (upper limit number). It has an effect pattern A and an effect pattern B in which the effect button 15 cannot be operated before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the operable number (upper limit number of times). Here, in the effect pattern A, the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations that can be performed. The effect pattern is such that the final effect is not executed. Therefore, the effect pattern A is divided into an effect pattern A1 in which the hit confirmation effect is executed in the final operation and an effect pattern A2 in which the hit confirmation effect is not executed even in the final operation. On the other hand, the effect pattern B hits before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations (up to one time before the upper limit) because the operation of the effect button 15 becomes impossible before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the number of operations. It is a staging pattern that defines that a definite staging is performed. As a further modification, in the case of a big hit, not only the number of operations that can be performed may be determined, but also the number of times the hit determination effect is to be executed may be determined in advance. In this configuration, the number of operations that can be performed is just the apparent number of times, and the number of operations that the hit confirmation effect is actually executed is the actual number of operations that can be performed. If it is decided not to execute, the number of operations that can be displayed is not the apparent number of operations but the actual number of operations (if it is a big hit, if it is decided not to execute the hit confirmation effect, the final effect button 15 is displayed. When the operation of the rounds is performed, the final round effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation display as described above may be executed). In the case of such a configuration, even if it is out of alignment, the final operation of the effect button 15 is used as an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation display as described above. It is preferable to perform the inning effect.

Further, as a modification of the special button effect, a predetermined effect may be executed in addition to the above-mentioned operation result notification effect each time the effect button 15 is operated. Similar to the operation result notification effect (success notification effect, failure notification effect), the predetermined effect is an effect performed each time the effect button 15 is operated once (single operation). That is, in this modification, each time the effect button 15 is operated, the cut-in effect and the operation result notification effect are executed once. In the predetermined effect, the predetermined cut-in image is interrupted and displayed immediately before the operation result notification effect is executed triggered by the operation of the effect button 15, and the hit is confirmed according to the display mode of the cut-in image. This is an effect (cut-in effect) that suggests or informs the degree of expectation of execution of the effect. There are three types of display modes for this cut-in image, for example, "default display", "chance display", and "super heat display", in the order of "default display" <"chance display" <"super heat display". The execution expectation of the hit confirmation effect increases step by step (for example, the jackpot expectation is 5% for "default display", the jackpot expectation is 20% for "chance display", and "super heat display". If so, the jackpot expectation is 50%, etc.). According to this modification, the synergistic effect of the operation result notification effect and the predetermined effect raises the expectation for each operation of the effect button 15, and it is possible to further improve the effect of the special button effect.

The main effects achieved in the third embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the third embodiment, the execution time of the big hit start demo is different depending on the combination mode (big hit result) of the decorative symbols indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment is the big hit, and the big hit start demo is By performing a re-lottery effect of the jackpot type that was conventionally performed when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped during the execution time, a re-lottery effect with abundant variations is realized while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns (variation time). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, it is presented in advance as a reward to the player that a high expectation effect is generated during the fluctuation display, and this reward is fueled by inciting whether or not this reward can be obtained. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for (occurrence of high expectation production), and at the same time, the tendency of the high expectation production that is the reward is different depending on the timing of presenting the reward in advance, and at that timing. Since it is possible to foretell the occurrence of an effective effect that the player feels hot, it is possible to balance the game development and the effect as well as the variety of the effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible. In addition, since the player can feel that he / she has won the reward (high expectation effect) by himself / herself by operating the button, it is possible to further enhance the player's satisfaction and achievement when the high expectation effect occurs. It becomes.

Further, according to the third embodiment, even if the combination mode (big hit result) of the decorative symbols finally stopped and displayed in the variable display of the big hit is the same, the type of effect to be passed through during the variable display is selected. By differentizing the profit mode given to the player according to the situation, the player's interest is attracted not only to the combination mode of the decorative symbols (big hit result) but also to the production content until the variable display is completed. In addition to being able to do this, the roles of the advance notice effect and reach effect performed during the variable display not only suggest the jackpot expectation (reliability), but also the jackpot in collaboration with the combination of decorative patterns (big hit result). It is also possible to play a role of differentiating the form of profit given at times, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the occurrence of two or more notice effects is notified in advance as a reward to the player by using the time scale from the pseudo 1 fluctuation display to the pseudo 2 fluctuation display in the fluctuation display, and then, after that, By generating each advance notice effect in order after shifting to the pseudo 3 variable display, the player is clearly instructed the reward suitable for the development situation from the pseudo 3 variable display to the reach development, and the relevant Despite being in the middle of the variable display, it will be possible to infer the overall jackpot expectation (reliability) considering before and after the reach development, and the flow and course of the production to be performed in the future. It becomes possible for the player to grasp in advance, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the upper limit number of times (the number of operations that can be performed) as the button effect to be executed when a predetermined variation display (high expectation variation display) is performed. By creating a situation in which it is not known at what timing the one-shot notification (winning confirmation effect) will occur, the monotonousness of the button operation will be eliminated and the player will not get bored with high randomness. It is possible to realize a game effect and increase the added value when the high expectation fluctuation display is performed, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the second embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described in order. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state (high probability low base state), as a result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, " The small hit RUSH, which is a game in which "small hits" occur frequently, is adopted.

<Board composition>
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment described above), the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 is mainly a first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21. , It is possible to enter any of the general winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. The large winning opening 54 of the fourth embodiment includes a specific area (probability variation operation area) 548 in which the entry of the game ball triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol, as in the third embodiment described above. It is also configured as a so-called V attacker. Since the configuration of the large winning opening 54 (V attacker) has already been described with reference to FIG. 64 in the third embodiment described above, duplicate description will be omitted here. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has flowed down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20.

<Number of prize balls>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening is "4" for the first starting port 51 and "4" for the second starting port 52. "1", general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and large winning openings 54 are set to "15". The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the fourth embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied.

<Judgment of success or failure>
The validity determination of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 above, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated in the gaming state (low probability state), the probability of a big hit is When it is set to "1/320" and the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability is set to "1/80". In addition, in the winning / failing judgment of the first special symbol, if the jackpot is not won, the game is uniquely missed. However, in the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, "1" Win a small hit with a high probability of "/1.1". The odds of a small hit are set to the same winning probability without depending on the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

As in the second embodiment described above, the result of the hit / fail judgment of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, and the variation of one of the special symbols is being displayed (variation of the jackpot). If the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol is made during (displaying), it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, but it is not possible to derive a small hit or a miss. Permissible. If a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly replaced with a miss from the jackpot.

<Big hit type>
Next, the jackpot type (breakdown of jackpots) of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the jackpot type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to this special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the fourth embodiment as well, as in the third embodiment described above, each jackpot type is roughly classified into a "conditional specific jackpot" and a "conditional normal jackpot".

FIG. 89A is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot symbol table, there are three types of jackpots (symbol group): 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B), and 6R conditional. Usually, a big hit (symbol group C) is set. Specifically, 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A) has a selection rate of 10%, 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B) has a selection rate of 40%, and 6R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group C). ) Is sorted with a selectivity of 50%.

FIG. 89B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group and a jackpot type are associated with a symbol random value per special symbol (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot symbol table, 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D) and 10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group). There is. Specifically, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D) is distributed with a selection rate of 50%, and the 10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E) is distributed with a selection rate of 50%.

Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "50%", and the selection rate of the conditional normal jackpot is set to "50%". It is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), in the lottery of the second special symbol, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "100%". That is, when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, it is definite that the conditional specific big hit is always won regardless of the big hit type. Therefore, there is a higher possibility of winning a conditional specific jackpot (equivalent to a probabilistic jackpot) when a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol than when a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. After the end of the special game, it will shift to an advantageous game state (high probability state).

Subsequently, the large winning opening operation pattern of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic view showing a large winning opening operation pattern table of the fourth embodiment. In the big winning opening operation pattern table, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round is defined for each big hit type. The opening modes of the large winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 are a long opening (long opening) in which the opening time is set to a relatively long time and a relatively long opening time according to the length of the opening time. It is distinguished from short opening (short opening) set in a short time. In the figure, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round, "L" means a long opening and "S" means a short opening. The long opening time of the large winning opening 54 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that a predetermined count number (full count) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. In the third embodiment, as the opening mode of the large winning opening 54, the short opening is not set in any round, and the long opening is set in all rounds. However, even if the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same by providing a short opening that shortens the opening time of the jackpot 54 to, for example, 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same jackpot game. , A configuration having a jackpot with a substantially different number of rounds in which a ball can be obtained (a jackpot with a substantially different number of rounds) may be adopted. On the other hand, the long opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 54 can pass through or easily pass through the specific area 548. Further, the short opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 0.05 seconds) in which the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 54 is set to be unable or difficult to pass through the specific area 548. The closing condition of the jackpot 54 in the jackpot game (the end condition of the jackpot game) is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls has entered the jackpot 54, or , The opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds” in this embodiment). The opening of the specific area 548 is synchronized with the opening of the large winning opening 54 (start of the first round) in either the long opening or the short opening. That is, the specific area 548 is opened at the same timing as the opening start timing of the large winning opening 54 in the first round, or at a timing one second after the opening start timing of the large winning opening 54 in the first round. .. Further, not limited to this, the specific area 548 may be opened when the ball is detected in the large winning opening 54, and the count number (for example, the specified number) smaller than the specified count number (maximum winning number) in one round may be opened. If the number of counts is 10, the specific area 548 may be opened by detecting the first count). In this configuration, if it is a conditional specific jackpot, the specific area 548 is opened long by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, and if it is a conditional normal jackpot, it is in the first round. It is preferable to short-open the specific area 548 by detecting the first count of the large winning opening 54.

In the fourth embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is applicable, the game state after the end of the special game is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the specific round of the special game. Whether or not to shift to a high probability state (probability variation game state or latent probability game state) is assigned. In the specific round, the movable member 545 in the large winning opening 54 opens and closes, and the specific area switch 547 becomes effective (the ball entry detection of the game ball into the specific area 548 becomes effective, that is, the game ball. Refers to a round in which the probability variation transition is determined by entering the specific area 548. This specific round is set to the first round (first round), which is common to all jackpot types. Hereinafter, for convenience, the fact that the game ball enters the specific area 548 during the execution of the specific round is also referred to as "V winning". As a modified example, when a spec (so-called normal probability variation gaming machine) that does not have a specific area 548 is adopted in the large winning opening 54, "conditional specific big hit" is "specific big hit" as the big hit type of this embodiment. Alternatively, it corresponds to a "probability change jackpot", and a "conditional normal jackpot" corresponds to a "normal jackpot" or a "non-probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 90, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" of the first special symbol, the jackpot game The specified number of rounds is 10, and the opening mode of the large winning opening 54 is long opening in all rounds. In addition, in any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)", the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific round (first round). Therefore, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the first special symbol "6R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group C)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening mode of the jackpot is long in all rounds. It will be open. In the case of "6R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group C)", the specific area 548 is short-opened in the specific round (first round), so that the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. Is virtually impossible or difficult.

If the jackpot type is the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10. In the rounds, the opening mode of the large winning opening 54 is long opening in all rounds. In addition, in any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)", the specific area 548 is opened for a long time in the specific round (first round). Therefore, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

Although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol corresponds to "small hit", the round game in which the large winning opening 54 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is executed only once. .. That is, the small hit game is distinguished from the big hit game composed of a plurality of round games in that it is composed of one round game. Further, the small hit game is distinguished from the big hit game, which is a special game that triggers the opening of the specific area 548, in that it is a special game that does not trigger the opening of the specific area 548. The closing condition of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game) is that a specified number of game balls (“10” in this embodiment) have entered the large winning opening 54. Or, the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“1.8 seconds” in this embodiment). Here, as a modification, the specific area 548 may be opened even in the small hit game, but it is preferable to control so that the ball does not change probabilistically even if the ball enters the specific area 548.

<Game state>
Subsequently, the gaming state of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, "normal game state", "time saving game state", "latent probability game state", and "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability variation state" or a "probability variation game state", and ( 2) The game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "incubation probability game state (incubation probability change game state)" or "incubation probability change state". Then, (3) the gaming state in which the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability variation function being activated is called the "time saving state" or the "time saving gaming state", and (4) ) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game. , In the game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 91 is a schematic view showing the game state setting table of the fourth embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) when the big hit is won. Is selectively set according to the game state of (C) whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 548 (whether or not the V prize has been won) during the execution of the jackpot game.
The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability variation operations) and the number of fluctuation times during which the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operates. It is set based on the number of shortening times (number of times of shortened operation time) and the number of times of electric support (number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated.

When the first special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific region 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Will be done. When the game shifts to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "130 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. If the game ball cannot actually be entered into the specific area 548 even though it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548, a big hit is won. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at that time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set.

When the first special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, it is possible or easy to put the game ball into the specific region 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. To. When shifting to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "130 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "130 times" are set. In addition, when it is possible or easy to put the game ball into the specific area 548, but the game ball cannot actually be put into the specific area 548, it is a big hit. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at the time of winning. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set.

If the "6R conditional normal jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, it becomes practically impossible or difficult to put the game ball into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, on the condition that the game ball could not be entered into the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a time-saving game state. Is set. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set. In addition, when it is practically impossible or difficult to put the game ball into the specific area 548, but the game ball can actually be put into the specific area 548. , The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "130 times", the variation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "130 times" are set.

When the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" is won, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific region 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548 without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Will be done. When the game shifts to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "130 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. If the game ball cannot actually be entered into the specific area 548 even though it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548, a big hit is won. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at the time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set.

When the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)" is won, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific region 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, the probability variation game state or the latent probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game on the condition that the game ball enters the specific area 548, but this jackpot The game state after the end of the game is selectively determined according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. That is, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the shortened gaming state, or the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent game. If it is in the state, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "130 times", the variation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "130 times" are set. On the other hand, when the game shifts to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "130 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "130 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. If the game ball cannot actually be entered into the specific area 548 even though it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548, a big hit is won. The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game without depending on the game state at that time. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can trigger the transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit does not trigger the transition of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round, which is the end condition of the game state (for example, the variation display of the 130th rotation of the probability variation game state or the latent probability game state, the time saving game Except for the change display of the 100th rotation of the state), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the gaming state is not changed when the small hit is won. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the execution of the small hit game and after the end of the small hit game is also the normal gaming state, and the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. If so, the game state during the execution of the small hit game and after the end of the small hit game also becomes the time-saving game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the probability variation game state, the small hit game is being executed and the small hit is executed. The game state after the end of the game is also the probability change game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the latent game state, the game state during the execution of the small hit game and after the end of the small hit game is also the latent game state. It becomes.

<Variation pattern selection state>
Next, the variation pattern selection state of the fourth embodiment will be described. As described above, the variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, "selection state 1", "selection state 2", and "selection state 3" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a normal game state (low probability low base state). Further, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the "normal mode" described later. The selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a time-saving game state (low probability high base state). Further, this selection state 2 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the “time saving mode” described later. The selection state 3 is a variable pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is a latent probability gaming state (high probability low base state) or a probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state). Further, this selection state 3 is set corresponding to the variation display when the effect mode is the "latent probability mode" or the "probability variation mode" described later. In this embodiment, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is selectively set according to the game state, the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed, and the like, and the set variation pattern selection states are set. The variation pattern table is selected.

<Direction mode>
Next, the effect mode of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the normal mode, the time saving mode, the latent probability mode, and the probabilistic variation mode are set as the plurality of types of effect modes, and the plurality of types of effect modes are set according to the game state (or the variable pattern selection state) and the like. Any one of them is selectively set, and the variable staging according to the set staging mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent gaming state. When, the "latent mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the "probability mode" is set. Then, when any of the effect modes is set, the background image (decorative pattern is displayed on the back side) dedicated to the effect mode on the screen as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode. The background image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

<Variation pattern>
Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. 92 to 94 are schematic views showing a variation pattern table of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and even if the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired, they are different from each other. Fluctuation patterns can be selected.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 1. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Five types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-5 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for disconnection. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", one of four types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4 is selected according to the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different types of fluctuation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH1-5 (ultra-long variation) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, only the fluctuation pattern PH1-5 (long long fluctuation) set to the extremely long fluctuation time (10 minutes) of the second special symbol is available. Be selected.

Two types of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-2 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (END reach A) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-long fluctuation) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Will be done. Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-long fluctuation) is selected without depending on the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. .. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit" or "small hit", the fluctuation pattern PA1- Only 2 (long-long variation) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 2. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for detachment. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuation pattern disorder does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). One of two types of fluctuation patterns PH2-3 and PH2-4 is selected according to the numerical value. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", there are four types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1, PH2-2, PH2-3, PH2-4 according to the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern. One of them is selected. In this embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different types of fluctuation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. ing. Specifically, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is one or more, the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and PH2- 2 (shortening variation) is easy to select, and when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. Is easy to select.

Two types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-2 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-2 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA2-1 is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random value. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (END reach B) is selected, and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit". , Only the variation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 3. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Five types of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-5 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for disconnection. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without, only the fixed variation pattern PH3-2 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuates without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). One of four types of fluctuation patterns PH3-1, PH3-3, PH3-4, and PH3-5 is selected according to the pattern random value.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", three kinds of fluctuation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-4 are performed according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value without depending on the jackpot type. One of them is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit", the fluctuation patterns PA3-2 (END reach A), PA3-3 (END reach B), PA3-4 (END reach C). One of the following is selected (that is, only the END reach variation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-4 are selected). Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random value. That is, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol corresponds to "small hit", only the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, END reach A, END reach B, and END reach C are prepared as a plurality of types of SP reach. The "END reach" is a reach effect including at least a specific effect element (referred to as a "specific element") among a plurality of types of effect elements constituting the game effect. The END reach A, B, and C each include the same specific element, but at least a part of the other effect elements is configured as a different effect. In the present embodiment, for example, an enemy character called "END" corresponds to a specific element, and a reach effect in which this specific element appears is called END reach. This END reach is a battle effect that suggests or notifies the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol according to the result (win / loss) of the ally character playing against the enemy character (END). Basically, if you win this battle production, it will be a "big hit", and if you lose the battle production, it will be a "miss". In the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of "END reach A" <"END reach B" <"END reach C". The fluctuation times of END reach A, B, and C are all set to 60 seconds, but they are referred to as "END reach A" <"END reach B" <"END reach C" according to the above-mentioned jackpot expectation. In order, the fluctuation time may be set to be longer. In addition, for all or part of END reach A, B, and C, when the END reach is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is confirmed that the game shifts to the latent game state (small hit RUSH) at that time. It may be a specification to be used. Further, when END reach A, B, and C are executed, it is expected to shift to the latent game state (small hit RUSH) in the order of "END reach A" <"END reach B" <"END reach C". It may be configured to have a high degree.

The feature of the fourth embodiment is that when the game state is the normal game state, the game state is higher than the case where the END reach is executed in the variable display performed by the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being a big hit. When END reach is executed in the variable display performed by the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being a big hit when is in the probabilistic game state, the latent probable game state (small hit RUSH) is performed after the big hit game is completed. It is configured so that the rate of transition to mode) is high. This feature will be outlined below.

First, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol, which is the main body of the game, is a big hit in this gaming state, the variation pattern PA1 does not depend on the big hit type. Only -1 (END reach A) is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit in the game state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super long) does not depend on the big hit type. Fluctuation) is selected only. Therefore, the END reach is performed only in the variable display of the first special symbol that is the subject of the game in the game state in the variable display when the game state is the normal game state. Here, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", as described above, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. Further, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", as described above, it is possible or easy to put the game ball into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Yes, basically, the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. Further, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "6R conditional normal jackpot", as described above, it is practically impossible to allow the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during the jackpot game. Alternatively, it is difficult, and basically, a time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, as a breakdown of the jackpot types of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 has a selection rate of 10%, and the 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 has a selection rate of 40%. , 6R Conditional normal jackpots are sorted with a selectivity of 50%. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the END reach is executed in the variable display of the first special symbol and the jackpot is obtained, so that the latent gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) is entered after the jackpot game is completed. Only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", the transition rate to the latent game state (small hit RUSH mode) is 10%.

On the other hand, when the game state is a probabilistic game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, which is the main body of the game, is a big hit in the game state, the variation pattern PA3 does not depend on the big hit type. One of -2 (END reach A), PA3-3 (END reach B), and PA3-4 (END reach C) is selected. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit in the game state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) does not depend on the big hit type. ) Is selected. Therefore, the END reach is performed only in the variable display of the second special symbol that is the subject of the game in the game state in the variable display when the game state is the probabilistic game state. Here, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", as described above, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. Further, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", as described above, it is possible or easy to put the game ball into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Yes, basically, the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, as a breakdown of the jackpot types of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" has a selection rate of 50%, and "10R conditional specific jackpot 4" has 50. It is sorted by the selection rate of%. Therefore, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the END reach is executed in the variable display of the second special symbol to become a big hit, and the game shifts to the latent probabilistic gaming state (small hit RUSH mode) after the big hit game is completed. Only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", the transition rate to the latent game state (small hit RUSH mode) is 50%.

Therefore, as described above, the END reach is executed by the variable display performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). END in the variation display performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit when the game state is the probability change game state (high probability high base state) than in the case (transition rate: 10%). When the reach is executed (transition rate: 50%), the ratio (transition rate) of transitioning to the latent probability game state (small hit RUSH mode) after the end of the big hit game is higher, and basically, the first hit Small hit RUSH is more likely to occur during consecutive villas than at times. It should be noted that the feature points can be applied by replacing the "probability variable game state" with the "latent probability game state". That is, when the END reach is executed in the variable display performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state) (transition rate). : 10%), END reach is executed by the variable display performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit when the game state is the latent game state (high probability low base state). When this is done (transition rate: 100%), the rate (transition rate) of transitioning to the latent probability game state (small hit RUSH mode) after the end of the big hit game is configured to be higher.

<Ordinary design lottery>
Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery of the fourth embodiment will be described. The ordinary symbol lottery of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 described above, similarly to the ordinary symbol lottery of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support When the function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is set. When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time of the normal symbol (fixed display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "opening for 1 second → closing for 2 seconds → closing for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open → close for 2 seconds → open for 1 second", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated. That is, as an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 62 described above. In the fourth embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol display device 71 performs the first special. A specification (a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long period of time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit fluctuation display". The fluctuation display of is called "off-the-fly fluctuation display".

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of one special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display, the small hit fluctuation display, or the missed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variation display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of the above reaches a preset predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuating forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Previously, when the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol was completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol was set in advance, and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). At the end of the jackpot variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated even before reaching. When the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced with a symbol that is out of the small hit symbol. .. That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol compete with each other. When the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as the jackpot variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the jackpot variation display. Change display (that is, loss change display or small hit variation display, and if the hit / fail random number corresponds to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with a miss and the hit / miss variation display is used). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is out of order fluctuation display (whether or not it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit in the hit / fail judgment process). If it is a random number, the hit / fail judgment result may be forcibly replaced with a wrong number, and the wrong result may be displayed.

[Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability change game state, and a probability change game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. Then, the normal mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the normal game state, the time reduction mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the time-saving game state, and the probability change mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability change game state. The latent mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the skill state.

<Normal game state>
First, in the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the game is started from this normal gaming state. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the player strikes left. (By launching the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes a game to play. While staying in this normal gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode or the special mode. In this normal game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the big hit type is "10R conditional specific big hit 1" is 10%, "10R conditional specific big hit 2" is 40%, and so on. "6R conditional normal jackpot" occurs with a winning probability of 50%. Basically, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", after the jackpot game is completed, the game ball is allowed to enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. It shifts to the latent game state. Further, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", the game is put into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game, and the game is changed to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "6R conditional normal jackpot", after the jackpot game is completed, on condition that the game ball could not be entered into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. It shifts to the time-saving game state.

<Time saving game state>
When the game state shifts to the time-saving game state (low probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to increase the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the game ball is hit right (right area). By launching a game ball aiming at PA2), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes. In this time-saving game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is as low as the normal game state, but it becomes a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated, and the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Can proceed. While staying in this time-saving game state, the effect mode is controlled to the time-saving mode. In this time-saving game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type is 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" and 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". It occurs with the probability of winning. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot 1", the game shifts to the incubation probability variation game state after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", the probability variation game state is obtained after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Move to. It should be noted that this time-saving game state is continued until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches 100 times, counting from the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and the game falls to the normal game state.

<Probability change game state>
When the game state shifts to the probabilistic game state (high probability and high base state), the electric chew support function is activated to increase the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the game ball is hit right (right area). By launching a game ball aiming at PA2), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes. In this probabilistic game state, the second starting port 52 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the probability of winning a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is high, so that the big hit of the second special symbol is likely to occur at an early stage. can do. While staying in this probabilistic gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the probabilistic mode. In this probability variation game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type is 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" and 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 4". It occurs with the probability of winning. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", the game is placed in the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the game ball enters the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", the probability variation game state is obtained after the jackpot game is completed, provided that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Move to. It should be noted that this probabilistic game state continues from the end of the big hit game until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches 130 times. Therefore, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 130 times without the next big hit in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state ends and the game falls to the normal game state.

<Hidden probability change game state>
When the game state shifts to the latent probability change game state (high probability low base state), the electric chew support function does not operate, so it is normally recommended to hit left aiming at the first starting port 51. In the present embodiment, the frequency of entering the second starting port 52 is set to be relatively high even in this low base state, and the small hit game is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. By performing a characteristic game (small hit RUSH) that occurs frequently, the game ball is entered into the second starting port 52 by hitting right rather than being entered into the first starting port 51 by hitting left. It is a good idea to let them do it, and as a result, it becomes a game playability to independently execute the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). While staying in this latent probability change game state, the effect mode is controlled to the latent probability mode. In this latent probability change game state, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type is 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" and 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 4". It occurs with the winning probability of. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", the jackpot game is provided on condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. After the end of, the game shifts to the latent game state. In addition, this latent game state is calculated from the end of the big hit game, and continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 130 times. Therefore, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 130 times without the next big hit in the latent probability changing game state, the latent probability changing game state ends and the game falls to the normal game state. Here, when the gaming state is the latent gaming state, small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening 54 during the small hit game. , A game (small hit RUSH) aiming at increasing the number of balls to be output by a small hit game becomes possible. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described below.

<Small hit RUSH>
Next, the playability of the small hit RUSH (latent mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the small hit is frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball being inserted into the second starting port 52, and the small hit is made until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate hit games continuously and intensively.

When the gaming state is the latent gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent game state (low base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. Further, in this latent game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the first when the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol is used. The fluctuation display of is finished in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 has the ordinary electric accessory 522 (movable) during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the large winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol, and until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player can play. Can advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small hit RUSH to only the latent game state and suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game for the game states other than the latent game state, the following measures are taken. Has been done.

Specifically, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. To. In this gaming state (high base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. high.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from that time to the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 located downstream of the object 522. Therefore, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by small hit games.

Further, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, but the second special symbol Since the fluctuation time of is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digesting the symbols is very low, and small hit games cannot be played frequently.

As a modification, in the variation display (variation display within 4 rotations) of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition from the time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, or the latent probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state, the limited frequency is selected as the variation pattern selection state. The fluctuation time (average value of the fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display (variation display after the fifth rotation) after the state is set and the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times is completed. 2 It may be configured so that the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is high.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko gaming machine PM of the fourth embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. It is configured in. In the following, among various game effects, "special meter effect" and "holding jackpot suggestion effect" will be described.

<Special meter production>
First, the special meter effect will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic view showing a basic screen of a special meter effect. The special meter effect can be executed in the variable display when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. This special meter effect is an effect that suggests that a predetermined high expectation effect is generated during the fluctuation display by changing the level of the meter image displayed on the screen (also referred to as "meter value"). be. The predetermined high expectation effect is SP reach (END reach) in which the above-mentioned specific element (enemy character called END) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 95, the meter image is displayed in the meter display area 740 on the left side of the screen, and is, for example, a vertically long image showing a level from "1" to "10". In the present embodiment, when the level of the meter image reaches MAX (10th stage), it is confirmed and notified that END reach will occur during the execution of the fluctuation display. Therefore, the level of the meter image can be said to be an index suggesting the degree of expectation that END reach will be executed (the degree of expectation of reach development). As described above, when the END reach occurs in the variable display of the big hit when the game state is the probabilistic game state, the expectation of shifting to the small hit RUSH state after the end of the big hit game increases. Therefore, the level of the meter image can be said to be an index suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to the small hit RUSH (latent mode).

FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the special meter effect. The special meter effect is a fluctuation display (look-ahead fluctuation display) one or more times before the operation-holding ball to be read ahead is digested, and a fluctuation display when the operation-holding ball to be read-ahead is digested (the fluctuation display). It can be executed across and. In the present embodiment, the special meter effect may be executed straddling the look-ahead fluctuation display and the fluctuation display, or may be executed only by the fluctuation display. Then, the special meter effect progresses when a predetermined look-ahead effect is executed during the look-ahead variation display or when a predetermined advance notice effect is executed during the change display. That is, in the special meter effect, the meter image appears and the level of the meter image changes when a predetermined look-ahead effect or a predetermined advance notice effect is performed.

First, during the look-ahead variation display, as shown in FIG. 96A, a meter image appears when a predetermined look-ahead effect is executed. The predetermined look-ahead effect includes a light guide plate look-ahead effect that causes a predetermined light guide plate on the board to emit light, and a special hold change that changes the display mode of the reserved image to a special display mode (a display mode that suggests the occurrence of END reach). Includes directing. Then, after the meter image appears during the look-ahead fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), each time the light guide plate look-ahead effect (predetermined look-ahead effect) is performed, the level of the meter image is set to one level or Increase in multiple stages.

On the other hand, during the fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 96C, a meter image appears when a predetermined advance notice effect is executed. The predetermined advance notice effect includes a light guide plate advance effect that causes a predetermined light guide plate on the board to emit light, and a character change advance effect that changes the display mode of the image of the predetermined character in a plurality of stages. Then, after the meter image appears during the fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), each time the light guide plate advance notice effect (predetermined advance notice effect) is performed, the level of the meter image is set to one level or Increase in multiple stages. In the present embodiment, in order to ensure the continuity of the effect, the light guide plate that emits light in the light guide plate look-ahead effect and the light guide plate that emits light in the light guide plate advance notice effect are the same light guide plate. It has become.

In the third embodiment, a meter counter serving as a counting means for controlling the level (meter value) of the meter image is provided. The count value of this meter counter is an internal numerical value (referred to as "internal numerical value") corresponding to the level (meter value) of the meter image, and this internal numerical value can be updated in units of "1". .. Then, each time the internal value of the meter counter increases by "1", the level of the meter image is associated with increasing by "1 step". Therefore, when the internal value increases to the maximum value (10), the level of the meter image reaches MAX (10th step). The internal value of this meter counter is cleared (reset) to zero at the start or end of the special meter effect.

The level of the meter image basically changes stepwise according to the effect scenario determined by lottery at the start of execution of the special meter effect. That is, this effect scenario defines the content including how many steps the meter image level is added at what timing in the process of executing the special meter effect. Here, the level of the meter image is added by a predetermined number of steps (+1 step to +7 step) at one timing according to the effect scenario. When a specific effect is executed during the fluctuation display, the level of the meter image is forcibly increased to the 10th stage (maximum level). The specific effect is a notice effect in which a specific element (enemy character called END) is cut in on the screen. That is, when a specific element is cut-in and displayed during the execution of the special meter effect, the level of the meter image reaches MAX, and the occurrence of SP reach (END reach) including this specific element is guaranteed.

<Holding jackpot suggestion production>
Next, the big hit suggestion effect in the hold will be described. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the big hit suggestion effect in the hold. The big hit suggestion effect in the hold is an effect that suggests the possibility that there is an operation hold ball (referred to as a “big hit hold ball”) that becomes a big hit in the operation hold ball of the special symbol that is the target of the look-ahead lottery. In this pending big hit suggestion effect, when the effect mode is the latent mode (small hit RUSH), the game ball is large during the execution of the small hit game performed by the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being a small hit. It is executed when the ball enters the winning opening 54. In the present embodiment, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH), is the target of the pre-reading lottery. That is, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the time saving mode, or the probability variation mode, the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the small hit game performed by the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol being a small hit. Even so, the big hit suggestion effect in hold is not executed, and if a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls within 10 seconds) are entered within a predetermined time in these effect modes, an error notification image is displayed. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, a prize ball is paid out based on the winning ball when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the small hit game. The prize ball number information of "15pt" corresponding to the number (15 pieces) is displayed. At this time, if the pending big hit suggestion effect is executed when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the small hit game, the prize ball number information of "15pt" is displayed. At the same time, a sound (special sound) suggesting that the jackpot holding ball is included in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is output from the speaker 11.

The effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect in the hold includes an undetermined effect pattern suggesting that the jackpot hold ball may exist in the operation hold ball of the second special symbol, and the operation hold ball of the second special symbol. There is a definite effect pattern that deterministically notifies the existence of a jackpot holding ball. The non-determined effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the first special sound "I did it" is output from the speaker 11. The final effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the second special sound "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 11. As a modified example, in the non-determined effect pattern, a prize of "15 pt" corresponding to the number of prize balls (15) paid out based on the game balls entering the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the small hit game. The number of balls information is displayed in the normal display mode (white), and in the final staging pattern, the number of prize balls (15) paid out based on the game balls entering the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the small hit game. The corresponding prize ball number information of "15 pt" may be configured to be displayed in a special display mode (rainbow color).

FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing a big hit suggestion effect lottery table in hold. In the pending jackpot suggestion effect lottery table, whether or not the hold jackpot suggestion effect can be executed and its effect pattern are defined. In the figure, the "selection rate" is shown for convenience, but in reality, the number of judgments for determining whether or not the pending jackpot suggestion effect can be executed and the effect pattern according to the acquired lottery random number value. (Range of lottery random number value) is set, and whether or not the pending jackpot suggestion effect can be executed and its effect pattern are determined based on which judgment number the lottery random number value belongs to. ..

Whether or not the pending jackpot suggestion effect can be executed and its effect pattern are based on the pending jackpot suggestion effect pattern table, and the operation hold balls of the second special symbol (1st to 4th operation hold balls) that are subject to the look-ahead lottery. ) Will be decided by lottery according to the result of the preliminary judgment (whether or not there is a big hit holding ball). In this pending jackpot suggestion effect pattern table, "no execution" corresponding to not executing the pending jackpot suggestion effect and the pending jackpot suggestion effect are executed for the preliminary judgment result (presence or absence of the jackpot reserved ball). One of the corresponding "execution" can be selected, and when "execution" is selected, the type of the effect pattern ("non-confirmed effect pattern", "confirmed effect pattern") is selected. The selection rate (judgment number) is assigned so that it is possible. Specifically, when there is a big hit holding ball as a preliminary judgment result, "no execution" is allocated with a selection rate of 20%, "non-determined effect pattern" is allocated with a selection rate of 50%, and "confirmed effect pattern" is allocated with a selection rate of 30%. It has been. On the other hand, when there is no jackpot holding ball as a preliminary judgment result, "no execution" is assigned with a selection rate of 70%, "non-determined effect pattern" is assigned with a selection rate of 30%, and "confirmed effect pattern" is assigned with a selection rate of 0%. ..

After the production mode shifts to the latent mode (small hit RUSH), the execution of the final production pattern is prohibited until a predetermined execution condition (referred to as "fixed production execution condition") is satisfied. Will be done. The final effect execution condition is that the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuates reaches the specified number of times, counting from the start of the latent probability mode (starting after the end of the jackpot game). When the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for the first number of executions (first condition), or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the second execution. It has been performed a number of times (second condition) (at least the first condition or the second condition is set). When the variation display of the first special symbol is performed only for the first execution number (4 times in this embodiment), the upper limit number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode (4 pieces) ) Correspondingly (4 times), it means that the variation display of the first special symbol has been performed, that is, all the operation holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode have been digested. .. As a modified example, in consideration of irregular ball entry (ball entry when the player accidentally hits left instead of right), the upper limit of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (4) ) May be set more times (for example, 5 times). Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for the second execution number (10 times in this embodiment), the game is performed mainly on the variation display of the second special symbol, that is, It means that all the operation-holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode are digested, and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main body of the game, is constantly performed in the latent probability mode. .. That is, the confirmation effect execution condition means that all the operation holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode have been digested. Therefore, the number of first executions (1st to 4th rotations) or the 2nd execution number (1st to 10th rotations) is calculated from immediately after the production mode shifts to the latent mode (immediately after the jackpot game is completed). ), The final effect execution condition is not satisfied, and the small hit game is executed after the end of the variable display, and the large winning opening 54 is opened or the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. Even so, the final staging pattern is not executed. Here, the small hit variation of the second special symbol and the time required to execute the small hit game for the second execution number in the latent probability mode (the variation display time is the shortest variable display time of the second special symbol in the latent probability mode). Calculated in, 0.5 seconds in this embodiment, the execution time of the small hit game is 5 seconds in this embodiment, including the time required for the small hit start demo time and the small hit end demo, that is, the second The time required for the deviation variation of the first special symbol for the first number of executions in the latent mode (55 seconds for 10 executions) (for the variation display time, the variation of the first special symbol in the latent mode) Calculated based on the display time, it is preferable to configure it so that it is longer than 10 seconds in this embodiment, that is, 40 seconds for the first execution number of 4 times). Then, in the situation where the variation display of the second special symbol related to the small hit for the second execution number is completed, it is assumed that at least all the operation holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode have been digested. Will be done. The reason for setting the final effect execution condition is that when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the latent probability mode, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is activated. By the time all are digested, if the jackpot suggestion effect (fixed notification effect pattern) in the hold indicates that there is a jackpot hold ball in the operation hold ball of the second special symbol, the jackpot of this second special symbol If there is a jackpot reserved ball with the first special symbol that is digested before the reserved ball, the jackpot reserved ball with the second special symbol may be replaced with "missing" in the hit / fail judgment process, so it is reserved. This is because there is a discrepancy between the production result of the inner jackpot suggestion effect (the jackpot is confirmed) and the actual game result (replacement). More specifically, since it is a big hit with the first special symbol, there is no doubt that it is a big hit, but since this pending big hit suggestion effect is intended for the big hit with the second special symbol, it is a big hit in the hold. If a big hit with the first special symbol occurs after the suggestion effect is executed, a discrepancy will occur. Not only that, since the jackpot in the first special symbol includes "6R conditional normal jackpot", there is a high possibility that the latent mode will end even though the pending jackpot suggestion effect is executed. Since there is a possibility of a big hit (because it is an unpleasant event for the player), it is desirable to set the final effect execution condition.

On the other hand, the non-determined effect pattern is allowed to be executed regardless of whether or not the final effect execution condition is satisfied after the effect mode shifts to the latent mode. That is, the non-deterministic effect pattern can be executed without any restriction as to whether or not all the operation holding balls of the first special symbol remaining at the start of the latent probability mode have been digested. That is, since the non-determined effect pattern is not an effect pattern for confirming the existence of the jackpot holding ball in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (suggesting that there is a possibility that the jackpot holding ball exists). (Because it is an effect pattern), even if the fact that the jackpot holding ball actually exists in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol results in a true notification result, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is actually performed. This is because there is no discrepancy between the production result of the jackpot suggestion effect in the hold and the actual game result even when the notification result of the Gase is obtained without the presence of the jackpot holding ball inside. Therefore, the non-deterministic effect pattern can be executed from the case where a small hit is drawn in the first rotation immediately after the start of the latent probability mode. As a modification, the non-determined effect pattern may also be determined whether or not it can be executed depending on whether or not the final effect execution condition is satisfied, that is, the pending jackpot suggestion until the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. It may be configured to disallow the execution of the effect.

As a modification of the above-mentioned pending jackpot suggestion effect, when the effect mode is the latent mode (small hit RUSH), the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, which is a large hit game. The holding jackpot suggestion effect may be executed when the winning opening 54 is opened. That is, while staying in the latent mode (small hit RUSH), the large winning opening 54 is opened during the execution of the small hit game (the opening operation of the large winning opening 54 is started), and the game is held. It may be configured so that whether or not the inner jackpot suggestion effect can be executed and the effect pattern are determined by lottery. In this modified example, if the large winning opening 54 is opened during the execution of the small hit game, the large winning opening in the hold is held regardless of whether or not the game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 54 in the opened state. The suggestion effect will be executed, and even beginner players can increase the chances of seeing the big hit suggestion effect in the hold. Further, as a modification of the third embodiment, either immediately after the effect mode shifts to the latent mode (immediately after the jackpot game ends) until the first execution number or the second execution number is reached. After the end of the variation display (variation display that reaches a predetermined number of times within the first execution number or the second execution number), the small hit game is executed and the big winning opening 54 is opened or the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. If this is the case, the small hit game is executed after the first execution number is reached or the variation display after the second execution number is reached, and the large winning opening 54 is opened or the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. However, the execution probability of the finalized effect pattern may be relatively low.

As described above, the main effects achieved in the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

According to the fourth embodiment, by drawing a jackpot (conditional specific jackpot) of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state as the first barrier, the player shifts to the probabilistic gaming state, and as the second barrier, the probabilistic gaming state is entered. By pulling the big hit (conditional specific big hit) of the second special symbol, it shifts to the latent game state (small hit RUSH), which is a new small hit RUSH spec that has never existed on the condition that it breaks through the barrier of multiple stages. By realizing and differentiating the role of the same production (END reach) according to the playing state during the current stay, it is possible to prevent the production when breaking through each barrier from becoming monotonous, and to prevent the production from becoming monotonous. It is possible to give diversity to how to have a sense of expectation due to the appearance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the fourth embodiment, in a specification called a parallel machine that simultaneously executes the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, it becomes the main player of the game in the game state during the current stay. When the look-ahead effect is performed for the operation-holding ball of one special symbol, there is a discrepancy between the effect result notified by the look-ahead effect and the actual game result due to the intervention of the variation display of the other special symbol. Can be prevented from occurring, and an appropriate look-ahead effect that does not disappoint the player's expectations can be realized, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment described above, as an example of the look-ahead effect, the pending jackpot suggestion effect performed during the execution of the small hit game has been described, but the variable display is being executed or a special game (big hit game, A plurality of types of look-ahead effects performed during the execution of the small hit game) may be prepared. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead effect in which the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the look-ahead lottery in the variable display when the current game state is the time-saving game state, the probability change game state, or the latent probability game state. On the premise that the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the variation display of the first special symbol is an outlier variation display (the remaining first special symbol). It is preferable that all the operation-holding balls of the symbol correspond to the detachment), or there is no jackpot holding ball in the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol (all the remaining operation-holding balls of the first special symbol). It is preferable that it is not a big hit), and it may be configured to execute an effect of deterministically notifying the existence of the big hit holding ball in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol.

Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, a common variation pattern table is used for the variation pattern table when the gaming state is the latent probability gaming state and the variation pattern table when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (FIG. 94). Although it is configured as the variation pattern table 3), the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and both variation pattern tables may be configured as individual variation pattern tables. At this time, in the fluctuation pattern table in the latent probability game state, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is configured so that a relatively long-time fluctuation pattern (particularly, the deviation display is a super long fluctuation) can be easily selected, and the probability variation game is played. In the fluctuation pattern table in the state, it is preferable that the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is configured so that a relatively short-time fluctuation pattern (particularly, the fluctuation display of the outlier is an ultra-shortening fluctuation) can be easily selected. At this time, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time (average value of the fluctuation time) for one time of the first special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time (average value of the fluctuation time) for the predetermined number of times of the second special symbol. It is desirable that it is set to the time. The "predetermined number of times" is a variable display number of times corresponding to the denominator of the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the latent game state (high probability state). That is, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to "1/80", and the variable display number of "80 times" corresponding to the denominator (80) of the jackpot probability is predetermined. Corresponds to the number of times. That is, when the current gaming state is the latent probability gaming state (small hit RUSH), the time (average time) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is performed only once is the variation display of the second special symbol. It is preferable that the number of times is set longer than the total time of the fluctuation time (average value) of the second special symbol until the number of times reaches 80 times corresponding to the denominator of the jackpot probability. That is, in a parallel machine in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, by the time the variation display number of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (80 times). The probability of becoming a big hit is about 64%, which means that when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the variation display of the first special symbol is completed. It can be said that it is a probability of becoming a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by changing the above predetermined number of times to the specified ST number of times (130 times), when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the variation of the first special symbol is performed. By the time the display is completed, the probability of becoming a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol can be improved. As a modification, in the latent game state, the fluctuation time (average value of the fluctuation time) for one time of the first special symbol is determined by the fluctuation time (average value of the fluctuation time) for the predetermined number of times of the second special symbol. It may be set to be longer than the time obtained by adding the execution time of the small hit game for the number of times. Further, as another modification, the predetermined number of times may be the same as the specified number of times of ST, and even in such a configuration, when the current gaming state is the latent gaming state (small hit RUSH), the first The time (average time) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed only once is the time until the variation display number of the second special symbol reaches 130 times corresponding to the specified ST number of the jackpot probability of the second special symbol. Small hit game for the specified ST number of times than the total time of the fluctuation time (average value) (or the total time of the fluctuation time (average value) of the second special symbol until reaching 130 times corresponding to the specified ST number of times It is preferable that the time is set longer than the time obtained by adding the execution time of.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment or the fourth embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the portion having the same configuration is used. The same reference numerals will be given and the description will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second embodiment or the fourth embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described in order. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, as in the second embodiment or the fourth embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the latent gaming state (high probability low base state), the small hit game is performed. The small hit RUSH, which is a game that occurs frequently, is adopted.

<Board composition>
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the above-described embodiment), the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 is mainly a first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21, general. It is possible to enter any of the winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. In the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 has an extremely high probability (almost 100% may be) toward the second starting port 52 (ordinary electric accessory 522). The board surface is designed to flow down (gauge design), and if the second starting port 52 is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 524 of the ordinary electric accessory 522 toward the big winning opening 54. On the other hand, if the second starting port 52 is in the open state, the game ball is configured so as not to enter the second starting port 52 and reach the large winning opening 54. On the other hand, at the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has flowed down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20.

<Number of prize balls>
In the fifth embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening is "3" for the first starting port 51 and "3" for the second starting port 52. "1", general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "5", and large winning openings 54 are set to "15". The number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in the fifth embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied.

<Judgment of success or failure>
The validity determination of the special symbol of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table of the fifth embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. ). In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 99, in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random number value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 327". If it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and if it is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, it is a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 1849". It becomes. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 199.80" to the high probability "1 / 35.42". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is designed to be equal between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / failing determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.05". The winning probability of a small hit is designed to have the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this fifth embodiment, a small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. For example, a small hit is also set for the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is performed. Also, the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol may be configured to win a small hit with a higher probability.

<Big hit no lottery process>
Here, a jackpot non-lottery process will be described as a pass / fail determination process for the special symbol. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram provided for explaining the jackpot non-lottery process. In (A) in the figure, when the first special symbol is in the variable display of "big hit" or "missing", the result that can be derived as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "○", and it cannot be derived. The results are indicated by "x". In (B) in the figure, when the second special symbol is in the variable display of "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", the result that can be derived as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "○". , The result that cannot be derived is indicated by "x". In the fifth embodiment, since the small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol as described above, the “small hit” of the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol in the figure (B) Is indicated by "-" because it is not derived under any circumstances (because it does not become a "small hit" as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the result of the hit / fail determination of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a variable display of the big hit). In the middle), when the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol is executed, it is prohibited to derive the hit (big hit or small hit) as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, and only the unambiguous hit is derived. Will be done. Therefore, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit or the small hit, the result of the hit / miss judgment is forcibly replaced with the big hit or the small hit. As a modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a table for jackpot non-lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the variable display of the jackpot of the special symbol, the table dedicated to the jackpot non-lottery process is referred to instead of the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table, or the winning / failing of the special symbol is determined immediately without performing the winning / failing judgment itself. You may adopt the method of doing. Further, as a further modification example, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the hit / fail judgment of one of the special symbols becomes a big hit, and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable display of the jackpot), the other is displayed. When the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol of is executed, it is prohibited to derive the big hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, and the small hit or the miss may be derived (small hit). Is permissible).

<Big hit type / Small hit type>
The large hit type and the small hit type of the special symbol of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol big hit symbol table and a special symbol small hit symbol table. In the fifth embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the big hit type or the small hit type is referred to by referring to the special symbol big hit symbol table or the special symbol small hit symbol table. To decide. Also in the fifth embodiment, each jackpot type does not trigger a transition to a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends, and does not trigger a transition to a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends. It is roughly divided into "normal jackpot". The details of each small hit type will be described later, but when the current game state is the probabilistic game state, "small hit A", which triggers the end of the electric support state at the start of the small hit game, and the current It is roughly classified into "small hit B" which does not trigger the end of the electric support state without depending on the game state or the like.

FIG. 101 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 of each round are displayed for the symbol random value per special symbol. It is associated (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot symbol table, 5R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 5R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group B) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group). Specifically, the 5R specific jackpot (symbol group A) is sorted with a selectivity of 50%, and the 5R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group B) is sorted with a selectivity of 50%. In each of the 5R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and the 5R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group B), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening) of the jackpot 54 in one round game Time) is 28 seconds.

FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 of each round are displayed for the symbol random value per special symbol. It is associated (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot symbol table, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group C) and 5R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group D) are set as two types of jackpot types (symbol group). Specifically, the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group C) is sorted with a selectivity of 50%, and the 5R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group D) is sorted with a selectivity of 50%. In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group C), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 5R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group D), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, all the jackpot types have an opportunity to execute a round game (long open round game) in which the big winning opening 54 is long open (open for a long time) as each round game during the big hit game. It is a big hit type. In this long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be entered into the large winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a round game. In the fifth embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 in each round game is set to a fixed time of "28 seconds" (although all round games are referred to as "long opening round games"). , In a predetermined round game or all round games during the same big hit game, a "short open round game" is provided in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to a short time of "2 seconds", and the big hit game Even if the number of rounds is the same, a configuration having different jackpot types with different actual number of rounds (substantially the number of rounds that can be obtained) may be adopted. In the short open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54. It is a round game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, a 5R jackpot (5R specific jackpot, 5R normal jackpot 1, 5R normal jackpot 2) and a 10R jackpot (10R specific jackpot) are provided. The expected value of winning a prize ball (expected value of winning a prize ball) in a special game is 5R jackpot (5R specific jackpot, 5R normal jackpot 1, 5R normal jackpot 2) <10R jackpot (10R specific jackpot). At this time, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the selection rate of the 5R jackpot (5R specific jackpot, 5R normal jackpot 1) is set to 100%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), in the lottery of the second special symbol, the selection rate of the 10R jackpot (10R specific jackpot) is set to 50%, and the selection rate of the 5R jackpot (5R normal jackpot 2) is 50. It is set to%. Therefore, for the player, drawing a big hit with the second special symbol has a higher expected value for winning a prize ball (a lot of balls can be obtained in a special game) than drawing a big hit with the first special symbol. It is advantageous. In the following, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the 10R specific jackpot, which is the jackpot type with the highest profit (expected value of winning a prize ball), is also referred to as "highest profit jackpot".

FIG. 101 (C) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol small hit symbol table. In this second special symbol small hit symbol table, the number of times the large winning opening 54 is opened in the symbol group, the small hit type, and the small hit game with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol, and the opening of the large winning opening 54 once. Time (maximum opening time) is associated (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol small hit symbol table, small hit A (symbol group K1) and small hit B (symbol group K2) are set as two types of small hit types (symbol group). Specifically, the small hit A (symbol group K1) is distributed with a selection rate of 3%, and the small hit B (symbol group K2) is distributed with a selection rate of 97%. In both the small hit A (symbol group K1) and the small hit B (symbol group K2), the number of times the large winning opening 54 is opened in the small hit game is two, and the opening time of one large winning opening 54 (maximum). The opening time) is 0.748 seconds. More specifically, when the small hit A (symbol group K1) and the small hit B (symbol group K2) are won, 0.748 seconds of opening → 0.3 seconds of closing → 0 in the small hit game. The big winning opening 54 opens and closes in the order of opening for 748 seconds and closing for 0.008 seconds. That is, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the small hit A or the small hit B is won as the small hit type, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game is set to be the same. Therefore, the profit that the player can obtain in the small hit game is the same. As a modification, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the large winning opening 54 may be different depending on the small hit type, and in such a configuration, (1) the small hit A is opened for 0.748 seconds. → Close for 0.3 seconds, open for 0.748 seconds for small hit B → Close for 0.3 seconds → Open for 0.748 seconds → Close for 0.008 seconds, or (2) Small hit In A, 0.748 seconds open → 0.3 seconds close → 0.748 seconds open → 0.008 seconds close, and in small hit B, 0.748 seconds open → 0.3 seconds close. It may be configured as follows.

<Game state>
Subsequently, the gaming state of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, "normal game state", "time saving game state", "latent probability game state", and "probability variation game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming states, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability variation state" or a "probability variation game state", and ( 2) The game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "incubation probability game state (incubation probability change game state)" or "incubation probability change state". Then, (3) the gaming state in which the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability variation function being activated is called the "time saving state" or the "time saving gaming state", and (4) ) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, regarding the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game. , In the game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table according to the fifth embodiment. In the game state setting table, the number of times of operation of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game is set for each jackpot type (type of symbol group). There is. In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (1) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (2) game at the time of big hit winning. Determined according to the condition. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the special symbol probability variation function is activated (referred to as the "probability variation number") and the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated. It is set according to the number of times the operation is performed (referred to as the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time") and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as the "number of times of electric support"). The number of variable display times of the special symbol means the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, except for special cases. The number of times of variation display of the special symbol is added by "1" when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is started. As a modification, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol may be added by "1" when the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol ends. Note that "-" in FIG. 103 does not mean that a new gaming state is set (the number of continuations of each gaming state is set), but that the current gaming state is maintained (for example, time reduction). Even if the small hit A is won at the 20th rotation of the gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is maintained, and the next fluctuation is the 21st rotation of the time-saving gaming state).

(Special figure 1_5R specific jackpot)
When the 5R specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the probabilistic gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times" and the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times". "10000 times" and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set, and a probabilistic game state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit game. The probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the state shifts to the latent probability game state at the start of the variation display at the 100th rotation. In addition, when the 5R specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the electric power. The number of support times "0 times" is set, and the latent game state is set again as the game state after the jackpot game is completed (looping the latent game state). The latent game state is set to a huge number of times of continuation (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number) of "10000 times", and it is probabilistic that the jackpot will not be won until the continuation number is reached. Since it is almost impossible for the jackpot probability = about 1/35), it continues until the next jackpot occurs.

(Special figure 1_5R normal jackpot 1)
When the 5R normal jackpot 1 of the first special symbol is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "30", and the number of electric support is "30", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. The time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 30 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 30 times. When the time saving technique state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 30, the normal game state is entered at the start of the variation display of the 30th rotation.

(Special figure 2_10R specific jackpot)
When the 10R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the probabilistic gaming state, the probability fluctuation number "10000 times" and the fluctuation time shortening number ""10000times" and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set, and a probabilistic game state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit game. The probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the probability variation game state ends when the number of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the state shifts to the latent probability game state at the start of the variation display at the 100th rotation. In addition, when the 10R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the electric power. The number of support times "0 times" is set, and the latent game state is set again as the game state after the jackpot game is completed (looping the latent game state). As described above, the latent game state is set to a huge number of times (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number) of "10000 times", and the jackpot must not be won until the continuation number is reached. Is almost impossible to occur stochastically (big hit probability = about 1/35), so it continues until the next big hit occurs.

(Special figure 2_5R normal jackpot 2)
When the 5R normal jackpot 2 of the second special symbol is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "30", and the number of electric support is "30", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. The time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 30 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 30 times. When the time saving technique state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 30, the normal game state is entered at the start of the variation display of the 30th rotation.

Although the details will be described later, when the game state is the electric support state (time saving game state, probabilistic game state), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol reaches the number of electric support times (30 times or 100 times). When the electric support state ends as a trigger, the electric support state ends immediately after the fluctuation display that triggered the arrival of the number of electric support times is started. That is, at the start of the variation display of the 30th or 100th rotation, which is the final variation display of the number of times of electric support (30 or 100 times), the electric support state ends (the variation of the 30th or 100th rotation). Since it is in the electric support state until the start, the electric support state will continue up to 30 or 100 times, although it is until the start of the fluctuation at the 30th or 100th rotation).

<Variation pattern selection state>
Subsequently, the variation pattern selection state of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state table of the fifth embodiment. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, as nine types of variation pattern selection states, "selection state 0", "selection state 1", "selection state 2", "selection state 3", "selection state 4", "selection state 5", "Selection state 6", "selection state 7", and "selection state 8" are set.

The selection state 0 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (however, the variation display of 10 rotations after the end of the electric support state is excluded). Further, this selection state 0 is set corresponding to the fluctuation display (excluding the fluctuation display of 10 rotations after the end of the electric support state) when the effect mode is the normal mode described later.

The selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (however, it is limited to the variation display of 10 rotations after the end of the electric support state). Further, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the fluctuation display (however, limited to the fluctuation display of 10 rotations after the end of the electric support state) when the effect mode is the normal mode described later.

The selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (however, it is limited to the variation display of the 2nd to 29th rotations of the time-saving gaming state). Further, this selection state 2 is set corresponding to the variation display of the 2nd to 29th rotations when the effect mode is the chance mode described later.

The selection state 3 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (however, it is limited to the variation display at the 30th rotation of the time-saving gaming state). In addition, this selection state 3 is when the effect mode is the variation display of the 30th rotation of the chance mode described later (variation display when the variation display of the last round of the electric support state is a big hit) or the result mode. It is set corresponding to the fluctuation display (variation display when the last round of fluctuation display in the electric support state is out of alignment). In addition, although it was shown in FIG. 102 that the chance mode continues 30 times, to be precise, when the fluctuation display (30th rotation) of the last inning of the electric support state is a big hit, it continues 30 times (electric support). (Continues until the final variation display of the state), and if the variation display (30th rotation) of the final round of the electric support state is a loss or a small hit, it continues 29 times (the final variation display of the electric support state). (Fluctuating display will be in result mode instead of chance mode).

The selection state 4 is a variable pattern selection state that is set when the game state is the latent game state. Further, this selection state 4 is set corresponding to the variable display when the production mode is the general decisive battle mode.

The selection state 5 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the probability variation game state (however, it is limited to the variation display of the 2nd to 99th rotations of the probability variation game state). Further, this selection state 5 is set corresponding to the variation display of the 2nd to 99th rotations when the production mode is the summit decisive battle mode.

The selection state 6 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (however, it is limited to the variation display of the first rotation of the time-saving gaming state). Further, this selection state 6 is set corresponding to the variation display of the first rotation when the effect mode is the chance mode.

The selection state 7 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the probability variation game state (however, it is limited to the variation display of the first rotation of the probability variation game state). Further, this selection state 7 is set corresponding to the variation display of the first rotation when the effect mode is the summit decisive battle mode.

The selection state 8 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is the probability variation game state (however, it is limited to the variation display at the 100th rotation of the probability variation game state). Further, this selection state 8 is set corresponding to the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation (variation display of the final round) when the production mode is the summit decisive battle mode.

Next, the order of transitions of the fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state transition table. In this variation pattern selection state transition table, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the transition order of the variation pattern selection states (selection states 0 to 8) is defined.

In the fifth embodiment, as a transition pattern that defines the transition order of the variation pattern selection state, the variation pattern selection state is “selection state 7 (1 time) → selection state 5 (98 times) → selection state 8 (1 time)). → A pattern that transitions in the order of "selection state 4" (transition pattern A), a pattern in which the variation pattern selection state is fixed only to "selection state 4" (transition pattern B), and a variation pattern selection state is "selection state 6 (selection state 6). A pattern (transition pattern C) in which the transition is made in the order of (1 time) → selected state 2 (28 times) → selected state 3 (1 time) → selected state 1 (10 times) → selected state 0 is set. Since the selected state 0 and the selected state 4 continue until the next big hit occurs, the number of times the selected state 0 and the selected state 4 continue (the number of executions) is an indefinite number.

(Special figure 1_5R specific jackpot)
When the 5R specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the transition to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot game). (When), the variable pattern selection state changes in the order of "selection state 7 (1 time) → selection state 5 (98 times) → selection state 8 (1 time) → selection state 4" after the end of the jackpot game. (Transition pattern A). In addition, when the 5R specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent gaming state (that is, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is the latent gaming state). The variable pattern selection state is fixed to the "selection state 4" after the end of the jackpot game (transition pattern B).

(Special figure 1_5R normal jackpot 1)
When the 5R normal jackpot 1 of the first special symbol is won, the variable pattern selection state is changed to "selection state 6 (1 time) →" after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The transition is made in the order of selection state 2 (28 times) → selection state 3 (1 time) → selection state 1 (10 times) → selection state 0 ”(transition pattern C).

(Special figure 2_10R specific jackpot)
When the 10R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state (that is, the transition to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot game). (When), the variable pattern selection state transitions in the order of "selection state 7 (1 time) → selection state 5 (98 times) → selection state 8 (1 time) → selection state 4" after the end of the jackpot game. (Transition pattern A). In addition, when the 10R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is won, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent gaming state (that is, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is the latent gaming state). The variable pattern selection state is fixed to the "selection state 4" after the end of the jackpot game (transition pattern B).

(Special figure 2_5R normal jackpot 2)
When the 10R normal jackpot 2 of the second special symbol is won, the variable pattern selection state is changed to "selection state 6 (1 time) →" after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The transition is made in the order of selection state 2 (28 times) → selection state 3 (1 time) → selection state 1 (10 times) → selection state 0 ”(transition pattern C).

The variation pattern selection state is triggered by the start of the final variation display of the selected state (the selection state corresponding to the effect mode currently being stayed) (immediately after the final variation display is started). It is possible to switch to the next selection state (selection state corresponding to the next effect mode). That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is not switched from the selected state to the next selected state when the last round of the fluctuation display of the selected state, which is the trigger for the transition of the fluctuation pattern selection state, is completed. The selected state is switched to the next selected state when the last inning of the selected state, which is the trigger for the transition of the selected state, is started. The reason is that in a parallel machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the variable display of one special symbol is used as the final variable display of the selected state. If the variation display of the other special symbol is started during the process, the variation pattern selection state must be switched at the start of the variation display of the final round, or the line is displayed during the variation display of the final round. This is because the variation display of the other special symbol is processed in the selected state, and the variation pattern selection state is substantially continued beyond the specified number of times. Therefore, by switching to the next selected state in advance at the start of the final variable display of the selected state, even if the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the final variable display. , The variation display of the other special symbol can be processed in the next selection state, and the substantial extension of the variation pattern selection state can be prevented.

<Direction mode>
The effect mode of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, a normal mode, a chance mode, a summit decisive battle mode, a general decisive battle mode, and a result mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, such as a game state or a variable pattern selection state. Depending on the situation, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. Basically, the normal mode is set when the game state is the normal game state, the chance mode is set when the game state is the time-saving game state, and the summit decisive battle mode is set when the game state is the probability change game state. Is set, and when the game state is the latent game state, the general decisive battle mode is set. In addition, when the variation display of the last round of the time-saving game state becomes the deviation display, the effect mode is switched from the chance mode to the result mode. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the last round of the time-saving game state becomes the fluctuation display of the big hit, the chance mode continues as it is without switching the effect mode from the chance mode to the result mode. That is, when the electric support state ends when the variation display of the last round of the time-saving game state becomes the deviation display of the last round, the result mode is set in the variation display of the final round. When this result mode ends, the staging mode switches to the normal mode.

As a modification, the order of transitions of the effect mode may be changed according to the operating state of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, when the variation display of the last round of the time-saving game state is the variation display of the deviation of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the final round). When (variation display of the 29th rotation) is being executed, the chance mode continues as it is, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol (the variation display of the final round). When it is, it shifts from the chance mode to the result mode. On the other hand, when the variation display of the last round of the time-saving game state is the variation display of the outlier of the second special symbol, the mode shifts from the chance mode to the result mode without depending on the variation display of the first special symbol.

<Variation pattern>
Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the fifth embodiment will be described. 106 to 114 are schematic views showing a variation pattern table of the special symbol of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 106 to 114, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. The number of operation hold balls (“hold 0”, “hold 1-2”, “hold 3”) shown in each figure is the first special if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol. It means the number of operation-holding balls of the symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold-digestion). (Number of). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold-digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In addition, during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and in particular, a period in which a fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation display in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state is selected) A common variation pattern table may be used regardless of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in that case, in particular, the common variation pattern table may be used when selecting the outlier variation pattern. It is desirable, that is, when selecting the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern, the first Since the types of special games that can be executed may differ depending on the special symbol and the second special symbol, it is desirable not to use a common variation pattern table in order to select the variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game. When selecting the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This configuration is performed during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and in particular, a period in which a fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation display in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state is selected). In the case of, regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold digestion) in the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, and in the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol. Regardless of the number of operation-holding balls (the number of operation-holding balls after hold digestion) of the second special symbol, it is desirable to use a common fluctuation pattern table, that is, when selecting an out-of-order fluctuation pattern. It is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the number of reservations, and when the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is selected, the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol. And the second special symbol do not use a common variation pattern table, but the selection tendency of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is common regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is desirable that the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Further, "using a common variation pattern table" here may mean that one variation pattern table is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. Although the fluctuation pattern table is divided between the second special symbol and the second special symbol, it may mean that the contents of each fluctuation pattern table (selected fluctuation pattern candidates, their selection rate, etc.) are the same.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 106 to 114 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disparity without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach outliers". In this non-reach outlier, the variation modes are different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time for the shortened variation than the normal variation and the ultra-shortened variation than the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If different decorative symbols are temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the remaining one row (generally the middle row), it will be "missing". It is a reach production that becomes a "big hit".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N Reach, and has evolved from N Reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action are displayed. It is a reach production. In the present embodiment, as the types of SP reach, SP reach A, SP reach B, SP reach C, melee reach, one-horse riding reach, total attack reach, special mission reach, and the like are prepared.

"Ultra-long fluctuation" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to an extremely long time. "Immediate hit" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time, and immediately after the start of the fluctuation display, the "big hit" or "small hit" is immediately obtained without going through the reach state.

The "irregular hit effect" is a special symbol of the person who is not the main player of the game in the currently executing game state (effect mode) (in the normal game state, the second special symbol is the time-saving game state, the probabilistic game state, and the submarine. It is an effect that suggests or notifies that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol) is a big hit (irregular hit) in the case of a certain game state. This irregular hit effect is an effect of switching the background image of the effect mode during the current stay to display a special background (irregular background) (details will be described later).

The "result effect" is an effect that suggests that the electric support state (continuous villa state) ends during the final variation display of the time-saving game state (electric support state). During the execution of this result production, the information on the number of consecutive villas and the information on the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villas are displayed. The number of consecutive villas information is information on the number of consecutive big hits in the consecutive villas. The cumulative prize ball number information is information on the cumulative value of the prize ball numbers obtained during the consecutive villas. More specifically, it is the number of prize balls obtained by entering the large winning opening 54 and / or entering the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game that occurred during the consecutive villa. The number of prize balls obtained by entering the general winning openings 61 to 63, the first starting opening 51, and the second starting opening 52 during the execution of the special game that occurred in Does not include the number of prize balls obtained by entering the large winning opening 54 and / or entering the general winning opening 64 in the state where is not executed, and in addition, a special game in the consecutive villa is executed. It does not include the number of winning balls obtained by entering the general winning openings 61 to 63, the first starting opening 51, and the second starting opening 52 in the absence state. In addition, the consecutive villa (ream villa state) is a gaming state during the non-special gaming state, without returning to the non-specific gaming state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. , A state in which the specific game state continues (a state in which a big hit in the specific game state occurs continuously after the first hit). In addition, the specific game state is a game state in which the probability of transition to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state. It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In this example, the specific gaming state means at least a gaming state in which the electric chew support function is operating (a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game). As a modification, the information on the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may include not only the number of prize balls described above but also the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to include only the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game won in the latent game state (in the small hit game won in the time saving game state or the probability variation game state). It is preferable not to include the number of prize balls won).

"Number of people determination production", "Rogue battle reach", "One-horse riding reach", "Total attack reach", and "Special mission reach" are productions that are performed when the production mode currently being executed is the summit battle mode ( Details will be described later). The special mission reach is a production that suggests that the production mode will enter the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) from the summit decisive battle mode (details will be described later).

Although not specified in the figure, a pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream effect) may be performed. In the "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variated during the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. It is an effect that makes it look like (pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-variation effect, pseudo-continuous variation effect, re-variation effect). In this pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times in which all of the three rows of decorative symbols start to change or re-change, and then temporarily stop or definitely stop. The number of pseudo-variations is also referred to as "pseudo-continuous number". Then, it is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits. In addition, of the three columns of decorative symbols, the left and right columns of decorative symbols are in the non-reach state when the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempai) and then re-change. The expectation of a big hit is higher than when it fluctuates again after a temporary stop at.

(Variation pattern table 0)
FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 0. The variation pattern table 0 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 0. The contents of the variation pattern table 0 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Five types of fluctuation patterns PH0-1 to PH0-5 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 0 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", one of four types of fluctuation patterns PH0-1 to PH0-4 is selected according to the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different types of fluctuation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH0-5 (ultra-long variation) is selected. As a modification, a plurality of types of PH0-5 (ultra-long fluctuation) may be provided, and in such a configuration, 10 types of PH0-5 (ultra-long fluctuation) are provided, and the fluctuation time of each is 10 minutes. , 11 minutes, ... 19 minutes, and so on.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA0-1 to PA0-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 0 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA0-1 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. .. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA0-2 (irregular hit effect) does not depend on the big hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA0-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Is selected. As a modification, a plurality of types of PA0-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) may be provided, and in such a configuration, 10 types of PA0-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) are provided, and the fluctuation time of each is 10 minutes. , 11 minutes, ... 19 minutes, and so on.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 107 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 1. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Two types of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-2 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without this, only the fixed variation pattern PH1-1 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH1-2 (ultra-long variation) is selected. As a modification, a plurality of types of PH1-2 (ultra-long fluctuation) may be provided, and in such a configuration, 10 types of PH1-2 (ultra-long fluctuation) are provided, and the fluctuation time of each is 10 minutes. , 11 minutes, ... 19 minutes, and so on.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 1 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. .. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (irregular hit effect) does not depend on the big hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Is selected. As a modification, a plurality of types of PA1-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) may be provided, and when configured as such, 10 types of PA1-3 (ultra-long fluctuation) are provided, and the fluctuation time of each is 10 minutes. , 11 minutes, ... 19 minutes, and so on.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 108 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 2. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Four types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern. Without, only the fixed variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", one of four types of fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-4 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the contents of the reference table are according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). Is set to be different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random value is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is one or more, the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and PH2- 2 (shortening variation) is easy to select, and when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. Is easy to select.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Will be done. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (immediate hit) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 3. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Only one type of variation pattern PH3-1 is set in the variation pattern table 3 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without this, only the fixed variation pattern PH3-1 (result effect) is selected. Similarly, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern can be used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH3-1 (result staging) is selected.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Will be done. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (result effect) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 4. The contents of the variable pattern table 4 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Three types of fluctuation patterns PH4-1 to PH4-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 4 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Instead, only the fixed variation pattern PH4-2 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol changes regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The fluctuation pattern PH4-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) or PH4-3 (SP reach C: draw) is selected according to the pattern random value.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 4 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA4-3 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", if the big hit type is "10R specific big hit", the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 (SP reach C: victory) is selected and the big hit type. If is "5R normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern PA4-2 (SP reach C: defeat) is selected. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA4-4 (immediate hit) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected. In addition, as an effect corresponding to this fluctuation pattern PA4-4 (immediate hit), a special effect indicating that a small hit has been won (for example, "small hit" as a decorative symbol in the middle row when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops. A production in which the decorative symbol described as "Stops", a production in which a ally character appears for a moment at the start of the small hit game, and N pieces of game balls entering the large winning opening 54 during the small hit game "N pieces" It has an effect of displaying "ball!"), But this special effect is not executed in other immediate fluctuation patterns (immediate hit fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit winning in a fluctuation pattern table other than the fluctuation pattern table 4). ..

In addition, "SP reach C" in the figure is configured as a battle production (battle production between generals) in which the general of the ally character and the general of the enemy character play against each other in the general battle mode (small hit RUSH). In the figure, "SP reach C (victory)" suggests that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display when the general of the ally character wins the general of the enemy character, and the jackpot type wins the specific jackpot. It will be a production development to notify. "SP Reach C (defeat)" is an effect that suggests or notifies that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display when the general of the ally character is defeated by the general of the enemy character, and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot. It will be deployed. "SP reach C (draw)" is an effect development that suggests or notifies that the deviation is confirmed in the fluctuation display by drawing the general of the ally character with the general of the enemy character.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 5. The contents of the variable pattern table 5 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Eight kinds of fluctuation patterns PH5-1 to PH5-8 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Without, only the fixed variation pattern PH5-3 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuates without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). One of eight types of fluctuation patterns PH5-1 to PH5-8 is selected according to the pattern random value.

Seven types of fluctuation patterns PA5-1 to PA5-7 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA5-4 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", and if the big hit type is "10R specific big hit", the fluctuation pattern PA5-1 (number determination production → turbulent battle reach → one-horse riding reach → victory) ) Or PA5-2 (number determination production → melee reach → total attack reach → success) is selected, and if the jackpot type is “5R normal jackpot”, the fluctuation pattern PA5-3 (number determination production → melee reach → one horse riding) Reach → Defeat) is selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A", the fluctuation pattern PA5-5 (special mission reach: success) or PA5-6 If (number determination effect → special mission reach: success) is selected and the big hit type is “small hit B”, the variation pattern PA5-7 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 6. The contents of the variable pattern table 6 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, missed).

Two types of fluctuation patterns PH6-1 to PH6-2 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 6 for disconnection. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Instead, only the fixed variation pattern PH6-1 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuates without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The variation pattern PH6-1 (normal variation) or PH6-2 (SP reach B) is selected according to the pattern random value.

Three types of fluctuation patterns PA6-1 to PA6-3 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 6 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA6-2 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA6-1 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Will be done. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA6-3 (immediate hit) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Be selected.

(Variation pattern table 7)
FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 7. The variation pattern table 7 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 7. The contents of the variable pattern table 7 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, missed).

Six types of fluctuation patterns PH7-1 to PH7-6 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 7 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Instead, only the fixed variation pattern PH7-1 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuates without depending on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). One of six types of fluctuation patterns PH7-1 to PH7-6 is selected according to the pattern random value.

Seven types of fluctuation patterns PA7-1 to PA7-7 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 7 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA7-4 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", and if the big hit type is "10R specific big hit", the fluctuation pattern PA7-1 (number determination production → turbulent battle reach → one-horse riding reach → victory) ) Or PA7-2 (Number of people determination production → Raging battle reach → Total attack reach → Success), and if the jackpot type is “5R normal jackpot”, the fluctuation pattern PA7-3 (Number of people determination production → Raging battle reach → One horse riding) Reach → Defeat) is selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A", the fluctuation pattern PA7-5 (special mission reach: success) or PA7-6 If (number determination effect → special mission reach: success) is selected and the big hit type is “small hit B”, the variation pattern PA7-7 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 8)
FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 8. The variation pattern table 8 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 8. The contents of the variable pattern table 8 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (big hit, small hit, miss).

Two types of fluctuation patterns PH8-1 to PH8-2 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 8 for detachment. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", it depends on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern. Instead, only the fixed variation pattern PH8-1 (normal variation) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3) or the random value of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is used. Independently, only the fixed variation pattern PH8-2 (special mission reach (success)) is selected. As a modification, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2) is the same as that of the second special symbol. / 3) or the special symbol variation pattern It may be configured so that only the fixed variation pattern PH8-2 (special mission reach (success)) is selected without depending on the random value.

Four types of fluctuation patterns PA8-1 to PA8-4 are set in the fluctuation pattern table 8 for big hits. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed fluctuation pattern PA8-3 (irregular hit effect) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. To. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", and if the big hit type is "10R specific big hit", the fluctuation pattern PA8-1 (number determination production → melee reach → one-horse riding reach → victory ) Is selected, and if the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", the variation pattern PA8-2 (number determination production-> melee reach-> one-horse-riding reach-> defeat) is selected. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "small hit", the fixed fluctuation pattern PA8-4 (special mission reach (success)) does not depend on the small hit type or the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. )) Only are selected.

Here, in FIGS. 111, 113, and 114, in each of "one-horse riding reach-> victory" and "total attack reach-> victory", the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display when the ally character wins the enemy character. However, it is a production development that suggests or notifies that the jackpot type has won a specific jackpot. "One-horse riding reach-> defeat" is a staging development that suggests or notifies that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and the jackpot type is usually won as a jackpot. "One-horse riding reach-> draw" and "total attack reach-> draw" are staging developments that suggest or notify that the deviation is confirmed in the fluctuation display by drawing with the enemy character by the ally character. Therefore, when it develops into a total attack reach, it is decided that it will be a "specific jackpot" or "missing" (in other words, it is denied that it will be a "normal jackpot"). The details of the one-horse riding reach and the total attack reach will be described later.

Further, in FIGS. 111, 113, and 114, "special mission reach (success)" and "special mission reach (failure)" are all pseudo-conditions for shifting to the general battle mode (small hit RUSH). As a special mission reach, the player is presented with a predetermined command that the effect result should exhibit a specific aspect. This special mission reach is an effect that is performed when the effect mode is the summit decisive battle mode, and suggests that the mode shifts to the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH). "Special mission reach (success)" is a production that suggests that the mission (predetermined command) is successful and the general decisive battle mode is entered after the end of the fluctuation display. "Special mission reach (failure)" is a production that suggests that the mission (predetermined command) fails and the current production mode (top battle mode) continues even after the end of the fluctuation display. In the present embodiment, as a predetermined command, a command is ordered as to whether the general of the ally character can meet the general of the enemy character. In other words, in the special mission reach, if the prescribed command can be achieved (when both generals can meet), the mission will be successful, and the mode will shift to the general decisive battle mode, and the prescribed command cannot be achieved. (If the two generals cannot meet), the mission will fail, and the fluctuation display will end and the message will be "missing". In the present embodiment, when the production mode is the summit decisive battle mode, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is "small hit", and "small hit A" is selected as the small hit type, or the special symbol When the number of fluctuations displayed in the above reaches the specified number of times (100) (when the number of fluctuations displayed in the final round of the electric support state is reached), the special mission reach (success production) is executed. On the other hand, when the production mode is the summit decisive battle mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is "missing", a special mission reach (failure production) can be executed as a production of Gase. There is. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is "big hit", the special mission reach (success effect, failure effect) is not executed regardless of the big hit type.

In addition, this special mission reach may be performed when the number-of-person determination effect described later is executed (any of the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns PH5-8, PA5-6, PH7-6, PA7-6). If is selected, a special mission reach will be executed after the number determination effect is completed). That is, in that case, it is confirmed that the special mission reach will be started when the general of the ally character and the general of the enemy character participate in the battle at the same time in the number determination effect. In other words, as a flow of production, when a friendly general and an enemy general participate in the number determination production, after the end of this number determination production, it shifts to a special mission reach, and the friendly general and the enemy general meet. The mission production progresses with the predetermined command as to whether or not it can be done. If this special mission reach is a successful production, it will be confirmed that the mode will shift to the general decisive battle mode at the start of the next variable display. Then, in the variable display in this general decisive battle mode, when the above-mentioned SP reach C is developed, the general decisive battle production (final decisive battle production) in which the ally general and the enemy general decide the victory or defeat is executed. On the other hand, the special mission reach may be executed without going through the number determination effect (among the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns PH5-7, PA5-5, PH7-5, PA7-5, PH8-2, PA8-4. If any of the above is selected, the special mission reach will be executed without going through the number determination effect). In that case, this special mission reach is executed when a specific display mode is produced by a predetermined advance notice effect (a dialogue advance notice effect described later). Specifically, it is determined that when a specific character (general of a friendly character, general of an enemy character) is displayed in this dialogue advance notice effect, it develops into a special mission reach.

In this embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the stop display time (design fixed time) of the special symbol. The stop display time of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "fixed symbol time") is the time during which the variable display of the special symbol ends and the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the state in which the special symbol is completely stopped and displayed is maintained). Time). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time and the stop display time (design fixed time) of the decorative symbol are set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the stop display time (design fixed time) of the special symbol. Therefore, in the following, when the term "stop display time (design fixed time)" is used, the stop display time of the special symbol (design fixed time) and the stop display time of the decorative symbol (design) are used, except in special cases. It shall refer to both fixed time).

<Ordinary design lottery>
Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery of the fifth embodiment will be described. The ordinary symbol lottery of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61 described above, similarly to the ordinary symbol lottery of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support When the function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is set. When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time of the normal symbol (fixed display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "opening for 1 second → closing for 2 seconds → closing for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open → close for 2 seconds → open for 1 second", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated. That is, as an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds". As a modification, in addition to the second starting port 52 (ordinary electric accessory 522), the second second starting port (on the right side of the game board 20 and upstream or downstream of the large winning opening 54) corresponding to the second special symbol It is arranged on the side and can always accept game balls without providing an ordinary electric accessory, but the ball enters per unit time from the second starting port 52 when the ordinary electric accessory 522 is opened in the high base state. A second second starting port) with a low expected value may be provided, and in such a configuration, the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating for the hit probability of the normal symbol. In the case, set it to "1/1000" or "0 (no hit)", and if the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is operating, set it to "1 / 1.01" and set it to electric. When the chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating, that is, in the normal game state or the latent game state, the ball is entered into the second starting port 52 (normal electric accessory 522). While making it difficult, it may be possible to allow the ball to enter the second second starting port instead. With this configuration, when the large winning opening 54 is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port 52 (ordinary electric accessory 522), the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the ordinary symbol) operates. In a part of the case where the small hit game is not performed frequently, that is, in a latent game state in which a game ball is acquired by frequently causing a small hit game, the ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 by opening the normal electric accessory 522. Can be prevented from being hindered (the ball enters the second starting port 52 before reaching the large winning opening 54). In the normal game state, which is a part of the case where the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol takes a relatively long time (as described above). (Because it becomes a super long fluctuation), it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at the second second starting port and aiming at the acquisition of the small hit game in the normal game state (because the time efficiency is very poor). On the contrary, when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is activated, that is, in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened to enter the large winning opening 54. Since the ball is blocked (the ball enters the second starting port 52 before reaching the large winning opening 54), it is possible to suppress the acquisition of the winning ball by the small hit game, that is, the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state. It is possible to prevent excessive acquisition of prize balls in.

<Decorative design / Auxiliary design>
Next, the decorative design of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display area of the decorative symbol and the auxiliary symbol. In the present embodiment, as described above, three rows of display areas (left display area Z1, middle display area Z2, right display area Z3) are provided as variable display areas for decorative symbols, and the left display area Z1 is provided. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol in the left column (left symbol), the decorative symbol in the middle row corresponding to the middle display area Z2 (middle symbol), and the decorative symbol in the right column corresponding to the right display area Z3 (right symbol) change. It is designed to be displayed and stopped. The decorative pattern of this embodiment is composed of a combination of an identification element composed of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. Seven types of numbers "1" to "7" are set as the identification element of the decorative pattern (that is, there are a total of seven types of decorative patterns). Each decorative symbol is arranged in the order of "1" to "7" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, and each display is in the order of "1" to "7" (or the order of "7" to "1") on the screen. It is cyclically displayed or scrolled in the areas Z1, Z2, and Z3, and after "7", it returns to "1" again (or after "1", it returns to "7" again). Hereinafter, the combination of the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped) on the screen of the effect display device 70 is also referred to as a “roll” or a “stop roll”. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the term "stop display" is simply used, it means at least one of temporary stop and fixed stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the variation display of the effect symbol that shows the variation display of the special symbol in a staging manner, the variation display of the auxiliary symbol is prepared in addition to the variation display of the decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, there are a first auxiliary symbol which is an auxiliary symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and a second auxiliary symbol which is an auxiliary symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Here, in the upper left of the screen, as the variable display area of the auxiliary symbol, the first auxiliary symbol display area Z4 for variable display and stop display of the first auxiliary symbol and the second auxiliary symbol are variable display and stop display. A second auxiliary symbol display area Z5 for the purpose is provided. The variable display of the first auxiliary symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second auxiliary symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Each auxiliary symbol is composed of three types of numerical identification elements of "1", "8", and "9" (that is, there are all three types of auxiliary symbols). Each auxiliary symbol is arranged in the order of "1", "8", "9" according to the arrangement of the symbol sequence, and on the screen, the order of "1", "8", "9" (or "9", "9", " It is patrolled or scrolled in the order of "8" and "1"), and after "9", it returns to "1" again (or after "1", it returns to "9" again). When the auxiliary symbol is stopped and displayed at "1", it is confirmed that it is a "small hit", and when the auxiliary symbol is stopped and displayed at "8", it is confirmed that it is "missing", and the auxiliary symbol is confirmed. When the stop is displayed at "9", it is notified that it is a "big hit". That is, "1" is an auxiliary symbol corresponding to a small hit, "8" is an auxiliary symbol corresponding to a miss, and "9" is an auxiliary symbol corresponding to a large hit.

Here, FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the effect mode and the variable display of the effect symbols (decorative symbol, auxiliary symbol). In FIG. 116, the presence or absence of variable display of the staging symbols (decorative symbol, auxiliary symbol) performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is defined according to the type of the staging mode. .. First, the variable display of the decorative symbol is basically executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game, in the effect mode during the current stay. .. When the effect mode is the normal mode (when the variable display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the symbol. When the staging mode is the chance mode, the summit decisive battle mode, or the general decisive battle mode (when the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game), the decorative symbol fluctuates corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The display is performed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, when the effect mode is the result mode, the result of the game (result screen) in the electric support state is displayed, so that the decoration is made corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the design is not performed (the variable display of the decorative design is not performed at all).

On the other hand, the variable display of the first auxiliary symbol and the second auxiliary symbol is always executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol without depending on the effect mode during the current stay. That is, in the variable display of the first auxiliary symbol and the second auxiliary symbol, the gaming state is basically a non-special gaming state (in this embodiment, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, a probabilistic gaming state, and a latent probabilistic gaming state). ), It is executed synchronously with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of the presence or absence of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the special symbol of the person who is not the main player of the game in the effect mode during the current stay (when an irregular hit occurs), as described above, the background image corresponding to the effect mode. Is switched to a special background image (a background image that suggests or notifies the occurrence of irregular hits). That is, during the irregular display, only the special background image is displayed without executing the decorative symbol variation display, the advance notice effect, the look-ahead effect, etc. (However, the auxiliary symbol variation display is performed). .. As shown by "-" in FIG. 116, when a big hit is made in the result mode, neither the decorative symbol nor the auxiliary symbol is displayed. However, as a modification, if it is the first special symbol, the first auxiliary symbol is displayed. The symbol (or the first auxiliary symbol and the special background image) may be displayed, and if it is the second special symbol, the second auxiliary symbol (or the second auxiliary symbol and the special background image) may be displayed.

<Simultaneous fluctuation processing>
Subsequently, simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing. In the fifth embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol display device 71 performs the first special. A specification (a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long period of time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Therefore, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit fluctuation display". The fluctuation display of is called "off-the-fly fluctuation display". In addition, in FIG. 117 (A), when the first special symbol stops the big hit first, the second special symbol does not change the big hit, so that the second special symbol in the "big hit stop" of the first special symbol The "big hit fluctuation display" of the design is indicated by "-". Further, in FIG. 117 (B), when the second special symbol stops the jackpot first, the first special symbol does not change in the jackpot, so that the first special symbol in the "big hit stop" of the second special symbol The "big hit fluctuation display" of the design is indicated by "-". Further, in FIG. 117 (B), since the first special symbol does not display the small hit fluctuation display, all the “small hit fluctuation display” of the first special symbol is indicated by “−”.

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of one special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display, the small hit fluctuation display, or the missed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variation display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of the above reaches a preset predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuating forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, one of them. In the situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Previously, when the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol was completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol was set in advance, and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). At the end of the jackpot variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated even before reaching. When the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a jackpot fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is regarded as an outlier fluctuation display. (That is, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol is a big hit, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with the missed one, and the missed variable display is displayed).

<Judgment flag for simultaneous fluctuation processing>
Next, the determination flag of the simultaneous fluctuation processing will be described. FIG. 118 is a diagram used to explain the determination flag used in the simultaneous fluctuation processing. In the RAM of the effect control board 200, a plurality of types of format flags A1, A2, B, C, D1, D2 for effectively controlling simultaneous fluctuations (parallel fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. It is stored.

First, among the plurality of types of determination flags, flag A1, flag A2, flag B, and flag C will be described. Flag A1, Flag A2, Flag B, and Flag C are turned on / off when the electric support state ends (when the special symbol that is the main body of the game switches from the second special symbol to the first special symbol). It is a judgment flag to be set.

119 to 122 are time charts showing the setting timings of the flag A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C. In the following, as the end time of the electric support state, the end time of the time saving game state will be described as an example. As described above, this electric support state (time saving game state) ends when the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 30 times. In the variation display of the 1st to 29th rotations in the electric support state, the effect mode is set to the chance mode, and in the variation display of the 30th rotation in the electric support state (final variation display), the effect mode is set to the result mode. (However, if the result of the final hit / fail judgment is incorrect). Then, when the 30th rotation variation display (final variation display) ends, the effect mode can be shifted to the normal mode. In this embodiment, switching of the effect mode at that time, switching of the background image, switching of the special symbol that is the display main body of the decorative symbol, etc. are realized by on / off control of the flags A1, the flag A2, the flag B, and the flag C. is doing. In addition, in order to make it easier to understand the technical significance of this embodiment (flag control) more clearly, the technical idea disclosed in this embodiment is added below. Here, as the terms shown below, "information A" corresponds to flags A1 and A2, "information B" corresponds to flag B, and "information C" corresponds to flag C.
As an embodiment of the technical idea disclosed in this embodiment,
The variable display of the first symbol (first special symbol) and the variable display of the second symbol (second special symbol) can be executed in parallel at the same time.
On the staging display device, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first symbol or the second symbol can be variablely displayed and stopped and displayed.
The decorative symbol corresponding to the first symbol can be displayed in a variable manner when the game state is a low probability state and a normal ball entry state, while the second symbol is a second symbol when the game state is a low probability state and a ball entry easy state. The decorative pattern corresponding to can be displayed in a variable manner.
When the total number of fluctuation display times of the first symbol and the second symbol reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the low-probability state and the easy-to-enter state, the transition to the low-probability state and the normal ball-entry state is performed. Configured,
When the total number of variation display times of the first symbol and the second symbol reaches a predetermined number after shifting to the low probability state and the easy-to-enter state, the variation display of the predetermined number of times is the variation display of the first symbol. And information A indicating which of the fluctuation displays of the second symbol is set during the predetermined number of fluctuation displays.
Information B indicating that the effect mode can be switched can be set when the variation display of the predetermined number of times is completed.
When the variation display of the first symbol is started as the variation display of the predetermined number of times during the variation display of the second symbol, and the variation display of the predetermined number of times ends earlier than the variation display of the second symbol. Information B is not set when the variation display of the predetermined number of times ends, but information B is set when the variation display of the second symbol ends.
Information B can be canceled when the variation display of the first symbol, which is started after the variation display of the predetermined number of times is completed, is started after the variation display of the predetermined number of times is completed.
When the variation display of the first symbol is started as the variation display of the predetermined number of times during the variation display of the second symbol, and the variation display of the predetermined number of times ends earlier than the variation display of the second symbol. The setting of the information B is canceled when the variation display of the first symbol, which is started after the variation display of the second symbol is completed, is started after the variation display of the second symbol is completed. It is composed of.

(Flag A1)
The flag A1 is a determination flag indicating that the final variation display of the electric support state is the variation display of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 119, when the fluctuation display of the final round of the electric support state is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the flag A1 is set to on when the fluctuation display of the final round starts, and the final round Flag A1 is set to off when the variable display of is finished. That is, the flag A1 is a determination flag that is turned on during the final variation display of the electric support state (during the variation display of the first special symbol).

(Flag A2)
The flag A2 is a determination flag indicating that the final variation display of the electric support state is the variation display of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 120, when the fluctuation display of the final round of the electric support state is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the flag A2 is set to on when the fluctuation display of the final round starts, and the final round Flag A2 is set to off when the variable display of is finished. That is, the flag A2 is a determination flag that is turned on during the final variation display of the electric support state (during the variation display of the second special symbol). As shown in FIG. 121, when the variation display of the 29th rotation is the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the last round is the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When the variable display of the second special symbol ends later than the variable display of the first special symbol, the flag A1 is set to on when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, and the first special symbol is exceptionally set. Flag A1 is set to off and flag A2 is set to on when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, and flag A2 is set to off when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed. That is, when the variation display of the first special symbol in the final round is completed and the variation display of the second special symbol in the 29th rotation is in progress, the flag A2 is turned on instead of turning off the flag A1. Then, the fluctuation display of all 30 rotations in the electric support state is not completed, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate in the electric support state (the fluctuation display mainly in the electric support state) Indicates that it has not finished. That is, it can be said that the flags A1 and A2 are determination flags indicating that the fluctuation display of all 30 rotations started during the electric support state is completed / not completed in each on / off situation.

(Flag B)
The flag B is a determination flag indicating that the effect mode can be switched to the normal mode when the electric support state ends. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the flag B is set to be turned on when the final variation display of the electric support state is completed, and after the final variation display is completed (from the electric support state to non-electricity). After shifting to the normal game state, which is the support state), when a new variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol, which is the main body in the normal game state, which is the non-electric support state) starts. Set to off. As shown in FIG. 121, when the variation display of the 29th rotation is the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the final round is the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation of the final round. When the fluctuation display at the 29th rotation ends later than the display, the flag B is exceptionally set when the fluctuation display at the 29th rotation ends, not when the fluctuation display at the final rotation ends. Set to on. In other words, the variation display of all 30 rotations started during the electric support state is completed (the variation display of the second special symbol that started to change in the electric support state (the main variation display in the electric support state) is completed. With this as an opportunity, flag B is set to on.

(Flag C)
Flag C is a decorative symbol that is performed after the final variable display of the electric support state is completed, on the premise that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special symbol of the player who is the main player of the game. Is a determination flag indicating whether the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When "1" is set in the flag C, it indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. When "2" is set in the flag C, it indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. When "0" is set in the flag C, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not correspond to either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol (variation of the decorative symbol). Indicates a state in which the display is restricted or a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed). As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the flag C is set to "1" when the final variation display of the electric support state is completed. That is, this flag C is set to "1" in synchronization with the setting of flag B to be turned on, and it is possible to shift to the normal mode when a new variation display of the first special symbol is performed. It indicates that there is, and that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal mode. However, as shown in FIG. 122, the variation display of the first special symbol is the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol at the 29th rotation starts at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol of the final round. If the display is not performed, the flag C is set to "1" (not synchronized with the flag B) when the variation display of the first special symbol of the last inning is started. That is, the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol at the 29th rotation is not performed at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the final round means that all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol have already been performed at that time. Since it means that the game has been digested, and after the final variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation display of the first special symbol should be the main body of the game, so flag C is set. By advancing the timing of setting to "1", it is possible to smoothly advance the switching control of the effect mode. However, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol in the final round, even if the flag C is set to "1" during the variation display, the flag C is not set to "1" before the start of the variation. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the decorative symbol is hidden. As a modification of the present embodiment, the flag C may be configured as a determination flag that is always used in the non-special gaming state. That is, even if it is configured as a determination flag indicating whether the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponds to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the currently executing game state or the effect mode. good. In addition, in the 1st to 29th rotations of the electric support state (cumulative number of times of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol), the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is performed. From the end of the special game (after the end of the special game) before the start of the first rotation to the start of the 29th rotation (immediately after the start) of the electric support state, the flag C is set to "2" and the electric support state is set. In order not to display the decorative symbol at the 30th rotation (cumulative number of times of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol), the flag C is set to "0" at the start (after the start) of the 29th rotation in the electric support state. It may be configured to be set to "(change flag C from" 2 "to" 0 ").

Subsequently, the flag D1 and the flag D2 will be described. Flags D1 and D2 are turned on / off when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol that is not the main player of the game in the game state during the current stay is a big hit (referred to as "irregular hit"). Judgment flag.

123 to 124 are time charts showing the setting timings of the flags D1 and D2. Here, FIG. 123 shows a case where the variable display of the first special symbol draws a jackpot of the second special symbol in the game state (normal game state) in which the game is the main body, and FIG. 124 shows the case where the second special symbol has a big hit. The case where the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the game state (specific game state: time-saving game state, probabilistic game state, latent probable game state) in which the variable display is the main subject of the game is shown.

(Flag D1)
Flag D1 is a big hit when the special symbol of the player who is the main player of the game is the second special symbol in the game state during the current stay, and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol of the person who is not the main player of the game is a big hit (a). It is set to on when it becomes (per regular). That is, the flag D1 is turned on when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit when the current gaming state is the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state or probabilistic gaming state). It is a determination flag to be set, and is a determination flag to be set to be turned on when the variation display per irregular (variation display of the first special symbol) is started. When the flag D1 is set to on, the flag D1 is set to off when the variation display per irregular (variation display of the first special symbol) is completed. When the variation display per irregular (variation display of the first special symbol) and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time, the variation display per irregular is performed before the end. 2 Even if the variation display of the special symbol ends, the flag D1 is not set to off, and the flag D1 is set to off when the variation display per irregular (variation display of the first special symbol) ends. .. In the situation where the flag D1 is set to on (during the execution of the variation display per irregular of the first special symbol), when the variation display of the second special symbol is started (flag D1 is set to on). When the second special symbol starts the variable display during the process (when the variable display of the second special symbol is started), the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (the variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden). do). However, before the flag D1 is set to on (before the variation display per irregular of the first special symbol is started), the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and this flag D1 is set to on. If the variable display of the second special symbol continues after that (when the second special symbol is in the variable display when the flag D1 is set to ON), the second special symbol is displayed. Executes the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of (The variable display of the decorative symbol is not hidden). As described above, the variable display of the auxiliary symbol is always executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol without depending on the operating state (display / non-display) of the decorative symbol. ..

(Flag D2)
Flag D2 is a big hit when the special symbol of the player who is the main player of the game is the first special symbol in the game state during the current stay, and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol of the person who is not the main player of the game is a big hit (a). It is set to on when it becomes (per regular). That is, the flag D2 is a determination flag that is set to be on when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit when the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and is a variation per irregular. This is a determination flag that is set to be on when the display (variation display of the second special symbol) starts. When the flag D2 is set to on, the flag D2 is set to off when the variation display per irregular (variation display of the second special symbol) is completed. When the variation display per irregular (variation display of the second special symbol) and the variation display of the first special symbol are performed at the same time, the first variation display per irregular is performed before the end. 1 Even if the variation display of the special symbol ends, the flag D2 is not set to off, and the flag D2 is set to off when the variation display per irregular (the variation display of the second special symbol) ends. .. In the situation where the flag D2 is set to on (during the execution of the variation display per irregular of the second special symbol), when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (flag D2 is set to on). When the first special symbol starts the variable display during the process (when the variable display of the first special symbol is started), the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (the variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden). do). However, before the flag D2 is set to on (before the variation display per irregular of the second special symbol is started), the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and this flag D2 is set to on. If the variable display of the first special symbol continues after that (when the first special symbol is in the variable display when the flag D2 is set to ON), the first special symbol is displayed. Executes the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of (The variable display of the decorative symbol is not hidden). As described above, the variable display of the auxiliary symbol is always executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol without depending on the operating state (display / non-display) of the decorative symbol. ..

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 124, when the flag D1 or the flag D2 is set to on, the pre-reading execution flag and the pre-reading execution schedule flag are set to off, and the flag D1 or the flag D2 is currently being executed. If the look-ahead effect is canceled (cancelled), or if the look-ahead effect is scheduled to be executed even if the look-ahead effect is not currently executed (for example, if the look-ahead execution schedule flag is set to on), the schedule is set. Cancel (cancel) (for example, set the look-ahead execution schedule flag to off) and do not execute the advance notice lottery in general (including the look-ahead lottery). That is, when the flag D1 or the flag D2 is set to on (when an irregular hit occurs), the execution of the look-ahead effect and the advance notice effect is restricted until the flag D1 or the flag D2 is set to the off. do. The “look-ahead executing flag” is a determination flag indicating that the look-ahead effect is being executed (the look-ahead effect is actually being executed). That is, the look-ahead executing flag is set to on when the look-ahead effect is started, and the look-ahead running flag is set to off when the look-ahead effect is finished. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-reading executing flags corresponding to a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are prepared, and a plurality of types of pre-reading effects and a plurality of types of pre-reading executing flags are associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship. Has been done. The “look-ahead execution schedule flag” is a determination flag indicating that the look-ahead effect is scheduled to be executed (the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined by the look-ahead lottery). That is, the pre-reading execution schedule flag is set to on when the pre-reading effect is determined to be executed by the pre-reading lottery, and the pre-reading execution schedule flag is set to off when the execution of the pre-reading effect is started. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of look-ahead execution schedule flags corresponding to a plurality of types of look-ahead effects are prepared, and a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and a plurality of types of look-ahead execution schedule flags are associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship. Has been done. When an irregular hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol occurs in this way, the background image becomes a special background image (for example, seven stars) when the variable display per irregular hit is started. The screen is switched to a screen where the shining screen is gradually covered with light, a screen displayed in the big hit end demo in a special game when it is not an irregular hit, etc.), and that screen is continuously displayed until the end of the variable display, and it is displayed. Execution of other effects (pre-reading effect, notice effect) other than the above will be restricted. As a special background image, for example, a large character "great opportunity state" may be displayed on the screen. It should be noted that this special background image is a common image regardless of whether it is an irregular hit of the first special symbol or an irregular hit of the second special symbol, regardless of the type of the effect mode during the stay. (Screen). Here, the reason for limiting other effects is that when an irregular hit occurs, a special background image suggesting or notifying the occurrence of the irregular hit is displayed during the execution of the fluctuation display, so that a notice effect or pre-reading is performed. This is because even if the production is performed, the effect of the production cannot be fully exerted, and the production may be uncoordinated. If an irregular hit of one special symbol occurs, or if there is a movable accessory that is operating at the start of the variable display (a movable accessory that is operating with respect to the variable display of the other special symbol), The operation of the movable accessory is interrupted and returned to the initial position (reference position).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 102 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal mode, a chance mode, a result mode, a summit decisive battle mode, and a general decisive battle mode are set as a plurality of types of production modes.

<Normal mode>
First, the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on after pressing the RAM clear switch is set to the normal mode regardless of the type of the effect mode before the power is turned on, and the game is started from this normal mode. To. The pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch is set to the same effect mode as the effect mode before the power is turned on. The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal game state (low probability low base state). When the effect mode is the normal mode, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the player hits left ( (By launching the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes playful. In this normal mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the winning probability of "5R specific big hit" is 50% and "5R normal big hit 1" is 50% as the big hit type of the first special symbol. Occurs in. When the jackpot type is "5R specific jackpot", the production mode shifts to the summit decisive battle mode after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot 1", the effect mode shifts to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in this normal mode, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn, there is a 50% chance of shifting to the summit decisive battle mode, and a 50% chance of shifting to the chance mode.

<Chance mode>
The chance mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability high base state), that is, an effect mode corresponding to a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated. When the staging mode shifts to the chance mode, the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. By letting the game ball enter the second starting port 52, the game property is such that the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. In this chance mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the winning probability of "10R specific jackpot" is 50% and "5R normal jackpot 2" is 50% as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. It occurs with the winning probability of. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot", the production mode shifts to the summit decisive battle mode after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot 2", the staging mode shifts to the chance mode again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in this chance mode, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, there is a 50% chance of shifting to the summit decisive battle mode, and a 50% chance of shifting to the chance mode.

The chance mode basically continues from the end of the big hit game until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 29 times. Then, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 29 times without the next big hit in this chance mode, the mode shifts to the result mode or chance at the start of the next fluctuation display (variation display at the 30th rotation). The mode continues. That is, when the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation is off or the fluctuation display of a small hit, the mode shifts to the result mode. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display at the 30th rotation is the fluctuation display of the big hit, the chance mode is continued.

<Result mode>
The result mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability high base state), that is, an effect mode corresponding to a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated. In this result mode, the change display of the last round of the electric support state (the change display of the 30th rotation of the electric support state) is limited to one rotation. During the stay in the result mode, as described above, the result of the game during the consecutive villas (result screen) is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is hidden. Since this result mode is an effect mode that shifts from the chance mode when the fluctuation display of the last round of the electric support state is out of order, a big hit does not occur while staying in the result mode (electric support state). This is because if a big hit occurs at the 30th rotation of, the chance mode is not changed to the result mode. However, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not performed after the 30th rotation of the electric support state, the probability is low. Although it is in the base state, if it looks like it does not shift to the normal mode and continues to stay in the result mode, and if it becomes a big hit with the second special symbol, it is exceptionally an irregular hit effect during the result mode. Will be done). Then, when the final variation display of the electric support state is completed, the mode falls to the normal mode. In the 10-turn variation display (opening 10 variation display) after shifting to the normal mode, "selection state 1" is set as the variation pattern selection state, and "selection state 0" is set as compared with the case where "selection state 0" is set. , It becomes easy to select a fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation) with a relatively long fluctuation time. When the variation display of 10 rotations (opening 10 variation display) is completed, the variation pattern selection state is switched to "selection state 0" while staying in the normal mode. As a modification of this embodiment, the 10-turn variation display (opening 10 variation display) after the transition to the normal game state (after the end of the electric support state) is changed to an effect mode (special mode) different from the normal mode. It may be configured to stay.

<Summit decisive battle mode>
The summit decisive battle mode is a staging mode corresponding to a probabilistic game state (high probability and high base state). When the staging mode shifts to the summit decisive battle mode, the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. By firing), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. In this summit decisive battle mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the winning probability of "10R specific jackpot" is 50% and "5R normal jackpot 2" is 50 as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. It occurs with a winning probability of%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot", the production mode shifts to the summit decisive battle mode again after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot 2", the effect mode shifts to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in this summit decisive battle mode, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, there is a 50% chance of shifting to the summit decisive battle mode and a 50% chance of shifting to the chance mode.

The summit decisive battle mode basically continues from the end of the jackpot game until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times. Then, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in this summit decisive battle mode, the electric support state ends at the start of the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation, and the general decisive battle mode Move to. In addition, if the result of the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a small hit while staying in this summit decisive battle mode, the small hit type is "small hit A" with a winning probability of 3% and "small hit B". It occurs with a 97% chance of winning. If the small hit type is "small hit A", the electric support state ends at the start of the small hit game, and the mode shifts to the general decisive battle mode.

<General battle mode>
The general decisive battle mode is a staging mode corresponding to the latent game state (high probability low base state). When the production mode shifts to the general decisive battle mode, the electric chew support function does not operate. Therefore, it is normally recommended to hit the left side aiming at the first starting port 51, but in this embodiment, this low Even in the base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 52 is set to be relatively high, and the small hit game frequently occurs when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (small hit RUSH). ) Is performed, it is better to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 by hitting right than to let the game ball enter the first starting port 51 by hitting left, and as a result, the second It is a game playability that independently executes the pass / fail judgment of the special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). In this general decisive battle mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, the winning probability of "10R specific jackpot" is 50% and "5R normal jackpot 2" is 50 as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. It occurs with a winning probability of%. When the jackpot type is "10R specific jackpot", the staging mode shifts to the general battle mode again after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot 2", the effect mode shifts to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in this summit decisive battle mode, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn, there is a 50% chance of shifting to the general decisive battle mode and a 50% chance of shifting to the chance mode. The playability of this general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) will be described below.

<Playability of small hit RUSH>
Next, the playability of the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) will be described. In the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH), a small hit is frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball being inserted into the second starting port 52, and the small hit is made until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate hit games continuously and intensively.

When the effect mode is the general decisive battle mode (latent game state), when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent game state (low base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. Further, in this latent game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.05), and the first when the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol is used. The fluctuation display of is finished in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 is during the closing operation of the normal electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds or during the 1st to 3rd opening operations (interval). In addition, it is easy to reach the grand prize opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric accessory 522 (movable member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the large winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol, and until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player can play. Can advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the staging mode is the chance mode or the summit decisive battle mode (short-time game state or probabilistic game state), the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit. Is set to be extremely short, so that small hit games are likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the playability of the small hit RUSH to the general decisive battle mode (latent game state) and to suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game in the production modes other than the general decisive battle mode, the following Such measures have been taken.

Specifically, when the staging mode is the chance mode or the summit decisive battle mode (short-time game state or probabilistic game state), when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, there is an extremely high probability (1/1) in the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. The hit is derived in 0.01). In this gaming state (high base state), if the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving game state or the probability variation game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.05), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. high.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened to the opening operation is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for the game ball to enter the 522 (in other words, since the period during which the second starting port 52 is closed is short, the period during which it is difficult to enter the second starting port 52 is short. Therefore, the number of game balls heading to the big winning opening 54 without entering the second starting opening 52 is very small). That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 located downstream of the object 522. Therefore, when the staging mode is the chance mode or the summit decisive battle mode (short-time game state or probabilistic game state), even if small hits occur frequently in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol, the game ball is the big winning opening 54. It is extremely unlikely that the player will reach the limit, and it will be extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by the small hit game.

Even when the effect mode is the normal mode (normal game state), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.05) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes in this embodiment), the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming at a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digestion of the second special symbol is very low, and the small hit game cannot be frequently performed.

<End timing of electric support state>
Next, the end timing of the electric support state will be described. FIG. 125 is a time chart for explaining the end timing of the electric support state. In the present embodiment, a time-saving game state and a probabilistic game state are provided as game states corresponding to the electric support state, but in the following, the end timing of the probabilistic game state is exemplified as the end timing of the electric support state. I will explain.

In the present embodiment, the game state currently being executed is a probabilistic game state, the electric support state ends when the small hit A is won, and the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed a predetermined number of times (100 times). ) May be reached and the electric support state may end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the electric support state ends when the small hit A is won, and the electric support when the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times). It is configured so that the timing at which the state ends is different.

(Electric support end timing triggered by small hit winning)
FIG. 125 (A) is a time chart when the electric support state ends when the small hit A is won. As shown in FIG. 125 (A), when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit A is selected as the small hit type. , The electric support state ends at the start of the small hit game performed after the small hit variation display of the second special symbol ends. That is, when the small hit A is won, the electric support state ends at the end of the symbol fixed time after the small hit fluctuation display ends, that is, at the start of the small hit game, and the game shifts to the latent game state. do. Therefore, the game state at the time of winning the small hit A is the probabilistic game state (electric support state), but the game state during the small hit game is the latent game state (non-electric support state). Since the timing at which the production mode is switched is synchronized with the timing at which the game state is switched, the production mode is switched to the general battle mode (small hit RUSH) internally at the start of the small hit game. , It is at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation after the end of the small hit game that the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) is notified. In other words, in effect, the general decisive battle mode will start from the next variable display after the end of the small hit game. (On the screen, the production of the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) is started when the fluctuation display of the first rotation performed after the end of the small hit game is started). The reason for ending the electric support state at the start of the small hit game is that if the electric support state is terminated at the start of the small hit variation display, the opening mode of the second starting port 52 during the small hit variation display ( By checking the opening frequency, opening time, etc.), it is found that the electric support state has ended, that is, the small hit A has been won, and it develops into a special mission reach during the small hit fluctuation display. This is because what you do is the first thing to do. As a modification, when the electric support state is terminated when the small hit A is won, the end timing of the electric support state is set, for example, when the small hit variation display is stopped, the small hit variation display is displayed. It may be the timing such as the start of the symbol fixed time and the end of the small hit game.

(Timing of the end of electric support triggered by the number of times digestion)
FIG. 125 (B) is a time chart when the electric support state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). As shown in FIG. 125 (B), when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the number of variation display times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times) after shifting to the probabilistic gaming state. The electric support state ends at the start of the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation. Therefore, during the 100th rotation variation display, the gaming state becomes the latent gaming state. Since the timing at which the production mode is switched is synchronized with the timing at which the game state is switched, the production mode is switched to the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) internally at the start of the variation display at the 100th rotation. However, it is at the end of the 100th rotation variation display or at the start of the next variation display that the general decisive battle mode (small hit RUSH) is notified. In other words, the general decisive battle mode is practically started from the next variable display (on the screen, after the end of the 100th rotation variable display, the next variable display is started, and the general decisive battle mode (on the screen). Small hit RUSH) production will start). Even if the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation is the fluctuation display of the small hit A, the electric support state ends at the start of the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation (variation display of the small hit A). become. Here, the reason for ending the electric support state at the start of the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation is that if the electric support state is terminated at the end of the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation, the electric support state is terminated during the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation. If the support state continues and the change display of the other special symbol is started during the change display, the change display of the other special symbol becomes the change process in the electric support state, and the execution period of the electric support state. Is substantially extended (because the number of executions of the electric support state is extended to the 101st rotation).

<Transition of game state during parallel fluctuation>
Next, the transition of the gaming state at the time of parallel fluctuation in the probabilistic gaming state will be described. FIG. 126 is a time chart showing a state transition when the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state.

(1st special symbol: specific big hit, 2nd special symbol: small hit A)
FIG. 126 (A) shows a state transition when the variation display of the specific big hit of the first special symbol is started during the variation display of the small hit A of the second special symbol. When the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the variation display of the specific jackpot of the first special symbol starts during the variation display of the small hit A of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the specific jackpot A of the second special symbol is performed first. When the variation display ends, the electric support state ends at the start of the small hit game, and the state shifts to the latent probability game state (small hit RUSH). In this latent game state, during the execution of the small hit game, the fluctuation display of the specific big hit of the first special symbol is interrupted by the above-mentioned fluctuation interruption process, and when the small hit game is completed, the first special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display of the specific jackpot is resumed. Further, during the variable display of the specific jackpot of the first special symbol, only "missing" is derived as a result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol by the above-mentioned jackpot non-lottery process (small hit does not occur). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which small hits of the second special symbol occur frequently and the number of balls to be ejected increases during the fluctuation display of the specific big hit performed in the latent game state (small hit RUSH), and the player can play. It is possible to optimize the profits to be obtained (balance the profits of the player and the game store due to irregular events). Then, when the variation display of the specific jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the game shifts to the jackpot game (the game state during the jackpot game becomes a low probability low base state). At this time, with respect to the specific jackpot of the first special symbol, since the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (at the start of fluctuation) is the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is again set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. It will be set. That is, by pulling the small hit A of the second special symbol, even if the player enters the latent game state (most advantageous game state) at the start of the small hit game, the first special is displayed during the fluctuation display of the small hit A. If a specific jackpot of the symbol is drawn, the latent probability game state ends at the start of the jackpot game, and the probability change game state is entered after the jackpot game ends.

(1st special symbol: normal big hit, 2nd special symbol: small hit A)
FIG. 126 (B) shows a state transition when the fluctuation display of the normal big hit of the first special symbol is started during the fluctuation display of the small hit A of the second special symbol. When the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the fluctuation display of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol starts during the fluctuation display of the small hit A of the second special symbol, and the small hit A of the second special symbol is displayed first. When the variation display ends, the electric support state ends at the start of the small hit game, and the state shifts to the latent probability game state (small hit RUSH). In this latent game state, during the execution of the small hit game, the fluctuation display of the normal big hit of the first special symbol is interrupted by the above-mentioned fluctuation interruption process, and when the small hit game is completed, the first special symbol is displayed. Normally, the jackpot fluctuation display is resumed. During the fluctuation display of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, only "missing" is derived as a result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol by the above-mentioned jackpot non-lottery process (small hit does not occur). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which small hits of the second special symbol occur frequently and the number of balls to be ejected increases during the fluctuation display of the normal big hit performed in the latent game state (small hit RUSH). It is possible to optimize the profits to be obtained (balance the profits of the player and the game store due to irregular events). Then, when the fluctuation display of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the game shifts to the jackpot game (the game state during the jackpot game becomes a low probability low base state). The game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the time-saving game state without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit (at the start of fluctuation). That is, by pulling the small hit A of the second special symbol, even if the player enters the latent game state (most advantageous game state) at the start of the small hit game, the first special is displayed during the fluctuation display of the small hit A. If the normal jackpot of the symbol is drawn, the latent game state ends at the start of the jackpot game, and the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the power off / return of the gaming machine is restored, the power off / return command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the staging control board 200 as described above. In this power-off / return command, various information such as the game state at the time of power-off and the variation pattern selection state are stored as the game information at the time of power-off. This power off / return command is transmitted regardless of whether the player is in the special gaming state or the non-special gaming state when the power is turned off. Therefore, not only when the power is cut off during the fluctuation display, but also when the power is cut off during the big hit game or the small hit game, the power off / returning command is transmitted when the power off is restored. Become. At this time, in the case of power off / return during the big hit game, the game state is "low probability low base state" and the fluctuation pattern selection state is "selected state" as the game information stored in the power off / return command. Information that specifies that it is "0" is added. On the other hand, in the case of power-off / recovery during a small hit game, information for specifying the game state to stay at the time of power-off and the fluctuation pattern selection state is added as the game information stored in the power-off / return command. That is, during the big hit game, the game state and the variable pattern selection state are switched to the default state, but during the small hit game, the game state and the variable pattern selection state at the start of the small hit game are maintained. Here, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the electric support state ends (shifts to the latent probabilistic gaming state) when the small hit A is won. The gaming state during the winning game is the "high probability low base state", and the variable pattern selection state is the "selection state 7". Therefore, in the case of power off / return during the small hit game, the game state is "high probability low base state" and the variation pattern selection state is "selection" as the game information stored in the power off / return command. Information that specifies that the state is 7 is added. In the present embodiment, there are "selection state 0" and "selection state 1" as fluctuation pattern selection states corresponding to the low-probability low-base state, but the power failure recovery command during the jackpot game is always in the "selection state". 0 "is specified. In the case of power off / return during a big hit game, the game state is "low probability low base state" as the game information stored in the power off / return command regardless of the game state in which the big hit is made. While information is added to specify that there is, and that the variation pattern selection state is "selection state 0", in the case of power off / returning during the small hit game, which game state the small hit was made in? Which information is added as information for designating the game state and the variation pattern selection state is configured differently according to the above. Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the probability change game state, as described above, the game state is "high probability low base state" as the game information stored in the power off / return command. , And information that specifies that the variable pattern selection state is "selection state 7" is added, but if the game state at the time of winning the small hit is a game state other than the probability change game state, it is the game state. The information that specifies that (for example, if a small hit is made in the time-saving game state, the game state is the "low probability high base state"), and the variable pattern selection state corresponding to the game state (for example). , When a small hit is made in the third rotation of the time-saving game state, the information for specifying the variation pattern selection state is "selection state 2") is added.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko gaming machine PM of the fifth embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. It is configured in. In the following, among various game productions, "special battle production", "line notice production", and "special cut-in production" will be described.

<Special battle production>
First, the special battle production will be described. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special battle production. This special battle production is performed when the production mode is the summit decisive battle mode, and a battle production in which a plurality of ally characters and a plurality of enemy characters compete against each other is executed.

As shown in FIG. 127, the special battle production includes a number determination effect, a melee reach, and a development effect (total attack reach, one-horse riding reach). Basically, the number determination effect → the melee reach → the development effect. The production progresses in the order of.

(Direction to determine the number of people)
The number-of-person determination effect includes a ally character determination effect and an enemy character determination effect. The ally character determination effect is an effect that determines the ally characters and their number of participants in the melee reach from all eight ally characters (X1 to X8). The enemy character determination effect is an effect of determining the enemy characters participating in the melee reach and the number of them from among all eight enemy characters (Y1 to Y8). The number of ally characters participating (the number of people participating in the melee reach) is determined in the range of 3 to 7. Similarly, the number of enemy characters participating (the number of people participating in the melee reach) is also determined in the range of 3 to 7. The combination of the number of participants of this ally character and the number of participants of the enemy character may be the same number of participants or different numbers of participants. Of the eight ally characters (X1 to X8), a specific ally character (X8) is set as a general on the ally side. Further, among the eight enemy characters (Y1 to Y8), a specific enemy character (Y8) is set as a general on the enemy side. In the present embodiment, when the melee reach is executed, it is prohibited that the ally general (X8) and the enemy general (Y8) do not participate in the battle at the same time in the number determination production. In other words, the friendly general (X8) and the enemy general (Y8) are not selected at the same time as the participating members of the melee reach. The reason for this is that in the present embodiment, when a friendly general and an enemy general participate in the battle at the same time in the number determination production, it is confirmed that the special mission reach will be developed without developing into a melee reach. (In other words, when developing into a special mission reach by pretending to develop into a melee reach, a friendly general (X8) and an enemy general (Y8) are selected at the same time. It is a specification that special effects are executed). Therefore, in the number determination production that triggers the execution of this melee reach, a prohibition is placed so that the general of the ally and the general of the enemy do not participate in the war at the same time, and it does not develop into a special mission reach production (development to the melee reach). Is secured. In the present embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character are configured to participate only before the reach (before the turbulent battle reach) in the number determination effect, but as a modification, the ally character and the enemy character participate in the battle before the reach (the turbulent battle reach). It may be configured to participate at a maximum of three timings: before), immediately before the reach is established (immediately before the start of the melee reach), and after the reach (in the middle of the melee reach).

FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the number-of-person determination effect. On the screen, an ally character display area 751 for displaying the icons of eight ally characters (X1 to X8) and an enemy character display area 752 for displaying the icons of eight enemy characters (Y1 to Y8) are provided. Has been done. Each icon is set to the off state in advance. Then, when the ally character determination production is started, the icons of the ally characters participating in the melee reach are switched to the lighting state one by one according to the order of participation, and the ally characters participating in the melee reach and their number are notified to the player. Will be done. Similarly, when the enemy character determination effect is started, the icons of the enemy characters participating in the melee reach are switched to the lit state one by one according to the order of participation (displayed in bright light), and the enemy characters participating in the melee reach and theirs. The number of players is notified to the player. In the figure, the hatched icon indicates that it is in the lit state, and the non-hatched icon indicates that it is in the off state. Therefore, in the illustrated example, four friendly characters (X1, X3, X5, X6) and three enemy characters (Y2, Y4, Y8) are participating in the war. The icons of these ally characters and enemy characters are continuously displayed even during the melee reach, and the icons of the characters defeated in the melee reach (battle production) change from the lit state to the off state (darkened). ). The order of participation of the ally character and the enemy character is determined by the character pattern lottery described later.

(Reach)
The Melee Reach is a reach production that develops after the number-determining production is performed. This melee reach includes multiple battle renditions in which a friendly character and an enemy character play against each other. Each battle production is a production in which one of the ally characters who participated in the battle reach and one of the enemy characters who participated in the battle reach play a one-on-one match. The battle rule of this battle production determines the victory or defeat for each battle production, and the winning character will appear in the next battle production as it is, while the losing character will not appear in the next battle production. , It is a so-called winning method in which the next character on the losing side is replaced. Under this winning battle, the battle production continues until either the ally character or the enemy character becomes one. Then, when the ally character or the enemy character becomes one, the melee reach ends. When this melee reach ends, it branches into a one-horse riding reach or a total attack reach as a development effect. In this embodiment, the production scale (execution time) in the melee reach (multiple battle productions) is set to the same time regardless of the number of people at the start of the war and the number of people at the end of the war (for example, the battle). Even if the number of people at the start is "6-7", which is larger than "3-4", if it is "6-7", the battle production time can be shortened or multiple people can be defeated at once, which will be described later. The production scale until the transition to the development production is set to be the same as the case of "3-4").

(Development production)
Development renditions include total attack reach and one-ride reach. In the present embodiment, it develops into a one-horse-riding reach or a total attack reach depending on the effect result of the melee reach. The effect result of this melee reach is a combination of the number of ally characters and the number of enemy characters at the end of the melee reach (the number of enemies and allies remaining in the melee reach to the end). In other words, the "number of people at the end of the turbulent battle", which will be described later, corresponds to the production result of the turbulent battle reach. Here, as a result of the production of the melee reach, when there is one ally character and a plurality of enemy characters, it develops into a one-horse riding reach after the execution of the melee reach. On the other hand, as a result of the melee reach, when there are a plurality of ally characters and one enemy character, the total attack reach is developed after the melee reach is executed.

The one-horse-riding reach is a reach production in which one ally character remaining in the melee reach and a plurality of enemy characters play against each other. In other words, the one-horse-riding reach is a reach effect that branches when there is only one ally character. Depending on the battle result of this one-horse riding reach, the result of the hit / fail judgment in the variation display is suggested. That is, in the one-horse riding reach, if the ally character wins the enemy character, it is confirmed that the "specific jackpot" is won, and if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, it is confirmed that the "normal jackpot" is won. When the enemy character draws, the "off" is confirmed.

The total attack reach is a reach effect in which a plurality of ally characters remaining in the melee reach and one enemy character play against each other. That is, the total attack reach is a reach effect that branches when the enemy character becomes one person. Depending on the battle result of this total attack reach, the result of the hit / fail judgment in the fluctuation display is suggested. That is, when the ally character wins, it is confirmed that the "specific jackpot" has been won, and when the ally character and the enemy character are drawn, the "missing" is confirmed. As described above, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit in the probabilistic game state (general decisive battle mode), as shown in FIG. 111 etc., when the big hit type is "specific big hit", the total attack The reach variation pattern can be selected, but when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", the total attack reach variation pattern is not selected. Therefore, it is denied that the "normal jackpot" has been won when the total attack reach is developed (when the number of enemy characters becomes one) during the execution of the variable display.

As a modification of this embodiment, when two or more ally characters remain at the end of the melee reach and the combination of the plurality of ally characters is a specific combination, the total attack reach does not develop. In addition, it may be configured to develop into a special reach (for example, a high expectation reach that is more likely to be a "specific jackpot" than a total attack reach but is not a jackpot confirmed). The "specific combination" means, for example, a combination of specific ally characters. As an example, it is a combination composed of two or more characters among specific ally characters X5 to X8. Further, as another modification, the combination of the ally character and the enemy character at the end of the melee reach is a predetermined combination, or the combination of the ally character and the enemy character during the melee reach (battle combination) is a predetermined combination. In some cases, it may be configured to develop into a special reach (for example, a premier reach that is a big hit confirmed production) without developing into a one-horse riding reach and a total attack reach. The "predetermined combination" is, for example, a combination including a friendly character and an enemy character having a special relationship. As an example, there is a combination including the ally character X1 and the enemy character Y1, or a combination including the ally character X2 and the enemy character Y2. It is preferable that the specifications are such that it is confirmed that the 10R specific jackpot (maximum profit jackpot) has been won at the time of development to this premier reach.

≪Lottery process for special battle production≫
Next, the lottery process for the special battle production will be described. FIG. 129 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the lottery process of the special battle effect. In this embodiment, lottery processing is performed in the order of (1) random battle scenario lottery → (2) winning / losing order lottery → (3) character pattern table lottery → (4) character pattern lottery (competition order lottery) → (5) participation order lottery. Is executed to determine the specific content (directing mode) of the special battle production.

(1. Melee scenario lottery)
First, a turbulent battle scenario that defines a scenario for special battle production is determined. FIG. 130 is a schematic diagram showing a melee scenario table. In this turbulent battle scenario table, the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle and the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle are defined as the scenario of the turbulent battle reach (the turbulent battle scenario). In the present embodiment, referring to this turbulent battle scenario table, one turbulent battle scenario (the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle and the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle) is selected from a plurality of types of turbulent battle scenarios (combination of the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle and the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle). Combination with the number of people) is selected by lottery.

The number of people at the start of the melee is a combination of the number of friendly characters and the number of enemy characters at the start of the melee reach. For example, "5-3" as the number of people at the start of the battle in the figure indicates that the number of friendly characters at the start of the battle reach is 5 and the number of enemy characters is 3. The number of people after the end of the melee is a combination of the number of friendly characters and the number of enemy characters at the end of the melee reach. For example, "4-1" as the number of people at the end of the battle in the figure indicates that the number of friendly characters is four and the number of enemy characters is one at the end of the battle reach. The number of people at the start of a turbulent battle is basically determined in the range of "3-3" to "7-7". In other words, the number of ally characters participating at the start of the melee reach is selected from the range of "3 to 7", and the number of enemies participating at the start of the melee reach is also within the range of "3 to 7". Is selected from. In this embodiment, when the number of friendly characters or enemy characters at the start of participation is "3" to "7", the general of the friendly character or the general of the enemy character is not always selected. (Details will be described later). On the other hand, the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle is set so that either the ally character or the enemy character is "1 person". This is to determine the branch destination of the development effect according to the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle (whether the ally character or the enemy character became one).

In addition, unlike the lottery process of this special battle production, in the lottery processing of the number of people determination production performed as an opportunity to execute the special mission reach, the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle is "5-1", "7-2", "8". Only "-3", "1-4", "2-7", and "3-8" are set. In other words, when executing a special mission reach, select "1 person", "2 people" or "8 people" as the number of participants of the ally character or the enemy character, and the lottery process (win / loss order lottery, character) described later. Instead of going through the pattern lottery and the entry order lottery), the general of the ally character and the general of the enemy character are selected by another lottery process. In the present embodiment, when the number of friendly characters or enemy characters at the start of participation is "1", "2", or "8", the general of the friendly character or the general of the enemy character is always used. It is configured to be selected (details below).

(2. Win / Loss order lottery)
Then, based on the number of people at the start of the battle and the number of people at the end of the battle determined in the battle scenario lottery, the order of victory or defeat (order of victory or defeat) of the ally characters in the battle reach is determined by lottery. This winning / losing order is determined based on the difference between the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle and the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle (number of people at the start of the turbulent battle-number of people at the end of the turbulent battle) with reference to the winning / losing order table (not shown). The "difference" means the number of defeats and the number of wins of a ally character in the melee reach (the number of subtracted ally characters and enemy characters in the melee reach). For example, if the number of people at the start of the battle is "5-3" and the number of people at the end of the battle is "4-1", the difference between the two is "1-2". In other words, this difference is that a total of 3 battle effects occur, the number of defeats of the ally character is "1", and the number of wins is "2 times" (one of the ally characters is subtracted by the defeat, and the number of wins is "2". It means that two of the enemy characters are subtracted by defeat). In this case, the winning / losing order of the ally character is one of "victory->victory->defeat","win->defeat->victory", and "defeat->victory->victory". One of them will be selected by lottery. That is, in the winning / losing order table (not shown), the selection candidates of the winning / losing order of the ally character are defined for each difference between the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle and the number of people at the end of the turbulent battle. From the winning / losing order, one winning / losing order is selected by lottery.

(3. Character pattern table lottery)
Next, the ally character pattern table and the enemy character pattern table are determined. FIG. 131 is a schematic diagram showing a character pattern table lottery table.

The character pattern table lottery table defines the correspondence between multiple types of ally character pattern tables 1 to 3 and multiple types of enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3, and one ally character pattern table and an enemy are defined. The combination with the character pattern table is decided by lottery. This character pattern table lottery table is a lottery table for selecting a friendly character pattern table and an enemy character pattern table referred to in the character pattern lottery described later.

The ally character pattern tables 1 to 3 are lottery tables for determining ally character patterns (friend characters participating in the melee reach and their battle order) (see FIG. 132). A plurality of types of ally character patterns are set in each ally character pattern table 1 to 3. Although the details will be described later, the ally character pattern table 1 is a lottery table in which only ally character patterns in a format in which the ally general does not participate in the war are set. That is, this ally character pattern table 1 is a lottery table for ensuring that the ally general does not participate in the melee reach. The ally character pattern table 2 is a lottery table in which only ally character patterns in a format in which it is uncertain whether or not a ally general participates in the war are set. The ally character pattern table 3 is a lottery table in which only the character patterns in which the ally general participates are set. That is, the ally character pattern table 3 is a lottery table for ensuring that the ally general participates in the melee reach.

The enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3 are lottery tables for determining enemy character patterns (enemy characters participating in the melee reach and their battle order) (see FIG. 133). A plurality of types of enemy character patterns are set in each of the enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3. Although the details will be described later, the enemy character pattern table 1 is a lottery table in which only the enemy character patterns in the form in which the enemy general does not participate in the war are set. That is, the enemy character pattern table 1 is a lottery table for ensuring that the enemy general is not allowed to participate in the melee reach. The enemy character pattern table 2 is a lottery table in which only enemy character patterns in a format in which it is uncertain whether or not an enemy general participates in the war are set. The enemy character pattern table 3 is a lottery table in which only the character patterns in which the enemy general participates are set. That is, the enemy character pattern table 3 is a lottery table for ensuring that the enemy general participates in the melee reach.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131, as a combination of the ally character pattern table and the enemy character pattern table, "Friend character pattern table 1-enemy character pattern table 1" and "Friend character pattern table 1-enemy character pattern" are used. One of "Table 2", "Friend character pattern table 1-Enemy character pattern table 3", "Friend character pattern 2-Enemy character pattern table 1", "Friend character pattern table 3-Enemy character pattern table 1" Selected by lottery. That is, the combination of the above character pattern tables is a combination in which a friendly general and an enemy general are not selected at the same time. Therefore, the combination in which one is the character pattern table 2 and the other is the character pattern table 3 (“Friend character pattern table 2-enemy character pattern table 3”, “Friend character pattern table 3-enemy character pattern table 2”) is It is a combination in which a friendly general and an enemy general may be selected at the same time, and a combination of character pattern tables 3 (“friendly character pattern table 3-enemy character pattern table 3”) is a combination of a friendly general and an enemy. These combinations are excluded from the selection candidates because they are always selected at the same time as the general. The reason is that when developing into a melee reach, as mentioned above, both generals do not participate in the war at the same time, and there is a possibility that both generals will be selected. This is because it is necessary to impose a prohibition so that the combination of is not selected.

In addition, when executing a special mission reach, a combination of character pattern tables 3 is used as a combination of character pattern tables for the general of the ally and the general of the enemy to participate in the war by a different lottery different from the main lottery. ("Friend character pattern table 3-enemy character pattern table 3") is selected.

(4. Character pattern lottery)
Then, with reference to the selected ally character pattern table and enemy character pattern table, the ally character pattern and the enemy character pattern are selected by lottery, and the ally character and the enemy character participating in the melee reach and their battle order (melee battle). (Order) is decided. The battle order (turbulent battle order) is the order in which the ally character or the enemy character who participated in the battle battle reach fights in the battle production. This battle order (turbulent battle order) is basically a different order from the above-mentioned entry order, and it is not always the case that the battle is performed in the order in which the battle reach was entered (in this embodiment). , Details will be described later, but the order of participation and the order of battle are exchanged).

(Friend character pattern)
A plurality of types of ally character patterns are set in the ally character pattern tables 1 to 3, respectively. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram showing ally character pattern tables 1 to 3. In the present embodiment, one ally character pattern is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of ally character patterns with reference to the ally character pattern tables 1 to 3 selected in the above-mentioned character pattern table lottery. Then, using the selected ally character pattern, the ally characters participating in the melee reach and their battle order (the order of battle in the battle production) are determined.

The ally character patterns are eight character data arranged in the order of character data A, character data B, character data C, character data D, character data E, character data F, character data G, and character data H in this order from the left. It is composed of. Eight friendly characters (X1 to X8) are assigned to each of the eight character data A to H. That is, in the ally character pattern, eight character data A to H and eight ally characters (X1 to X8) are associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship.

FIG. 134 is a schematic diagram for explaining the structure of the character data A to H. As shown in FIG. 134, the arrangement of the character data A to H is related to the battle order of the ally characters (X1 to X8), and is basically assigned to the character data A in the order from left to right. Ally character → Ally character assigned to character data B → Ally character assigned to character data C → Ally character assigned to character data D → ... → Ally character assigned to character data H, in that order , The battle order of ally characters (X1 to X8) is defined.

In the present embodiment, since the number of ally characters corresponding to the number of people at the start of the turbulent battle participates in the turbulent battle reach, the ally characters corresponding to the number of ally characters are selected as participating members according to the arrangement of the above character data A to H, and the battle order thereof. Is determined. Specifically, out of the eight character data A to H, the number of character data A to H corresponding to the number of people at the start of the battle is selected in order from the right side, and the fellow characters assigned to the character data A to H are selected. Is decided as a participating member who participates in the melee reach. As mentioned above, the battle order of the participating members (friend characters) is faster as the teammate character assigned to the character data on the left side of the eight character data A to H, and the character data on the right side. The battle order is set to be slower as the assigned ally character. For example, when the number of ally characters at the start of a turbulent battle is 5, five character data D to H corresponding to the number of characters are selected in order from the right side, and fellow characters assigned to the character data D to H are assigned. Becomes a member who participates in the Melee Reach. Then, the battle order of the participating members is as follows: the fellow character assigned to the character data D → the fellow character assigned to the character data E → the fellow character assigned to the character data F → The order is as follows: fellow character assigned to character data G → fellow character assigned to character data H.

As mentioned above, the number of ally characters at the start of the turbulent battle is selected in the range of 3 to 7, so the candidates for selection of the participating members are the 1st to 7th character data B to the right. It becomes an ally character assigned to H. In addition, since the number of participating members is at least three, the ally characters assigned to the first and second character data F to H from the right are always as participating members regardless of the number of participants at the start of the battle. Be selected. Further, since the maximum number of participating members is 7, no matter which character pattern is selected, the ally character assigned to the 8th character data A from the right is not selected as the participating member.

Therefore, the ally character pattern to which the ally general (friend character X8) is assigned to the character data A is a character pattern in which the ally general (friend character X8) is not selected as a participating member. Therefore, by setting only the ally character pattern to which the ally general (friend character X8) is assigned to the character data A in the ally character pattern table 1, the ally general (friend character X8) will not participate in the war. Is secured. On the other hand, the ally character pattern to which the ally general (friend character X8) is assigned to the character data G or H is a character pattern in which the ally general (friend character X8) is always selected as a participating member. Therefore, by setting only the ally character pattern to which the ally general (friend character X8) is assigned to the character data G or H in the ally character pattern table 3, the ally general (friend character X8) can participate in the war. Is secured. On the other hand, in the ally character pattern table 2, a ally character pattern in which a ally general (friend character X8) is assigned to character data A and a ally general (friend character X8) are assigned to any of the character data B to F. The ally character pattern that has been created and the ally character pattern to which the ally general (ally character X8) is assigned to the character data G or H are mixed, and the ally general (ally character X8) is selected as a participating member. It is uncertain whether or not.

(Enemy character pattern)
A plurality of types of enemy character patterns are set in the enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3, respectively. FIG. 133 is a schematic diagram showing enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3. In the present embodiment, one enemy character pattern is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of enemy character patterns with reference to the enemy character pattern tables 1 to 3 selected in the above-mentioned character pattern table lottery. Then, using the selected enemy character pattern, the enemy characters participating in the melee reach and their battle order (the order of battle in the battle production) are determined.

The enemy character patterns are eight character data arranged in the order of character data A, character data B, character data C, character data D, character data E, character data F, character data G, and character data H in this order from the left. It is composed of. Eight enemy characters (Y1 to Y8) are assigned to each of the eight character data A to H. That is, in the enemy character pattern, eight character data A to H and eight enemy characters (Y1 to Y8) are associated with each other in a one-to-one relationship.

As shown in FIG. 134 above, the arrangement of the character data A to H is related to the battle order of the enemy characters (Y1 to Y8), and is basically assigned to the character data A in order from left to right. Enemy character assigned → Enemy character assigned to character data B → Enemy character assigned to character data C → Enemy character assigned to character data D → ... → Enemy character assigned to character data H, In that order, the battle order of the enemy characters (Y1 to Y8) is determined.

In the present embodiment, since the number of enemy characters corresponding to the number of people at the start of the battle will participate in the battle reach, the enemy characters corresponding to the number of characters are selected as participating members according to the arrangement of the above character data A to H, and the battle order thereof. Is determined. Specifically, out of the eight character data A to H, the number of character data A to H corresponding to the number of people at the start of the battle is selected in order from the right side, and the enemy characters assigned to the character data A to H are selected. Is decided as a participating member who participates in the melee reach. As described above, the battle order of the participating members (enemy characters) is such that the enemy character assigned to the character data on the left side of the eight character data A to H has a faster battle order, and the character data on the right side. The battle order is set to be slower as the assigned enemy character. For example, when the number of enemy characters at the start of a turbulent battle is 5, five character data D to H corresponding to the number of characters are selected in order from the right side, and the enemy characters assigned to the character data D to H are selected. Becomes a member who participates in the Melee Reach. Then, the battle order of the participating members is as follows: the enemy character assigned to the character data D → the enemy character assigned to the character data E → the enemy character assigned to the character data F → The order is as follows: the enemy character assigned to the character data G → the enemy character assigned to the character data H.

As mentioned above, the number of enemy characters at the start of the battle is selected in the range of 3 to 7, so the candidates for selection of the participating members are the 1st to 7th character data B to the right. It becomes the enemy character assigned to H. In addition, since the number of participating members is at least three, the enemy characters assigned to the first and second character data F to H from the right are always as participating members regardless of the number of participants at the start of the battle. Be selected. Further, since the maximum number of participating members is 7, no matter which character pattern is selected, the enemy character assigned to the 8th character data A from the right is not selected as a participating member.

Therefore, the enemy character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data A is a character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is not selected as a participating member. Therefore, by setting only the enemy character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data A in the enemy character pattern table 1, the enemy general (enemy character Y8) will not participate in the war. Is secured. On the other hand, the enemy character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data G or H is a character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character X8) is always selected as a participating member. Therefore, the enemy general (enemy character Y8) can participate in the enemy character pattern table 3 by setting only the enemy character pattern to which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data G or H. Is secured. On the other hand, in the enemy character pattern table 2, the enemy character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data A and the enemy general (enemy character Y8) are assigned to any of the character data B to F. The created enemy character pattern and the enemy character pattern in which the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is assigned to the character data G or H are mixed, and the enemy general (enemy character Y8) is selected as a participating member. It is uncertain whether or not.

(5. Participation order lottery)
Then, the order of participation of the ally character and the enemy character is determined by lottery. Here, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing a converted character pattern table. In the present embodiment, the order of participation of the ally character and the enemy character in the melee reach is determined with reference to the converted character pattern table. In the figure, "ID number (converted character pattern number)" is shown in the vertical column, and "converted character data a to h" is shown in the horizontal column. The converted character pattern table is used for both the ally character and the enemy character, and the processing method is the same for the ally character side and the enemy character side. It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the character side or the processing on the enemy character side.

As shown in FIG. 135, a plurality of types of converted character patterns 0 to 58 are set in the converted character pattern table. The converted character pattern table is a lottery table for converting the arrangement of the character data A to H for the selected character pattern to create a new arrangement of the character data A to H. The "array" indicates a predetermined order in which eight character data A to H are arranged from the left column to the right column.

As shown in FIG. 135, the converted character pattern is composed of eight character data a to h. The character data a to h correspond to the converted character data A to H (character data A to H after the arrangement is replaced). That is, in the present embodiment, the array of the converted character data A to H in which the sequences of the character data A to H before the conversion are replaced is treated as the array of the new character data a to h. Here, as described above, the array of character data A to H before conversion defines the battle order of the characters assigned to the character data A to H, but the character data A to H after this conversion are defined. The arrangement of (character data a to h) defines the order of participation of the characters assigned to the character data a to h.

In the present embodiment, one converted character pattern is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of converted character patterns set in the converted character pattern table, and the converted character pattern is converted by referring to the selected converted character pattern. Swap the arrangement of the previous character data A to H. Here, the converted character pattern 0 is a lottery pattern in which the arrangement of eight character data A to H is not converted (the arrangement of the character data A to H is maintained). On the other hand, the converted character patterns 1 to 58 are lottery patterns for converting the arrangement of at least two character data out of the eight character data A to H. Specifically, in the converted character pattern 1, the arrangement of two character data G to H (gh) is the target of conversion, and in the converted character pattern 2, the three character data F to H (f) are converted. The sequences of (h) to h) are the targets of conversion, and the converted character patterns 3 to 11 are the targets of conversion of the four character data E to H (e to h), and the converted character patterns 12 to 25. In, 5 character data D to H (d to h) are the targets of array conversion, and in the converted character patterns 26 to 41, 6 character data C to H (c to h) are array conversion. In the converted character patterns 42 to 58, the arrangement of seven character data B to H (b to h) is the target of conversion. Therefore, when the converted character pattern 0 is selected, the arrangement of the character data A to H is not converted, and the arrangement of the character data A to H is maintained as it is before and after the conversion, but the converted character pattern 1 When any of ~ 58 is selected, the array of character data A to H is converted. In other words, when the converted character pattern 0 is selected, the entry order and the battle order of each character are the same, but when any of the converted characters 1 to 58 is selected, each character's entry order and the battle order are the same. The order of participation and the order of competition are different.

At this time, of the eight character data A to H before conversion, the actual target of the array conversion is the character data to which the characters participating in the melee reach are assigned (the number corresponding to the number of people at the start of the melee). Character data). That is, since the purpose of converting the arrangement of the character data A to H is to exchange the entry order and the battle order of the characters (participating members), the character data corresponding to the participating members (to the number of people at the start of the participation). It suffices if the array of (corresponding number of character data) can be converted. , Because there is a risk of inconsistency in the melee reach scenario. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the types of converted character patterns that are candidates for selection differ depending on the number of people at the start of the war, and when the number of people at the start of the war is 3, the converted character patterns 0 to 2 (the target of conversion is 3 or less) is a candidate for selection, and if the number of people at the start of the war is 4, the converted character patterns 0 to 11 (the target of conversion is 4 or less) are candidates for selection, and the number of people at the start of the war is 5. In that case, the converted character patterns 0 to 25 (conversion target is 5 or less) are candidates for selection, and if the number of people at the start of the war is 6, the converted character pattern 0 to 41 (conversion target is 6 or less). Is a selection candidate, and if the number of people at the start of the war is 7, the converted character patterns 0 to 58 (the conversion target is 7 or less) are the selection candidates.

Next, the arrangement of the character data a to h will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram for explaining the conversion of the arrangement of the character data A to H. The array of eight character data A to H defined for each character pattern is converted into a new array according to the selected converted character pattern. For example, when the converted character pattern 11 is selected, "character data A-> character data B-> character data C-> character data D-> character data E-> character data F-> character data G-> in order from left to right. The sequence of "Character data H" is converted into the sequence of "Character data A-> Character data B-> Character data C-> Character data D-> Character data H-> Character data G-> Character data E-> Character data F" To. That is, when the converted character pattern 11 is selected, the arrangements of the four character data E to H are exchanged ("E-> F-> G-> H" becomes "H-> G-> E-> F". (Replaces with). Then, the converted array is arranged in order from left to right as "character data a-> character data b-> character data c-> character data d-> character data e-> character data f-> character data g-> character data h". Treat as an array of character data a to h. Even if the arrangements of the character data A to H are exchanged, there is no difference in the types of characters assigned to the character data A to H (that is, when the arrangements of the character data A to H are exchanged, the character data A is changed. The characters assigned to each character data A to H will also be replaced in the form associated with ~ H).

Next, a method of determining the entry order of the ally character and the enemy character will be described. FIG. 137 is a schematic diagram for explaining a method of determining the entry order of the ally character and the enemy character. In this embodiment, the number of people at the start of the battle determined by the battle scenario lottery, the characters (participating members) who participate in the battle reach determined by the character pattern lottery, and the character data a of the selected converted character pattern a to The order of participation of each character is determined by the arrangement of h. Specifically, out of the eight character data a to h of the converted character pattern, the number of character data corresponding to the number of people at the start of the battle (character data corresponding to the participating members) is extracted in order from the right side, and the data is extracted. The order of participation of each character is determined according to the arrangement of character data. The entry order of this character is according to the arrangement of character data a to h (a → b → c → ... → g → h). The character data assigned to the character data is set so that the entry order becomes slower. For example, if the number of people at the start of the war determined in the turbulent battle scenario is "4" and the converted character pattern 11 is selected, the four characters corresponding to the number of people at the start of the war (4). Data e, f, g, h (H, G, E, F) are extracted, and according to the arrangement, the character assigned to the character data e (H) → the character assigned to the character data f (G) → the character. The order of participation of the characters is determined in the order of the character assigned to the data g (E) → the character assigned to the character data h (F). That is, the array of character data E to H before conversion (E → F → G → H) corresponds to the battle order of the characters, and the array of character data e to h after conversion (H → G → E → F) corresponds to the character. Corresponds to the order of participation. The characters assigned to the character data E to H are the same characters (characters assigned to the character data E to H of the character pattern selected in the character pattern lottery) before and after the conversion. Become.

As a result of the above lottery process, a melee scenario (number of people at the start of the melee, number of people at the end of the melee), types of ally characters and enemy characters participating in the melee reach, their entry order and battle order are determined, and special according to the scenario. The battle production is executed.

<Speech notice production>
Next, the dialogue notice production will be described. FIG. 138 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the dialogue advance notice effect, and FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the dialogue advance notice effect. The dialogue advance notice effect is a advance notice effect that suggests a jackpot expectation level by a predetermined character uttering a line when the effect button 15 is operated during the execution of the variable display.

The dialogue advance notice production includes a button appearance fanning effect, an operation instruction effect (button effect), and a dialogue display effect. Basically, the effect progresses in the order of button appearance fanning effect → operation instruction effect → dialogue display effect. .. After this dialogue notice production is completed, there are cases where the production shifts to the number-determining production, the transition to the special mission reach, and the variation display ends as it is, resulting in "missing".

The button appearance fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the operation instruction effect (button effect) is started. In this button appearance fanning effect, the silhouette image 761 representing the silhouette of the effect button 15 is displayed in advance on the screen, and then the button image 762 imitating the effect button 15 appears (that is, the operation instruction effect is performed. It will be a production that makes you expect (to be started). In this button appearance fanning effect, when the silhouette image 761 of the effect button 15 gradually changes to the button image 762, the fanning success effect is achieved. On the other hand, in this button appearance fanning effect, if the silhouette image 761 of the effect button 15 fades out from the screen, the fanning fails. When displaying the button image 762, it is not always necessary to execute such a button appearance fanning effect, and the button image 762 may be displayed suddenly without going through the button appearance fanning effect. Here, the button appearance fanning effect may be provided with a plurality of types of display modes, and when configured as such, for example, the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the red effect is more than the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the blue effect. It may be configured so that the possibility of changing to the button image 762 is higher. Further, as another modification, when the button appearance fanning effect is executed, the button image may be changed to 762 without fail, and in such a configuration, it is redder than the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the blue effect. The button appearance fanning effect with the effect may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is higher, or multiple types of button images 762 are provided (including a blue button image and a red button image, and a red button rather than a blue button image. Images are more likely to perform high-expectation notice effects, for example, red line notice effects are easier to execute than blue line notice effects), buttons with blue effects Buttons with red effects rather than fanning effects The appearance fanning effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition to the above, when the button image 762 is always changed to the button image 762 when the button appearance fanning effect is executed, it is longer (for example, 4) than the button appearance fanning effect for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). The button appearance fanning effect of (seconds) may be configured to have a higher expectation for big hits, and the button appearance fanning effect of a short time (for example, 2 seconds) may be longer than the button appearance fanning effect of a long time (for example, 4 seconds). The appearance fanning effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). Further, when the display mode of the button appearance fanning effect is configured to be provided, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after the reach) is better than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before the reach). It may be configured so that the button appearance fanning effect with high expectation can be easily executed, or the button appearance fanning effect is not executed in the first half (predetermined timing before reach) during the variable display, and the latter half during the variable display. It may be configured so that the button appearance fanning effect can be executed only for the part (specific timing after reach).

The operation instruction effect is an effect of instructing the player to operate the effect button 15. During the execution of this operation instruction effect, the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 15 is valid is set. The operation valid period is a period during which the operation is effectively accepted when the effect button 15 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 15" means that when the effect button 15 is operated, the operation of the effect button 15 is effectively accepted by the effect control board 200, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. Means that is done. The predetermined process corresponds to a process of proceeding with the dialogue display effect when the effect button 15 is operated. During this operation valid period, the effect button 15 (LED element built in the effect button 15) is emitted and displayed, and a button image 762 imitating the effect button 15 and the remaining period of the operation valid period are visually displayed on the screen. The indicator image 763 shown in the above is displayed to notify that the operation of the effect button 15 is valid or to prompt the operation input. Further, on the screen, a ring-shaped effect image (referred to as "specific image") 764 that emits sparks is displayed around the button image 762. The specific image 764 gradually expands as the operation valid period elapses. Then, when the effect button 15 is operated during the operation valid period, the process progresses to the dialogue display effect. When the effect button 15 is operated, the display mode of the specific image 764 is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image 764 is a display mode when the specific image 764 is enlarged and displayed to the maximum extent. The operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image 764 is displayed while the button image 762 and the indicator image 763 are being displayed (during the operation valid period). The other button effect (button effect other than the operation instruction effect) is an effect (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image 764 is not displayed while the button image 762 and the indicator image 763 are being displayed (during the operation valid period).

The dialogue display effect is an effect in which a character 765 of any of a plurality of characters (the above-mentioned ally character and enemy character) appears and emits a predetermined line 766. Around the character 765, the specific image 764 is continuously displayed in the final display mode. In this dialogue display effect, a jackpot expectation degree is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the dialogue 766 emitted by the character 765. In this embodiment, three types of display colors of dialogue 766 are set, "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", and a big hit is expected in the order of "blue" <"red" <"giraffe pattern". The degree increases by one step. When the dialogue display effect is started (when the effect button 15 is operated), the button image 762 and the indicator image 763 are hidden, but the specific image 764 is continuously displayed. As a modification of this embodiment, the dialogue display effect may be configured as a step-up type effect. This step-up effect is an advanced effect that changes the effect mode (character and dialogue) step by step according to a predetermined order, and suggests or notifies the high degree of expectation of a big hit according to the number of stages of development. do. For example, the step-up effect is composed of two stage effect steps (SU1, SU2), and the effect mode (character and dialogue) displayed in the first stage effect step SU1 and the second stage effect step. The staging mode (character and dialogue) displayed in SU2 may be different. In addition, in the two-step step of this step-up effect, when both the general of the ally character and the general of the enemy character are displayed, it may be configured to develop into the above-mentioned special mission reach.

Subsequently, an example of the dialogue advance notice production will be described with reference to FIG. 139. In the illustrated example, when the dialogue advance notice production is performed, the production progresses in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D).

As shown in (A) in the figure, when the button appearance fanning effect is started, a silhouette image 761 representing the silhouette of the effect button 15 is displayed on the screen. When the silhouette image 761 gradually changes to a button image and is successfully fanned, the operation instruction effect is started.

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the operation instruction effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 15 is set, the effect button 15 is displayed by light emission, and the button image 762 imitating the effect button 15 is displayed. An indicator image 763 that visually indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period is displayed on the screen. Further, around the button image 762, a specific ring-shaped image (effect image) 764 that emits sparks is displayed. Then, such a display prompts the user to operate the effect button 15 within the button operation valid period.

As shown in (C) in the figure, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image 763 changes with the lapse of the button operation valid period, and the specific image 764 is enlarged and displayed around the button image 762. At this time, if the effect button 15 is operated within the operation valid period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue display effect. At this time, the button image 762 and the indicator image 763 are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image 764 is forcibly changed to the final display mode and is continuously displayed as it is.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the dialogue display effect is started, the character 765 and the dialogue 766 saying "It's a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the display color of the dialogue 766 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. Will be done. Around the character 765 and the dialogue 766, the specific image 764 is continuously displayed in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image 764 straddling the operation instruction effect and the dialogue display effect in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue display effect occurs when the effect button 15 is operated (). It is suggested that this button production is a dialogue preview production).

As a modification of the above-described embodiment, it is more likely that the button appearance fanning effect is executed than the case where the button appearance fanning effect is determined by lottery and the button appearance fanning effect is not executed. The jackpot expectation in the variable display may be configured to be relatively high. In addition, the longer the execution time of the button appearance fanning effect (display time of the silhouette image), the higher the expectation of a big hit in the variable display, or the accuracy of indicating whether or not the big hit is triggered by the button operation. It may be configured to generate a high effect. At that time, when the dialogue notice effect (button appearance fanning effect) is executed at the timing of the winning branch (the specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the above-mentioned fluctuation display), the effect time of the button appearance fanning effect (button appearance fanning effect). It is preferable that the display time of the silhouette image) is set longer than the operation valid period of the effect button 15. Contrary to the configuration, the effect time of the button appearance fanning effect (display time of the silhouette image) may be set shorter than the operation valid period of the effect button 15. Further, as another modification, a plurality of types of display modes (for example, blue button image, red button image, iridescent button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. good. In that case, whether or not the button appearance fanning effect can be executed and the effect time when it is executed may be different depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed thereafter. Further, as a further modification, the dialogue advance notice effect can be executed and the button image can be displayed even during the execution of one or more fluctuation displays (look-ahead fluctuation display) before the operation holding ball to be read ahead is digested. , It is less likely that the button appearance fanning effect will be executed when the look-ahead variation display is being executed than when the variation display (the variation display) is being executed when the operation holding ball to be read ahead is digested. Alternatively, the button appearance with a higher expectation is aroused when the look-ahead variation display is being executed than when the variation display (the variation display) when the operation holding ball to be read-ahead is digested is being executed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the effect (such as the button appearance fanning effect with the red effect as described above or the button appearance fanning effect for a long time (for example, 4 seconds)) is executed. As another modification, the button appearance fanning effect is not executed in the first half (predetermined timing before reach) during the variable display (or the button appearance fanning effect with high expectation is not executed and the button appearance fanning effect with low expectation is not executed. (Or execute the button appearance fanning effect in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) (or execute the high expectation button appearance fanning effect instead of the low expectation button appearance fanning effect). ), The longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds). , The jackpot expectation may be high, or the button image 762 at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, tends to be a high expectation image (for example, a red button instead of a blue button image). It may be configured to be easy to be an image). Further, the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach) is set to the button effect pattern A, and the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) is set to the button effect pattern B. May be good. Further, as will be described in detail later, the timekeeping for displaying the button image 762 at the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the fluctuation display, is started from the start of the fluctuation display, and the second half of the fluctuation display. The timekeeping for displaying the button image 762 at the specific timing after the reach is started from the start of the specific effect (N reach effect or SP reach effect), and is before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display. The time to display the button image 762 at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, is configured to be longer than the time to display the button image 762 at a predetermined timing. May be good.

<Intense heat cut-in production>
Next, the intense heat cut-in effect will be described. FIG. 140 is a time chart showing an example of the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect.

The intense heat cut-in effect is a high-expectation notice effect (so-called intense heat notice effect) in which the characters "extreme heat" are cut in during the execution of the variable display.

Multiple types of timings are set for the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect, such as before reach (before the reach state is formed) and after reach (after the reach state is formed), and the fluctuation is being displayed. It can be executed at any of the timings. That is, the intense heat cut-in effect is executed as a pre-reach notice or a post-reach notice. The execution timing before reach includes the execution of pseudo-series such as pseudo 1 variation, pseudo 2 variation, and pseudo 3 variation. The execution timing after the reach includes the time when the SP reach develops, the time when the hit branch is made, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the execution period of the intense heat cut-in effect may overlap with the execution period of the button effect. In the following, "overlapping execution periods" means that one execution period (execution timing) and the other execution period (execution timing) overlap, and the entire execution period (or execution timing) of both overlaps. It is used in the concept including the case where they overlap and the case where a part of the execution period (or execution timing) of both overlaps. In the present embodiment, the execution period (execution timing) of the intense heat cut-in effect is overlapped with the execution period (execution timing) of the button effect, and the intense heat cut-in effect is unexpectedly special for the player. It is possible to execute in various situations. As a condition for overlapping the execution period of the intense heat cut-in effect with the execution period of the button effect, the intense heat cut-in effect has a relatively higher expectation of a big hit than the button effect, or the button effect. It is a condition that the effect of the effect on the player is higher when the heat cut-in effect is executed than when the item is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the intense heat cut-in effect does not overlap with the execution period of the button effect performed at the time of the winning branch of the SP reach. That is, since the button effect performed at the time of the hit-and-miss branch is an important scene in which the result is decided by the button operation, if the intense heat cut-in effect is interrupted, the expectation of the player who has been looking forward to the scene is expected. This is because it may be diminished.

In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the intense heat cut-in effect overlaps with the execution period of the button effect, a part of the button effect is restricted. That is, when the intense heat cut-in effect is executed during the execution period of the button effect, the button image and the indicator image are displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 15, while the effect button 15 emits light. Even if the effect button 15 is operated without setting the operation valid period, it is not effectively accepted (that is, it becomes a fake button effect). Therefore, even if the effect button 15 is operated during the original operation valid period, the effect does not progress triggered by the button operation. Although the operation validity period of the effect button 15 is not set, the indicator image is subtracted and displayed according to the passage of time, and the player is notified of the remaining time of the gap.

The operation valid period of the effect button 15 is managed based on the time value of the effect time timer provided in the effect control means 220 of the effect control board 200. This effect time timer manages the time schedule related to the button effect, and also manages the timing of displaying the button image and the indicator image. This staging time timer starts timing at the start of the variable display or the start of a specific staging (N reach staging or SP reach staging). That is, when the button effect is executed as a pre-reach notice, the time counting of the effect time timer is started starting from the start time of the variation display. On the other hand, when the button effect is executed as a notice after the reach, the time counting of the effect time timer is started starting from the start time of the specific effect (N reach effect or SP reach effect). Here, the button effect may be executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation display, but in that case, the pre-reach notice (at the predetermined timing after the reach, which is the first half of the above-mentioned fluctuation display). The button effect performed as a notice) is shorter than the button effect performed as a post-reach notice (notice at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above). Time up with time (timekeeping time from the start of timekeeping to the start of the operation validity period or the end of the operation validity period is short). Therefore, the longer the time counting time until the operation valid period starts or ends, the higher the probability that the high-expected button effect (big hit confirmation effect) is executed, and the longer the operation valid period starts or ends. The shorter the timekeeping time, the lower the probability that a high-expected button effect (big hit confirmation effect) will be executed. It should be noted that a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo variable effect) may be adopted as a specific effect that serves as a starting point for timing of the effect time timer. In that case, the starting point may be appropriately set at the time of the staging time timer, such as at the start of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the start of the pseudo 3 fluctuation, depending on the number of pseudo series. ..

Next, processing when the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect overlaps with the execution timing of the button effect will be described. Here, FIG. 140 (A) is a time chart when only the button effect is executed, and FIG. 140 (B) is a time chart when the execution timing of the button effect overlaps with the execution timing of the intense heat effect. .. In the following, as an example of the button effect (effect using the effect button), the above-mentioned dialogue notice effect will be described as an example. Even if a button effect other than the dialogue advance effect is applied, the same process is performed.

First, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the execution timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (button effect) arrives, the operation validity period is normally set, and the button image and the indicator image are combined on the screen. And the effect button 15 (LED element built in the effect button 15) is displayed by light emission.

On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, even if the execution timing of the dialogue advance notice effect (button effect) has arrived, if the intense heat comment effect is scheduled to be executed, the button image and the indicator are displayed on the screen. Although the image is displayed, the operation validity period for effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 15 is not set, and even if the effect button 15 is operated while the button image is displayed, the operation is effectively accepted. There is no. That is, even if the effect button 15 is operated, the dialogue display effect does not occur (neither the character nor the dialogue is displayed), and the effect does not progress at all as the button effect. Furthermore, during the display of the button image, the light emitting display of the effect button 15 is not performed in synchronization with it, and such a special situation (a situation in which nothing happens even if the button is operated) occurs. By doing so, it is possible to make the player aware that a high-expectation production (super heat dialogue production) may be executed. Then, when the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect arrives while the button image is being displayed, the cut-in image of the characters "extreme heat" appears on the screen. As a modification, while the button image is being displayed, the effect button 15 may be displayed in light in synchronization with the button image.

In the above-described embodiment, there is only one type of cut-in image, but there may be two or more types of cut-in images, which can be changed as appropriate. For example, prepare a plurality of types of cut-in images having different colors and sizes of the characters "super heat", and suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit according to the type of the cut-in image. According to this, when the intense heat cut-in effect is performed, the player can also pay attention to the type of the cut-in image.

The main effects achieved in the fifth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the fifth embodiment, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the electric support state ends and the game shifts to the latent probabilistic gaming state when a specific small hit type (small hit A) is won. By making it a configuration that allows, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the small hit RUSH other than when the big hit is won or when the specified number of fluctuations are exhausted, and it is possible to give variation to the opportunity to enter the small hit RUSH. Since the timing of entering the hit RUSH is indefinite (irregular), the player's expectation for winning the small hit A for each variable display will be maintained.
It is possible to create unprecedented complexity and variety of playability, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, there are cases where the electric support state is terminated when a small hit is won and cases where the electric support state is terminated when a specified number of variable digestions are triggered. By making the end timing of the state different, it is possible to advance the game appropriately without any discrepancy or tipping according to the actual specifications, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .. That is, when the small hit RUSH is entered with the small hit winning as an opportunity, if the electric support state is terminated at the start of the small hit fluctuation display, the second starting port (normal electric combination) is displayed during the small hit fluctuation display. By checking the number of opening / closing operations and the opening mode of the object), there is a risk that the winning of the small hit will be lost first, so the electric support state is terminated at the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, when the small hit RUSH is entered by the fluctuation digestion of the specified number of times, the electric support state is always continued during the fluctuation display of the specified number of times unless the electric support state is terminated at the start of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times. (That is, if the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is started during the fluctuation display of the specified number of times, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol becomes the fluctuation display in the electric support state), and the electric support state. Since the execution period of is substantially extended, the electric support state is terminated at the start of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, by configuring the melee reach as a many-to-many battle production instead of a one-to-one battle production, the player's interest is limited to the simple victory or defeat (result) of the battle production. Expectations for the entire period from the start to the end of each battle production, such as the production process leading to the final combination of enemies and allies without being poured, and the development that develops according to the combination It becomes possible to have a feeling, and it is possible to create a novel game production that has never existed before, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, in an appropriate situation where the button effect does not compete with other high-expectation effects, a series of processes related to the button effect (button image display-> operation valid period generation-> button operation is triggered. By making the configuration to complete the effect generation), it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to operate the effect button, and the effect of both effects is diluted due to competition with other high-expectation effects. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game. On the other hand, when the execution timing of the intense heat cut-in effect is overlapped with the execution timing of the button effect, even if the button image is displayed, the operation valid period is not set accordingly, and the effect button is operated. By creating a special situation (irregular situation) that does not effectively accept the operation input, it is possible to realize a so-called discomfort effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Variations are given to the production mode, and it is possible to further enhance the satisfaction and achievement of the player when the intense heat cut-in production occurs.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, in the battle production of the many-to-many battle format, the scenario of the battle production is divided into a plurality of stages and lottery is performed in order, so that the process and result of the battle production are performed. However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming a staging scenario with a feeling of a finished race without being easily understood by the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by exchanging the order of participation and battle of characters according to the scenario of the production, while making them related to each other, it becomes difficult to predict the number of characters remaining at the end of the battle production, and the game is played until the end of the battle production. Can attract the attention of others.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of one special symbol is "big hit", the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol is uniquely set to "miss", so that the small hit During the execution of RUSH, it is possible to prevent the number of balls from being increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits of the other special symbol during the variable display of the big hit of one special symbol, which the player obtains. By optimizing the profits that should be taken (balancing the profits of the player and the game store due to irregular events), it is possible to realize a fair and impartial game that does not deviate from the specifications of the gaming machine, and as a result, the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, by optimizing the switching timing of the game state and the switching timing of the staging mode, they are inconsistent with each other. It is possible to maintain the relationship between the non-gaming state and the staging mode.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, when the special symbol type that is the main body of the game is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol by a specific number of variable digestions, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. By taking into account the situation where the variable display of the symbol is performed in parallel, and by controlling to switch the production mode (stage) at the timing suitable for the situation, the player does not feel uncomfortable or distrustful. , The progress processing of the game and the production can be smoothly performed, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in order to realize this, it is necessary to always specify the operating state of each special symbol by synchronously mutually managing a plurality of determination flags for the parallel fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of control.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, in the case of a gaming machine having parallel specifications, when the specification is such that the special symbol type that is the main body is specified according to the current gaming state, it is currently being executed when an irregular hit occurs. Alternatively, by canceling the pre-reading effect or the advance notice lottery scheduled to be executed, the notification of the irregular hit of one special symbol and the notification of the jackpot expectation by the look-ahead effect or the advance notice effect of the other special symbol do not conflict ( In other words, it is possible to realize appropriate display control in parallel specifications without becoming unable to understand the current game situation (what is happening) or making the player feel uncomfortable or distrustful). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the fifth embodiment, the button image for prompting the operation of the staging button and the specific image constituting a part of the high expectation staging (speech display staging) are simultaneously displayed, so that the button image is eventually displayed. Since it will be possible to detect or intuitively recognize in advance whether the production corresponds to the production of (Which production will be the trigger for the button operation to appear), the production with high expectations. It is possible to further enhance the satisfaction and achievement of the player when (speech notice production) occurs, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, by changing the display mode of the specific image in synchronization with the passage of time of the operation valid period, the player can recognize the degree of recognition of the player for the specific image (which effect the specific image corresponds to). The possibility can be gradually increased (that is, even if you do not understand the meaning that the specific image is displayed at the same time as the button image at first, the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (line notice production). (By displaying in a form that follows a part of the production mode), it can be recognized that this specific image is the image (effect image or object image) displayed at the time of the dialogue advance notice production).

[Common transformation example]
Next, a modification of the first to fifth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machines of the first to fifth embodiments described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained.

<Common modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the fifth embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the normal that determines the presence / absence of the probability change transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol. Although a probabilistic gaming machine is adopted, it is not limited to this configuration, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, whether the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A V-probability gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of a probabilistic transition may be adopted depending on whether or not it is present. On the contrary, in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the V probabilistic gaming machine is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a normal probabilistic gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probabilistic gaming state is given when a big hit is obtained with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive latent gaming states may be adopted. Further, in the first embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probabilistic gaming machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game to the occurrence of the next jackpot, but the probability variation function of the special symbol is defined. It may be configured as a probability-changing gaming machine (count-cutting probability-changing machine, ST machine) that continuously operates for the number of STs (for example, 100 times). On the contrary, in the above-mentioned second embodiment to the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probabilistic gaming machine (count-cutting probabilistic machine, ST machine) that continuously operates for a specified number of ST times. The symbol probability variation function may be configured as a probabilistic gaming machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game to the occurrence of the next jackpot.

<Common modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model having only one large winning opening in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model having a plurality of large winning openings in the game area is applied. You may. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V-probability changing gaming machine is provided with a specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of a special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board surface arrangement, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially horizontally in the right side area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board surface area to be created and the board surface area in which the second large winning opening is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out when the game ball enters the first large winning opening and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second large winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) may be the same or different. Of the two major winning openings, the first major winning opening (or the second major winning opening) is for small hit games, and the second major winning opening (or first major winning opening) is for big hit games. It may be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize opening for small hit games may be 10, and the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize openings for big hit games may be 15. good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of types of gaming states, the incubation probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability change game state is defined as a game state in which only the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chew support function are not activated. You may. In addition, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is divided into the fluctuation time shortening function of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the incubation probability variation game state is divided into the probability variation function of the special symbol and the first. 2 It may be defined as a gaming state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time) It may operate independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to clearly understand the technical significance of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the problems corresponding to the above-described embodiment and the modified example will be outlined.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, the result of the above-mentioned hit / fail judgment is a small hit, so that the small hit game in which the earned profit is set to be relatively lower than the big hit game frequently occurs, so that the game It is known that the number of balls held by a person can be gradually increased (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-104177").

In addition, in the conventional pachinko game machine, in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern, a reach effect or a notice effect that suggests a high expectation of transition to a special game (big hit expectation) is executed. Are known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-138834" or "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-16106").

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the first game played when the game ball enters the first start port and the game ball when the game ball enters the second start port. A model called a parallel machine that enables simultaneous execution of a second game to be performed is known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-150373").

In addition, the conventional pachinko gaming machine is equipped with operating means such as buttons that can be operated by the player, and displays an image prompting the operation of the operating means during the variable display of the decorative pattern to actively encourage the player. Those configured to participate in a game are known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-172216").

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and the modified example, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game, and the above-mentioned action and effect are achieved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. In addition, each component described in the above-described embodiment and modified example is appropriately combined, or a part of each component described in the above-described embodiment and modified example is deleted or converted by a well-known / conventional technique or the like. This is also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Direction button 20 Game board 51 1st start port 52 2nd start port 53 Operation gate 54 Large winning port 64 General winning port 70 Production display device 71 1st special symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 100 Main control board 200 Production control board 220 Production control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed and
A starting port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter ,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and
A symbol display device in which a special symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and a symbol display device.
A large winning opening provided in the game area and opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment so that a game ball can enter.
When the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit , a special game execution means capable of executing a special game accompanied by opening the big winning opening, and a special game execution means.
An effect display device that displays a predetermined effect, and
It is provided with an effect determining means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device.
The effect display device can display the variation display and stop display of the first symbol and the variation display and stop display of the second symbol as the display of the symbols that show the result of the hit / fail determination in a staging manner.
The first symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed during the temporary stop display of the special symbol, but the second symbol is configured to continue the variable display even during the temporary stop display of the first symbol.
It has multiple types of production stages, and is configured to be able to output BGM according to the type of production stage.
At least in a predetermined production stage, continuous output is possible without interrupting the predetermined BGM from the end of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol.
When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed, the continuous output of the predetermined BGM is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or the BGM different from the predetermined BGM is output. Is configured to
When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed, and the development effect is executed after the re-variation display, the BGM corresponding to the development effect can be output.
When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the first symbol can be changed to the predetermined mode, while the display mode of the second symbol does not change to the predetermined mode.
It has a first effect pattern, which is an effect pattern that does not execute the development effect during the variable display of the special symbol, and a second effect pattern, which is an effect pattern that executes the development effect during the variable display of the special symbol.
By making it possible to display the first symbol in each of the plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to display the variable display and the stop display of the plurality of first symbols.
In the first staging pattern, while each of the plurality of first symbols can be changed to a predetermined mode,
In the second effect pattern, a part of the first symbols among the plurality of first symbols can be changed to a predetermined mode, but the other first symbols are configured not to be changed to the predetermined mode.
It is configured to be able to execute the production display according to the type of production stage.
In a predetermined production stage, it is possible to display an production display corresponding to the predetermined production stage.
When the development effect is executed after the re-variation display of the first symbol in the predetermined effect stage, the effect display corresponding to the development effect is displayed instead of the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage during the execution of the development effect. It is possible
When the development effect is terminated by executing a special effect during the execution of the development effect after the re-variation display of the first symbol in the predetermined effect stage, the effect display corresponding to the development effect is terminated and the effect is concerned. The effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage can be displayed again during the variable display in which the development effect is executed, but the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage is displayed during the variable display in which the development effect is executed. While the predetermined BGM is not output even in the predetermined situation displayed again, when the variation display in which the development effect is executed ends and the next variation display is started, the predetermined BGM is first. A pachinko game machine that is characterized by being output from .

Images